210 Puma

CASE
PUMA 165 Multi-Controller

TRACTORS
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
Electro-Magnetic Compatibility (EMC)
This tractor complies strictly with the European Regulations on electro-magnetic emissions.
However, interference may arise as a result of add-on equipment which may not necessarily meet
the required standards. As such interference can result in serious malfunction of the unit and/or
create unsafe situations, you must observe the following:
z Ensure that each piece of non-Case IH equipment fitted to the tractor bears the CE mark.
z The maximum power of emission equipment (radio, telephones, etc.) must not exceed the limits
imposed by the national authorities of the country where you use the tractor.
z The electro-magnetic field generated by the add-on system should not exceed 24 V/m at any
time and at any location in the proximity of electronic components.
Failure to comply with these rules will render the Case IH warranty null and void.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY
TO THE OWNER ...................................................................................................................................... 1-1
END USER LICENCE AGREEMENT TERMS ......................................................................................... 1-2
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION ................................................................................................................... 1-3
ECOLOGY AND THE ENVIRONMENT ....................................................................................................1-6
SAFETY INFORMATION .......................................................................................................................... 1-7
SAFETY DECALS ................................................................................................................................... 1-14
INTERNATIONAL SYMBOLS ................................................................................................................. 1-19
AIRBORNE NOISE EMISSION .............................................................................................................. 1-20
SECTION 2
LAYOUT AND FUNCTION OF THE CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS
CAB ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
ELECTRICAL POWER PANEL .............................................................................................................. 2-20
DRIVER’S SEAT ..................................................................................................................................... 2-23
PARKING BRAKE, THROTTLE AND FOOT PEDALS ........................................................................... 2-31
CONTROL ELEMENTS ON THE STEERING COLUMN ....................................................................... 2-33
INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT (ICU) ................................................................................................... 2-36
POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION SYSTEM ............................................................................................ 2-76
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK ............................................................................................................................2-97
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE ............................................................................................................................2-99
FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION (where fitted) .........................................................................................2-101
SECTION 3
WORKING WITH THE TRACTOR
IMPORTANT NOTES ............................................................................................................................... 3-2
CONNECTING JUMP LEADS TO THE BATTERY .................................................................................. 3-4
STARTING THE ENGINE ......................................................................................................................... 3-5
STOPPING THE ENGINE ........................................................................................................................ 3-8
POWER MANAGEMENT (PM) ...............................................................................................................3-10
CONSTANT ENGINE SPEED ................................................................................................................ 3-11
HEADLAND MANAGEMENT CONTROL (HMC) ................................................................................... 3-13
TURN ASSIST (WHERE FITTED) .......................................................................................................... 3-24
REAR PTO ..............................................................................................................................................3-26
FRONT PTO AND THREE-POINT HITCH (where fitted) ....................................................................... 3-40
ELECTRONIC DRAFT CONTROL (EDC) .............................................................................................. 3-56
ELECTRO HYDRAULIC REMOTES ...................................................................................................... 3-68
THREE-POINT HITCH ............................................................................................................................3-86
QUICK HITCH ......................................................................................................................................... 3-92
LINKAGE STABILISERS ........................................................................................................................ 3-94
DRAWBARS AND TOWING ATTACHMENTS ....................................................................................... 3-99
TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEMS (where fitted) ..................................................................................... 3-112
WHEEL TRACKS .................................................................................................................................. 3-119
BALLASTING AND TYRES .................................................................................................................. 3-134
SECTION 4
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE
GENERAL INFORMATION ...................................................................................................................... 4-1
PROTECTIVE GUARDS .......................................................................................................................... 4-5
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHART ...................................................................................... 4-10
WHEN THE WARNING SYMBOL APPEARS ........................................................................................ 4-11
EVERY 10 HOURS OF OPERATION OR DAILY ................................................................................... 4-14
EVERY 50 HOURS ................................................................................................................................. 4-17
EVERY 100 HOURS ............................................................................................................................... 4-28
EVERY 300 HOURS ............................................................................................................................... 4-29
EVERY 600 HOURS ............................................................................................................................... 4-33
EVERY 1200 HOURS OR 12 MONTHS ................................................................................................. 4-40
EVERY 1200 HOURS OR 2 YEARS ...................................................................................................... 4-46
EVERY 3 YEARS ................................................................................................................................... 4-54
GENERAL MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................................... 4-55
STORING THE TRACTOR ..................................................................................................................... 4-73
SECTION 5
FAULT FINDING
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 5-1
ENGINE .................................................................................................................................................... 5-4
TRANSMISSION ...................................................................................................................................... 5-7
HYDRAULICS ........................................................................................................................................... 5-8
THREE-POINT HITCH ............................................................................................................................. 5-9
BRAKES ................................................................................................................................................. 5-10
CAB ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-10
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM .......................................................................................................................... 5-11
SECTION 6
ACCESSORIES
AFS 200 MONITOR (where fitted) ............................................................................................................ 6-2
COOLANT IMMERSION HEATER ........................................................................................................... 6-3
TRANSMISSION OIL HEATER ................................................................................................................ 6-3
ROTATING BEACON ............................................................................................................................... 6-4
AUXILIARY HEADLIGHTS ....................................................................................................................... 6-4
ADDITIONAL 40 AMP SOCKET ............................................................................................................... 6-5
BATTERY ISOLATOR SWITCH ............................................................................................................... 6-6
DYNAMIC FRONT FENDERS .................................................................................................................. 6-7
SECTION 7
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL DIMENSIONS ALL MODELS .................................................................................................7-2
VEHICLE WEIGHTS ................................................................................................................................. 7-5
CAPACITIES ............................................................................................................................................. 7-6
ENGINE .................................................................................................................................................... 7-7
FUEL SYSTEM .........................................................................................................................................7-7
COOLING SYSTEM .................................................................................................................................. 7-8
TRANSMISSION ....................................................................................................................................... 7-8
MAXIMUM OPERATING ANGLE ............................................................................................................. 7-9
REAR POWER TAKE OFF .......................................................................................................................7-9
FRONT POWER TAKE OFF .................................................................................................................... 7-9
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................... 7-10
REMOTE CONTROL VALVES ...............................................................................................................7-14
FRONT 3-POINT HITCH ........................................................................................................................ 7-14
BRAKES ................................................................................................................................................. 7-15
STEERING ..............................................................................................................................................7-15
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................................... 7-16
MINIMUM HARDWARE TIGHTENING TORQUES ................................................................................ 7-17
MINIMUM HARDWARE TIGHTENING TORQUES ................................................................................ 7-18
SECTION 8
FIRST SERVICE SHEETS
SECTION 9
INDEX
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY
TO THE OWNER
GENERAL INFORMATION SAFETY
This Manual has been prepared to assist you in the Pages 1-7 to 1-13 inclusive list the precautions to
correct procedure for running-in, driving and be observed to ensure your safety and the safety of
operating your new tractor and how to maintain it. others. Read the safety precautions and observe
Read this Manual carefully. Your tractor is intended the advice given beforeoperating the tractor.
for use in normal and customary agricultural
applications. SERVICE AFTER FIRST
If at any time you require advice concerning your 50 HOURS WORK
tractor, do not hesitate to contact your authorised In Section 9, at the back of this Manual, you will find
dealer. The dealer has factory trained personnel, the 50-hour service reports.
genuine manufacturers’ parts and the necessary After you have operated the tractor for 50 hours,
equipment to carry out all your service take your tractor, together with this Manual, to your
requirements. dealer. He will then perform the manufacturer’s
Your tractor has been designed and built to give recommended 50 hour service and complete the
maximum performance, economy and ease of service report sheets (pages 9-1 and 9-3). The first
operation under a wide variety of operating sheet (page 9-1) is the dealer’s copy and should be
conditions. Prior to delivery, the tractor was removed by the dealer after the service has been
carefully inspected, both at the factory and by your carried out. The second page (page 9-3) is your
dealer to ensure that it reaches you in optimum copy of the service performed. Ensure that you
condition. To maintain this condition and ensure and the dealer sign both copies.
trouble-free operation, it is important that the
SERVICE PARTS
routine services, as specified in Section 4 of this
Manual, are carried out at the recommended It should be pointed out that genuine parts have
intervals. been examined and approved by the Company.
The installation and/or use of “non-genuine”
OPERATOR’S MANUAL STORAGE products could have negative effects upon the
A storage pocket for the Operator’s Manual can be design characteristics of your tractor and thereby
found on the rear of the seat. The manual should affect its safety. CASE IH is not liable for any
be kept to hand in this pocket at all times. damage caused by the use of “non-genuine” parts
and accessories. Only genuine Case IH
CLEANING THE TRACTOR replacement parts should be used.
Your tractor is a state-of-the-art machine with The use of non-genuine parts may invalidate legal
sophisticated electronic controls. This should be approvals associated with this product.
borne in mind when cleaning the tractor, particularly It is prohibited to carry out any modifications to the
if using a high pressure washer. Even though every tractor unless specifically authorised, in writing, by
precaution has been taken to safeguard electronic the After Sales Service department of the CASE IH.
components and connections, the pressure
generated by some of these machines is such that WARRANTY
complete protection against water ingress cannot Your tractor is warranted according to legal
be guaranteed. regulations in your country and the contractual
When using a high pressure washer, do not stand agreement with the selling dealer. No warranty
too close to the tractor and avoid directing the jet at shall, however, apply if the tractor has not been
electronic components, electrical connections, used, adjusted and maintained according to the
breathers, seals, filler caps, etc. Never direct a cold instructions given in the Operator’s Manual.
water jet at a hot engine or exhaust.
1-1
SECTION 1 – GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY
END USER LICENCE AGREEMENT TERMS

z You have acquired a device (“DEVICE”) that includes Software licensed by CHN America LLC from
Microsoft Licensing, GP or its affiliates (“MS”). Those installed software products of MS origin, as well as
associated media, printed materials and “on-line” or electronic documentation (“SOFTWARE”) are
protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
z IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THIS END USER LICENCE AGREEMENT (“EULA”), YOU MAY NOT USE
THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE. IN THS CASE, CONTACT CNH AMERICA LLC, TO OBTAIN
INSTRUCTIONS ON THE RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE FOR A REFUND. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR
AGREEMENT TO THIS END USER LICENCE AGREEMENT (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS
CONSENT).
z GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENCE. This EULA grants you the following licence:
- You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE.
- NOT FAULT TOLERANT. THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT. CNH AMERICA LLC HAS
INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN THE DEVICE, AND MS HAS
RELIED UPON CNH AMERICA LLC TO CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING TO DETERMINE THAT
THE SOFTWARE IS SUITABLE FOR SUCH USE.
- NO WARRANTY FOR THE SOFTWARE. THE SOFTWARE is provided “AS IS” and with all faults.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND
EFFORT (INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLIGENCE) IS WITH YOU. IN ADDITION THERE IS NO
WARRANTY AGAINST INTERRUPTIONS IN YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR AGAINST
ADVERSE EFFECTS. IF YOU HAVE OBTAINED WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THE DEVICE
OR THE SOFTWARE, THESE DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM MS AND ARE NOT BINDING FOR MS.
- No Liability for Certain Damages. EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, MS SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OF
ANY KIND WHATSOEVER ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY
FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT
IN EXCESS OF TWO HUNDRED AND FIFTY US DOLLARS ($ 250.00).
- Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation, and Disassembly of the Software. You may
not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that
such activity is expressly permitted by application law notwithstanding this limitation.
- SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS. You may permanently transfer
rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the DEVICE, and only if the
recipient agrees to the terms and conditions of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any
transfer must also include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
1-2
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION
The tractor and its major components are
identified using serial numbers and/or
manufacturing codes. These serial numbers and/
or manufacturing codes are required by the
dealer for ordering spare parts and servicing. In
addition they make it possible to identify the
tractor in the event of a theft.
The following provides the locations of the
individual identification plates on the tractor.
1
Vehicle identification plate
The tractor nameplate (1) is located on left-hand
radiator support. Please record the information on
the sample nameplate provided here.
2
Identification of the tractor
The serial number and vehicle identification
information is stamped on the right-hand side of
the front support (1). These numbers are also
repeated on the vehicle identification plate
reproduced above.
1-3
Engine Information
The engine serial number and date of
manufacture are stamped on the engine
information plate located on the left side of the
engine oil pan.
Engine serial no. ................................................
Further information relating to engine adjustments

and emission level compliance are also shown on
this plate.
5
Identification of the of the Driveline
The factory plate with the serial numbers (1) is
located on the transmission casing. Access to the
number can be gained by removing the plate in
the floor of the cab as shown in the illustration.
This number is repeated on the vehicle
identification plate. Record the information below
for quick reference.
Driveline Serial No..............................................
1-4
Identification of the cab

The cab serial number and other information is on
the OECD certification plate. This plate can be
found on the right-hand side of the cab trim panel,
below the rear window. Record the cab serial
number below for quick reference.
Cab Serial No. ....................................................
7
Vehicle weight information
The Vehicle Weighting Plate provides important
information on permitted tractor and towed
equipment weight combinations. This plate can
be found on the right-hand side of the cab trim
panel, below the rear window.
The figures shown are the maximum permissible
weights and should not be exceeded, to do so
may affect the safe operation of the tractor.
1-5
ECOLOGY AND THE ENVIRONMENT

Soil, air and water are vital factors of agriculture 4. The containers must not spill over when
and life in general. Where legislation does not yet draining used engine coolant mixtures, engine,
rule the treatment of some of the substances which gearbox and hydraulic oils, brake fluids, etc.
are required by advanced technology, common Avoid spillage. Do not mix drained brake fluids
sense should govern the use and disposal of or fuels with lubricants. Store them safely until
products of a chemical and petrochemical nature. they can be disposed of in a proper way to
comply with local legislation.
The following are recommendations which may be
5. Modern coolant mixtures, e. g. antifreeze and
of assistance:
other additives, should be replaced every two
z Become acquainted with and ensure that you years. They should not be allowed to get into
understand the relative environmental the soil but should be collected and disposed of
legislation applicable to your country. according to the regulations.
z Where no legislation exists, obtain information 6. Do not open the air-conditioning system
from suppliers of oils, filters, batteries, fuels, yourself. It contains gases which should not be
released into the atmosphere. Your farm
antifreeze, cleaning agents, etc., with regard to
machinery dealer or air conditioning specialist
the effects of these substances on man and
has special machines to extract the coolant
nature and how they should be safely stores,
mixture and to fill air conditioning units, and
uses and disposes of. Agricultural consultants only he can recharge the air conditioning
will, in many cases, be able to help you as well. system.
HELPFUL HINTS 7. Repair any leaks or defects in the engine
cooling or hydraulic system immediately.
1. Avoid filling tanks with fuel using unsuitable
containers or inappropriate pressurised fuel 8. Do not increase the pressure in a pressurised
delivery systems which may cause circuit as this may lead to theaffected
considerable spillage of fuel. components bursting.
2. In general, avoid skin contact with all fuels, oils, 9. Protect hoses during welding, as penetrating
acids, solvents, etc. Most of them contain weld splatter may burn a hole or weaken hose
substances which can be harmful to your lines or sleeves, causing the loss of oils,
health. coolant, etc.
3. Modern oils contain additives. Do not burn
contaminated fuels and/or waste oils in ordinary
heating systems.
1-6
SAFETY INFORMATION
A careful operator is the best operator. Most THE TRACTOR
accidents can be avoided by observing certain 1. Read the Operator’s Manual carefully before
precautions. Please help to prevent accidents. using the tractor. Lack of operating knowledge
Read and take the following precautions, before can lead to accidents.
driving, operating or servicing the tractor. The
2. Only allow properly trained and qualified
tractor and it equipment should be operated only by
persons to operate the tractor.
those who are responsible and instructed to do so.
3. To prevent falls, use the handrails and step
SAFETY INFORMATION plates when getting on and off the tractor. Keep
Throughout this Manual you will see text, preceded steps and platform clear of mud and debris.
by the wordsNOTE, ATTENTION, IMPORTANT, 4. Replace missing, illegible or damaged safety
CAUTION, WARNING or DANGER. Such text has decals.
the following significance:
5. Keep safety decals clean of dirt and grime.
VEHICLE SAFETY
NOTE: This text explains the correct operating
technique or procedure.
WARNING: This text warns the operator of
potential machine damage if a certain procedure is
not followed.
IMPORTANT: This text informs the user of
something that he needs to know to prevent minor
machine damage if a certain procedure is not
followed.
OPERTOR SAFETY
6. Do not permit anyone but the operator to ride
on the tractor - except for driver training or
! CAUTION ! instruction. When used for these purposes an
The word CAUTION is used where a safe additional seat may be fitted in the cab.
behavioural practice, according to operating and Passengers should not be carried on the tractor
maintenance instructions and common safety at any time.
practices will protect the operator and others from
7. Keep children away from the tractor and from
accident involvement.
farm machinery at all times.
8. Do not modify or retrofit the tractor or any of
! WARNING ! its components or any unit function without first
consulting your CIH dealer. Do not permit
The word WARNING denotes a potential or hidden anyone else to modify or retrofit the vehicle.
hazard which could possibly cause serious injury. It
is used to warn operators and others to exercise 9. Install all guards before starting the engine or
due care and attention to avoid a accidents with the operating the tractor.
tractor.
! DANGER !
The word DANGER denotes a forbidden practice in
connection with a serious hazard.
Failure to follow the CAUTION, WARNING and

DANGER instructions may result in serious bodily
injury or even death.
1-7
DRIVING THE TRACTOR

1. Always sit in the driver’s seat while starting or
driving the tractor.
2. When driving on public roads, have
consideration for other road users. Pull in to the
side of the road occasionally to allow any
following traffic to pass. Do not exceed the legal
speed limit set in your country for agricultural
tractors.
3. Use a rotating beacon and/or Slow Moving
Vehicle warning when driving on public roads to
indicate that the vehicle is slow moving and is a
possible hazard.
8. Keep the tractor in the same gear when going
IMPORTANT: Local regulations should be downhill as would be used when going uphill.
observed regarding the use of rotating beacons. Do not coast or freewheel down hills.
4. Dip the tractor lights when meeting a vehicle at 9. For safe operation any towed vehicle whose
night. Make sure the dipped beam is adjusted total weight exceeds that of the towing tractor
to prevent blinding the driver of an oncoming must for safety reasons be equipped with a
vehicle. braking system that complies with the legal
requirements the country in which it is
5. Reduce speed before turning or applying the operating.
brakes. Brake both wheels simultaneously
10. Never apply the differential lock when turning.
when making an emergency stop. Ensure that
When engaged, the differential lock will prevent
both brake pedals are locked together when
the tractor from turning.
travelling at road speeds or when on public
roads to ensure correct operation of trailer 11. Always check overhead clearance, especially
brakes, balanced operation of the tractor when transporting the tractor. Watch the terrain
brakes and four wheel braking (4WD tractors and watch where you are going, especially at
only) row ends, on roads and around trees and low
overhanging obstacles.
12. To avoid overturning, drive the tractor with care
and at speeds compatible with safety,
especially when operating over rough ground,
when crossing ditches or slopes and when
turning corners.
6. On four wheel drive tractors, the drive to the

front axle is automatically engaged when both
footbrakes are applied. Owners should be
aware of the effectiveness of four wheel
braking which greatly enhances braking
performance. Appropriate care should be
exercised during heavy braking.
7. Use extreme caution and avoid sudden braking
when towing heavy loads at road speeds.
13. Use extreme caution when operating the tractor
on steep slopes.
14. If the tractor becomes stuck or the tyres spin,
reverse the tractor out to prevent overturning.
1-8

1. Apply the parking brake, place the PTO control
in the “OFF” position, the lift control lever in the
down position, the remote control valve levers
in the neutral position and the transmission
levers in neutral before starting the tractor.
2. Do not start the engine or operate controls
(other than externally located hydraulic lift or
PTO switches, if fitted) while standing beside
the tractor. Always sit in the tractor seat when
starting the engine or operating the controls.
3. Do not on any account bypass the transmission
and PTO neutral start switches. Contact your
CIH dealer, if the neutral start controls 8. Do not park the tractor on a steep incline.
malfunction. Use jump leads only in the 9. The cab is designed to provide the minimum
recommended manner. Improper use can result noise level at the operator’s ears and meets or
in a tractor runaway. exceeds applicable standards in this respect.
However, noise (sound pressure level) in the
workplace can exceed 85 dB(A) when working
between buildings or in confined spaces, with
cab windows open. Therefore, it is
recommended that operators wear suitable ear
protectors when operating in high noise level
conditions.
4. Avoid accidental contact with the gear shift

levers while the engine is running. Unexpected
tractor movement can result from such contact.
5. Do not get off the tractor while it is in motion.
6. If the power steering or engine ceases
operating, stop the tractor immediately as the 10. Do not run the tractor engine in an enclosed
tractor will be more difficult to control. building without adequate ventilation. Exhaust
fumes are toxic and can cause death.
7. Before leaving the tractor, park the tractor on
level ground, apply the parking brake, lower 11. Vehicles and implements may only be pulled
mounted implements to the ground, disengage from the pick-up hitch, swinging drawbar or the
the PTO and stop the engine. lower link drawbar. Use only a drawbar pin that
locks in place. Attaching tow ropes or similar to
the tractor rear axle or any point above the rear
axle may cause the tractor to turn over.
1-9
12. Always select Position Control when attaching PTO OPERATION

equipment and when transporting equipment. 1. Before operating PTO-driven equipment, shut
Be sure hydraulic couplers are properly off the engine, switch off the PTO and wait until
mounted and will disconnect safely in case of the PTO stops before getting off the tractor and
accidental detachment of the implement. disconnecting the equipment.
13. If the front end of the tractor tends to rise when 2. Do not wear loose clothing when operating the
heavy implements are attached to the power take-off or especially when near rotating
three-point hitch, install front end or front wheel equipment.
weights. Do not operate the tractor with a light
3. When operating stationary PTO-driven
front end.
equipment, always apply the tractor parking
14. Engage the clutch slowly when driving out of a brake and block the rear wheels front and back.
ditch, gully or up a steep hillside. Disengage the
clutch promptly if the front wheels rise off the
ground.
15. Ensure any attached equipment or accessories
are correctly installed, are approved for use
with the tractor, do not overload the tractor and
are operated and maintained in accordance
with the instructions issued by the equipment or
accessory manufacturer.
16. Remember that your tractor, if abused or
incorrectly used, can be dangerous and
become a hazard both to the operator and to
bystanders. Do not overload or operate with 4. To avoid accidents with PTO-driven equipment,
attached equipment which is unsafe, not do not clean, adjust, unclog or service these
designed for the particular task or is poorly when the tractor engine is running. Ensure that
maintained. the PTO is switched off.
17. Before switching off the engine and leaving the 5. Make sure the PTO guard is in position at all
tractor, always lower attached equipment to the times and always replace the PTO cap when
ground. the PTO is not in use.
18. Do not drive equipment near open fires.
19. Always wear a protective mask when working
with toxic spray chemicals. Follow the
directions on the chemical container.
1 - 10
SERVICING THE TRACTOR z Never use your hand to check for leaks. Use a
piece of cardboard or paper to search for leaks.
z Stop the engine and relieve the pressure before

disconnecting or connecting lines.
1. The cooling system operates under pressure

which is controlled by the expansion tank cap. It
is dangerous to remove the cap while the
engine is hot. Always turn the cap slowly to the
first stop and allow the pressure to escape z Tighten all connections before starting the
before removing the cap entirely. Never remove engine or pressurising lines.
the cap from the top of the radiator unless the z If fluid is injected into the skin obtain medical
expansion tank pressure cap has first been attention immediately or gangrene may result.
removed.
8. Do not modify or alter the tractor or any of its
2. Do not smoke while refuelling the tractor. Keep components or any tractor function without first
any type of open flame away. consulting an authorised dealer. Do not permit
3. Keep the tractor and equipment, particularly anyone else to modify or retrofit the vehicle.
brakes and steering, maintained in a reliable 9. Continuous long term contact with used engine
and satisfactory condition to ensure your safety oil may cause skin cancer. Avoid prolonged
and comply with legal requirements. contact with used engine oil. Wash affected
4. To prevent fire or explosion, keep open flames skin promptly with soap and water.
away from the starter battery or cold weather 10. Always keep equipment clean and properly
starting aids. To prevent sparks which could maintained.
cause explosion, use jumper cables according
to instructions. 11. Dispose of all drained fluids and removed filters
properly.
5. Do not attempt to service the air conditioning
system. It is possible to be severely frost bitten 12. Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with
or injured by escaping refrigerant. Special care and ensure, when stored, that they cannot
equipment and instruments are required to topple and cause injury.
service the air conditioning system. Contact
your CIH dealer for servicing.
6. Stop the engine before performing any service
on the tractor.
7. Hydraulic fluid and fuel in the injection system
operate under high pressure. Hydraulic fluid or
diesel escaping under pressure can penetrate
the skin causing serious injury.
Unqualified persons should not remove or
attempt to adjust a pump, injector, nozzle or
any other part of the fuel injection or hydraulic
systems. Failure to follow these instructions
can result in serious injury.
1 - 11
DIESEL FUEL
1. On no account may diesel fuel be mixed with
petrol, alcohol or fuel blends. These
combinations can create an increased fire or
explosive hazard. In a closed container such as
a fuel tank these blends are more explosive
than pure petrol. Do not use these blends.
2. Never remove the fuel cap or refuel with the
engine running or hot.
3. Do not smoke while refuelling the tractor or

when standing near fuel. Keep any type of open
flame away.
4. Maintain control of the fuel filler pipe nozzle
when filling the tank.
5. Do not fill the fuel tank to capacity. Fill only to
the bottom of the filler neck to allow room for
the fuel to expand.
6. Wipe up spilled fuel immediately.
7. Always tighten the fuel tank cap securely.
8. If the original fuel tank cap is lost, replace it with
a genuine cap. A non approved cap from other
manufacturers may not be safe.
9. Never use fuel for cleaning purposes.
10. Arrange fuel purchases so that summer grade
fuels are not held over and used in the winter.
WHEN YOU SEE THIS SYMBOL ! , IT MEANS: ATTENTION!

BECOME ALERT! YOUR SAFETY IS INVOLVED!
1 - 12
ROLLOVER PROTECTION
! WARNING !
Your machine is equipped with an operator
protective structure: a Roll Over Protective
Structure (ROPS) or Falling Object Protective
Structure (FOPS) or Cab with ROPS. A ROPS may
be a cab frame or a two-posted or four-posted
structure used for the protection of the operator to
minimise the possibility of serious injury.
The Protective Structure is a special safety
component of your vehicle.
DO NOT attach any device to the Protective
Structure for pulling purposes. DO NOT drill holes
in the Protective Structure.
The Protective Structure and interconnecting
components are a certified system. Any damage,
fire, corrosion or modification will weaken the
structure and reduce your protection. If this occurs,
the Protective Structure MUST be replaced so that
it will provide the same protection as a new
Protective Structure. Contact your dealer for
Protective Structure inspection and replacement.
After an accident, fire, tip or roll over, the following
MUST be performed by a qualified technician
before returning the machine to field or job site
operation.
z The Protective Structure MUST be replaced.
z The mounting or suspension for the Protective

Structure, operator seat and suspension, seat
belts and mounting components and wiring
within the operator’s protective system MUST
be carefully inspected for damage.
z All damaged parts MUST be replaced.

DO NOT WELD, DRILL HOLES, ATTEMPT TO
STRAIGHTEN OR REPAIR THE PROTECTIVE
STRUCTURE. MODIFICATION IN ANY WAY CAN
REDUCE THE STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY OF
THE STRUCTURE WHICH COULD CAUSE
DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY IN THE EVENT OF
FIRE, TIP, ROLL OVER, COLLISION OR
ACCIDENT.
1 - 13
SAFETY DECALS
The safety decals on the following pages are positioned on your tractor in the locations shown in the drawings
below. They are for your safety and the safety of the people who work with you. Please take this Manual, go
around the tractor and take note of the decals and their meaning. Go through the decals and the instructions
described in this Manual with the operators. Keep the decals clean and legible. If they are damaged or
become illegible, you can get replacements from your dealer.
1 - 14
1. Location:
Left and right-hand side of the fan housing
Keep hands and clothing away from the rotating
fan and the V-belt.
Part number 81871830
9
2. Location:
Right-hand side of radiator
Warning! Pressurised cooling system. Allow to
cool then remove cap carefully. Using a rag, turn
the cap to the first stop and allow the pressure to
fall before removing the cap entirely.
Part number 5194556
10
3. Location:
Left-hand A-pillar in the cab
General Warning. Read and observe all warnings
in this Manual.
11
4. Location:
Rear of both fenders
(with external power lift controls only)
To prevent accidents, do not stand on or near the
implement or between the implement and tractor
when operating the external hydraulic power lift
controls.
12
1 - 15
5. Location:
Left-hand A-pillar in the cab
If the tractor turns over, hold onto the steering
wheel. Do not attempt to jump out.
13
6. Location:
Top of the toolbox
Do not stand on toolbox.
14
7. Location
Top of the battery
Do not stand on toolbox.
Danger! Corrosive acids. Explosive gas.
Wear goggles. Avoid sparks. See Operator’s
Manual.
15
1 - 16
8. Location
Radar sensor bracket
Do not look directly into the face of the sensor so
as to avoid eye damage from microwaves
radiating from the radar sensor.
16
9. Location:
Hydraulic accumulator(s)
Caution! High pressure accumulator. Follow
service manual instructions for removal or repair.
17
10. Location:
Right-hand A-pillar in the cab
Caution! Read this operator’s manual before
attempting to tow.
18
11. Location:
Air Con Compressor
Warning! Liquid under pressure. Do not
disconnect lines.
19
1 - 17
12. Location:
Right-hand console
Caution! Always use grab handles when entering
or leaving platform.
20
13. Location:
left-hand side of radiator
Warning! Cold-start aid heater grid. Do not use
ether or risk of explosion will occur.
21
14. Location:
Right-hand “A” pillar inside
Warning! Deactivate the Fast Steer System, when
you travel on the roads. Please read this
operator’s manual.
22
15. Location:
Right-hand door
Cab exit door only, cannot be opened from
outside. Read Operator’s Manual.
23
1 - 18
INTERNATIONAL SYMBOLS
As a guide to the operation of the tractor, various universal symbols have been utilised on the instruments,
controls, switches, and fuse box. The symbols are depicted and described below
Glow plug in the

Warning!
air intake pipe Radio Position control
Corrosive substance
Cold start device
Battery Continuous
PTO Traction control
charging current
Transmission in
Fuel level Indicators Power socket
neutral
Automatic Indicators Standard signal

Crawler gears
fuel shutoff 1st trailer socket
Engine speed Indicators Slow or

Wheel slip in %
(rpm x 100) 2nd trailer low setting
Windscreen Hitch up
Operating hours Fast or high setting
Wipe/Wash (rear)
Rear
Engine oil Hitch down
windscreen Direction of travel
pressure (rear)
Wipe/Wash
Coolant Heating Height limit control
Differential lock
temperature thermostat (rear)
Radiator coolant Rear axle Height limit control

Fan heater
level Oil temperature (front)
Air Transmission oil

Tractor lights Hitch locked
conditioning pressure
Lights Air Filter 4 wheel drive Hydraulics and

main beam Blocked is selected transmission filter
Headlight 4 wheel drive Remotevalve

Parking brake
dipped beam not engaged extend
Brake fluid
Worklamps Warning! Remotevalve retract
level
Remotevalve
Brake lights Trailer brake Hazard flashers
floating position
Malfunction!
Roof rotating
Horn Controller See Operator’s
beacon
Manual
System under
Malfunction!
pressure!
(alternative symbol)
Open carefully
1 - 19
AIRBORNE NOISE EMISSION

In accordance with the specifications of EU directives, the noise levels permitted for the tractors
described in this manual are as follows::
Tractors with cabin and fixed windscreen with air cleaner extraction system
Noise level at driver’s ear Drive by noise level
Closed (1) Open (2)
Model Transmission Annex II* Annex II* Annex IV**
PUMA 165 Full Powershift 71.0 dB(A) 79.0 dB(A) 80.0 dB(A)
* Test results are in accordance with directive 77/311/EEC Annex II.
Maximum noise level at the operator’s ear with:

1) all cab windows and doors closed, tractor off load
2) rear window and roof hatch open, tractor off load
** Test results in accordance with EU Directive 74/151/EEC, Annex IV.

In accordance with the specifications of EU directives, the noise levels permitted for the tractors described in
this manual are as follows
1 - 20
SECTION 2
LAYOUT AND FUNCTION OF THE CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS
BEFORE OPERATING PROGRAMMING TRACTOR FUNCTIONS
Read this section thoroughly. It details the location The tractor is fitted with APM (Automatic
and operation of the various instruments, switches Productivity Management); a system that utilises
and controls on your tractor. Even if you operate electronic memory facilities to programme and
other tractors, you should thoroughly read this control various operating functions. An operating
section of the manual and ensure that you are memory temporarily stores settings and
familiar with the location and function of all the adjustments made while operating the tractor and
features of the tractor. these are transferred to the main memory when
Do not start the engine or attempt to drive or you key-off (engine stop).
operate the tractor until you are fully accustomed If you key-off and key-on again too quickly as data
with all the controls. It is too late to learn once the is being transferred between the operating and
tractor is moving. If in doubt about any aspect of main memories, some of the data may be lost or
operation of the tractor, consult your authorised NH corrupted.
dealer.
If changes have been made to any memorised
Pay particular attention to the recommendations for settings while operating the tractor, pause for five
running-in to ensure that your tractor will give the seconds between key-off and key-on to provide
long and dependable service for which it was sufficient time for data to transfer between the
designed. See page 3 - 2. operating memory and the main memory. Once
transferred, the new settings will remain unchanged
This section is split into various subjects, as
follows. Detailed instructions on setting up and until they are reprogrammed.
running adjustments on implements in the field will Subject Page
be found in Section 3, “Field Operation”.
Instructions for the operation of various optional Cab 2-4
accessories will be found in Section 7.
Lubrication and maintenance requirements will be Electrical Power Sockets 2 - 20
found in Section 4. Tractor specifications are listed
in Section 8.
Driver’s Seat 2 - 23
A comprehensive index is provided at the end of
this operator’s manual.
Parking Brake, Throttle and Foot Controls 2 - 31
Steering Column 2 - 33
Integrated Control Unit 2 - 36
Full Powershift Transmission

(17 x 6, 18 x 6 and 19 x 6) 2 - 76
Differential Lock and Four Wheel Drive 2 - 97
Front Suspension 2 - 101
2-1
SECTION 2 - LAYOUT AND FUNCTION OF THE CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS
CONTROLS IN THE DRIVER’S CAB
General View of Tractor Controls
2-2
Key to Figure 1 Description on Page

1. Foot Throttle Pedal............................................................................................................................... 2 - 31
2. not in use.......................................................................................................................................................
3. Transmission controls ..........................................................................................................................2 - 76
4. AFS 200 Monitor .................................................................................................................................... 6 - 2
5. Remote control valve levers
Electro-hydraulic operation...................................................................................................................3 - 68
6. Hydraulics controls ............................................................................................................................... 3 - 57
7. EHC panel ............................................................................................................................................3 - 56
8. PTO controls
Front ..................................................................................................................................................... 3 - 51
Rear...................................................................................................................................................... 3 - 26
9. Electrical power panel ..........................................................................................................................2 - 20
10. External controls (where fitted)
3-point hitch.......................................................................................................................................... 3 - 67
Rear PTO ............................................................................................................................................. 3 - 38
11. Release handle
Tow hitch ............................................................................................................................................ 3 - 106
Automatic pick-up hitch ...................................................................................................................... 3 - 110
12. Rear window locking handle................................................................................................................... 2 - 6
13. Cab air recirculation filter...................................................................................................................... 2 - 15
14. Cab climate controls (“C” pillar).................................................................................................2 - 10, 2 - 13
15. Parking brake ....................................................................................................................................... 2 - 31
16. Instructional seat .................................................................................................................................. 2 - 30
17. Seat controls ........................................................................................................................................ 2 - 23
18. Clutch/inching pedal ............................................................................................................................. 2 - 31
19. Multi-function switch ............................................................................................................................. 2 - 34
20. Shuttle lever ......................................................................................................................................... 2 - 78
21. Turn assist ............................................................................................................................................3 - 24
22. Key start switch .............................................................................................................................2 - 33, 3-6
23. Wash/wipe control ................................................................................................................................2 - 35
24. Brake pedals ........................................................................................................................................ 2 - 32
25. Integrated Control Unit ......................................................................................................................... 2 - 36
26. Enhanced keypad (where fitted)........................................................................................................... 2 - 55
2-3
CAB
Introduction
The cab has been designed for operator protection
and maximum comfort and convenience. The
frame, roof and floor of the cab interior are
insulated to reduce noise to a minimum.
A wide opening door on the left-hand side permits
entry to the cab aided by convenient grab handles
and footsteps with anti-slip treads. The door and
rear window are fitted with gas struts to hold them
in the fully open position. Additionally, the rear
window may be retained in the partially open
position for increased ventilation during operation.
The cab features include a fresh air heater/
defroster with recirculation, air conditioning, sun
visor, tinted glass, interior light, auxiliary power 1
socket, storage facilities, interior/exterior rear view
mirrors and comfortable seat.
Options include automatic climate control, high
visibility roof panel, radio cassette, CD player, rear
windscreen wash/wipe and electrically operated
external rear view mirrors.
External Door Handle

The left-hand door has an external handle with a
push button (1). The door may be locked from the
outside using the key provided. Insert the key and
rotate clockwise a half turn to lock.
2
Interior Door Handle
To open the left-hand door from inside the cab,
press the trigger (2) on the underside of the grab
handle upwards (1). Use the grab handle to push
the door open.
2-4
Right-Hand Exit Door

The right-hand door can also be used to exit the
cab if required. To open the door, lift the locking
lever until it clears the retaining pin and push the
door open.
NOTE: The door cannot be unlatched from outside
the tractor.
Exiting the tractor via this door also provides easier
access to the fuse and relay panels located below
removable panels on the right-hand side of the cab.
When closing the door, ensure the slot in the
locking lever is correctly positioned above the
retaining pin then push fully down until it the lever is
locked. 4
2-5
Entering and Exiting the Cab

Wherever possible, the cab should be entered from
the left side.
! CAUTION !
When entering the cab from the right-hand side,
use only the grab handles to assist in climbing the
steps. If the gear levers are grasped inadvertently,
a tractor runaway may result.
To enter the cab, face the door, then open it. Place
one foot on the lowest step plate and, using the
grab handles on the “A” pillar and inside the door,
climb the steps and enter the cab.
5
Sit on the driver’s seat and pull the door closed
using the knob (1). Fasten the seat belt, where
fitted.
To exit the cab, release the seat belt, open the door,
grasp the grab handles, back out of the cab and
descend the steps using the grab handles.
6
Rear Window
The rear window may be locked in the closed
position or retained in the partially open or fully
open positions.
To open the window, lift the central locking
handle (1) up to the vertical position. Allow the
window to open a little, then push the handle down
so that the locking tongue engages the slot (2) in
the framework. Alternatively, the window may be
allowed to swing fully open supported by two
gas-filled struts.
IMPORTANT: Retain control of the window when

opening it fully. Do not allow it to swing open freely.
Using the grab handle, pull the window closed and 7
push the handle down to lock the window.
2-6
High Visibility Roof Panel (where fitted)

The high visibility roof panel provides the driver with
a view to the bucket or grab when the loader or
excavator excavator is in the raised position.
For extra ventilation the roof panel may be opened
in one of three ways. Using the grab handles (1),
push up at the front or rear to angle the panel.
Or press the handlein the middle to open the panel
fully.
To close the panel, grasp both handles and pull the
panel down. The spring action of the handles will
hold the panel in the closed position.
NOTE: Before transporting the tractor on a truck or
trailer at a speed of more than 50 km/h (31 MPH)
8
ensure that the roof hatch is locked correctly and
cannot open of its own accord. See page for more
information 3 - 3.
The sun visor may be adjusted to reduce glare or

can be fully closed if required.
9
Sun visor
Pull down the sun visor (1) to protect the driver’s
eyes from the glare of the sun. The visor will remain
in the chosen position. Push the visor up to retract.
10
2-7
External Rear View Mirrors

Non-extending arm
Move the mirror arm, as required, to obtain the best
rearward view. To adjust the angle of the mirror
head, loosen the knob (1). Tighten the knob when
the mirror is at the correct angle. The mirror arm
may be swivelled forward to clear obstructions if
necessary.
11
With extending arm
rearward view. When the knob (1) is loosened, the
telescopic arm may be extended, as shown. This
feature will be beneficial when towing wide trailers
or equipment. To adjust the angle of the mirror
head, loosen the knob (2). Ensure both knobs are
fully tightened when the mirror is correctly
positioned. The mirror arm may be swivelled
forward for cleaning, if necessary.
12
Power mirror system
With the optional power mirror system the position
of the mirror head may be adjusted electrically.
Select the mirror to be adjusted by moving the
switch (1) to the left or right. Then, using the 4-way
control (2) move it sideways to adjust the lateral
view or up and down to adjust the vertical position.
With the selector switch (1) in the mid position the
power adjustment function will be deactivated.
13
2-8

rearward view. When the knob (1) is loosened, the
telescopic arm may be extended or retracted.
To make initial adjustment to the vertical position of
the mirror, loosen the clamp screws (2), reposition
the mirror head and re-tighten the screws.
14
The power adjust mirrors are also electrically
heated. Momentarily depress the switch (1) to turn
on the heating element. The mirror heater will
automatically switch off after 5 minutes.
1
15
2-9
Interior Light
The interior light (2), has three operating positions.
Depress the front and the light will remain on,
depress the rear and the light will illuminate when
either of the doors are opened.
The step light (1) operates in conjunction with the
interior light. This light provides illumination of the
step area when the door is opened.
When the switch is in the central position, the light
is off, irrespective of the position of the doors.
16
Console Light
The light (1) provides a soft glow to the gear levers
and hydraulic console. The light is illuminated when
the tractor’s headlights are turned on. A second
light is provided on the left side of the cab to
illuminate the drinks holder and storage box.
17
Heater control knob
Turn the knob (2) clockwise to increase the
temperature of the air from the heater. Turn fully
anticlockwise to obtain unheated air from the heater
vents.
Blower Switch
A 4-speed blower is installed for the heater (and air
conditioning unit, where fitted). Turn the switch (1)
clockwise to the first position for low speed. Further
rotation of the switch in a clockwise direction
selects the medium and fast fan speeds.
With the windows closed, the blower may be used
to pressurise the cab to exclude dust, etc. Provided
that the cab air filters are serviced correctly,
maximum pressurisation and optimum dust 18
exclusion may be achieved by operating the blower
at maximum fan speed.
2 - 10
Adjustable air vent

Adjustable air vents are provided throughout the
cab for even distribution of heated or cooled air.
Vents are located each side of the driver’s seat and
on the instrument console. Each vent may be
independently adjusted to direct the air flow (with
the blower control actuated) onto the side windows
or the driver. The two vents located on the upper
part of the instrument console may be adjusted to
demist the windscreen.
Lift the tag on the rectangular vents to open, and
then adjust for air flow and direction as required.
19
Climate Controller
Depress the switch (3) to activate the air
conditioning compressor and lower the temperature
of the air within the cab. The air conditioning will
only operate with the blower (1) switched on.
IMPORTANT: The air conditioning system uses

R134A refrigerant. Do not mix this refrigerant with
other refrigerants.
To quickly reduce in cab temperature operate the 3
air conditioner with the blower speed set to
maximum and the heater control fully off. When the
air has cooled sufficiently, adjust the blower control
to maintain the desired temperature. The windows
and doors should remain closed. 20
Under certain conditions, it may be desirable to
operate both the air conditioning unit and heater
together, e. g., to demist the windscreen and
interior door glass on a cold morning. The air
conditioning, as well as cooling, also removes
moisture from the air. Run the engine to normal
operating temperature, turn the heater temperature
control (2) and blower control (1) to the maximum
settings (fully clockwise). Turn on the air
conditioner (3) and adjust the air vents to direct the
air flow, as required.
2 - 11
When the windows are clear, turn the air

conditioning off and adjust the heater controls to
maintain the desired cab air temperature.
IMPORTANT: Run the engine at idle speed for at
least 3 minutes after switching on the air
conditioner, if the air conditioning has been out of
use for more than 30 days.
IMPORTANT: Always turn the air conditioning off
when cooled or de-humified air is not required.
For proper operation of the air conditioning, ensure
that the cab air filters are serviced regularly.
See section 4.
! WARNING !
Before driving or operating the tractor, study the
safety precautions in Section 1 of this Manual.
z Never expose any part of the air conditioner

system to a direct flame or excessive heat
because of the risk of fire or explosion.
z Never disconnect or disassemble any part of
the air conditioner system. Escaping refrigerant
will cause frostbite. Allowing refrigerant to
escape into the atmosphere is illegal in many
countries.
z If refrigerant should contact the skin, use the
same treatment as for frostbite. Warm the area
with your hand or lukewarm water at 32-38 °C
(90-100° F). Cover the area loosely with a
bandage to protect the affected area and to
prevent infection. Consult a doctor immediately.
z If refrigerant should contact the eyes, wash the

eyes immediately with cold water for at least
5 minutes. Consult a doctor immediately.
NOTE: It is the normal function of the air
conditioning to extract water from the air. Drain
hoses lead from the air conditioner unit to a point
beneath the cab. Do not be concerned if a pool of
water collects beneath the drain hose outlets when
the engine is stopped.
2 - 12
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) (where fitted)

Automatic Control
With Automatic Temperature Control the the driver
can set the temperature inside the cab to maintain
a comfortable working environment.
By automatically adjusting the output of the heating
and air conditioning systems, ATC will provide a
stable cab temperature between 16 °C (61 °F) and
32 °C (90 °F).
The blower control switch (1) has five positions:
OFF, ATC and three blower speeds. With ATC
selected, the speed of the blower fan is controlled
automatically.
To set the cab interior temperature, align the mark
on the control knob (2) with the desired figure.
If required, the control can be set to the
intermediate positions between the figures to
provide additional temperature levels. 21
If the temperature in the cab remains within 1.1 °C
(2 °F) of that set on the control, the blower fan will
maintain a low speed. As the differential between
the control setting and the in-cab temperature
increases, the blower speed will be raised to
re-stabilise the temperature.
Selecting “HI” or “LO” on the temperature control
will override the automatic system to provide a
maximum heating or cooling effect.
Manual Control
To manually set the cab temperature, switch the
blower control to position I, II or III and select a
suitable setting on the temperature control. This will
disable the ATC function.
Although the in cab temperature will be maintained
within limits, it will not be as efficient as ATC.
Switching to “LO” will provide maximum air
conditioning output with temperature adjustment
through the blower control only.
2 - 13
Economy and Defrost Switch

The economy and defrost switch has three
positions:
1. Left side depressed. ECONomy mode.
2. Central position. ECON and MAX DEF off.
3. Right side depressed. MAX DEFrost on.
When the external air temperature is low, operating
the air conditioning may not be necessary to
maintain a constant temperature inside the cab.
To turn off the air conditioning, depress the ECON
side of the switch.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor uses
engine power to drive it. Turning off the air 22
conditioning when not required will aid fuel economy.
The cab temperature will be maintained within the
specified limits unless the external air temperature
rises above that set on the control. Should this
occur, select the central switch position to turn on
the air conditioning.
In very cold conditions where the outside of the cab
windows become covered in ice, depress the MAX
DEF side of the switch. This will automatically set
the heater temperature to maximum, activate the
air conditioning (if not already switched on) and
select the highest speed setting on the blower fan.
This function may also be used to clear heavy
misting on the inside of the cab windows.
2 - 14
Air Recirculation
The cab ventilation system has three filters: two
external filters through which fresh air is drawn into
the cab and one internal air recirculation filter (2).
Move the slider control (1) fully to the right for
maximum air recirculation.
! WARNING !
The cab air filters are designed to remove dust from
the air but will not exclude chemical vapour. Follow
the chemical manufacturer’s directions regarding
protection from hazardous chemicals.
23
Cabair filters
When operating with pesticides, both internal air
filters (recirculation) and external cab air filters (1)
may be replaced with special charcoal filters.
Consult your authorised dealer.
! CAUTION !
Use only genuine Case IH filter elements when
renewing cab air filters. When replacing used filters,
follow local regulations in the disposal of
contaminated elements.
Safety Precautions
24
Although it is possible to pressurise the cab interior

to reduce ingress of chemical vapour, the
recommended safety procedures, as stipulated by
the pesticide manufacturer, should be observed at
all times.
Protective clothing worn when filling the sprayer
with pesticides or when carrying out external
adjustments, should be removed and stored away
carefully before re-entering the tractor cab.
To prevent build-up of chemical residue inside the
cab, the interior trim and floor covering should be
wiped clean with a damp cloth on a regular basis.
2 - 15
Cab Pressurisation Monitor (where fitted)

To improve protection against chemical vapours
entering the cab when spraying pesticides, the
blower can be used, in conjunction with active
charcoal filters, to raise the air pressure inside the
cab above that of the external air pressure. Whilst
this pressure differential is maintained, chemical
vapours should not enter the cab. Ensure all cab
apertures are fully closed. To monitor the internal
pressure, a gauge is mounted inside the cab.
Cab Air Pressurisation Gauge
Observe the reading on the pressure gauge. If the
lower edge (1) of the yellow indicator centres in the
green area, you have an adequate pressure
differential between the internal and external air
pressure. Adjust the blower speed to maintain that
reading. If the yellow indicator rises into the red
area, increase blower speed to raise the internal
cab pressure.
! CAUTION !
If, during spray operations, the lower edge of the
yellow indicator enters the red section of the gauge,
carry out the checks below and follow the chemical
manufacturer’s recommendations for safe operation. 25
With the blower in the off position the yellow

indicator should move into the red area. If the
indicator does not register correctly, the gauge
should be replaced before operating with chemical
spray equipment.
If the blower is unable to maintain the correct
pressure inside the cab, then the following checks
should be made to determine the cause of the
problem.
1. Check blower is on maximum speed.
NOTE: If Automatic Temperature Control is
activated, it maybe necessary to switch to manual
control to increase blower speed.
2. Ensure all doors, windows and roof panel are
fully closed.
3. Check external air filters for blockage or
restriction.
4. Examine all cab aperture seals for damage.
5. Check sealing around linkages and levers
where they pass through the cab floor and side
panels.
If, after all the checks have been made the cab
interior pressure cannot be maintained, consult
your authorised dealer.
2 - 16
Radio/Cassette/CD Player (where fitted)

The cab is pre-wired and has two speakers
installed in the roof (four speakers are available as
a dealer-installed accessory). A choice of
self-seeking AM/FM stereo radio/cassette or radio/
CD players (1) is also available as a
dealer-installed accessory. There is a separate
operator’s manual for the radio.
NOTE: The radio will only operate with the key-start
switch in the ON or ACCESSORIES position.
! WARNING !
Ensure the aerial is positioned so it cannot touch
overhead power lines. 26
Work Lamp and Beacon Switch Panel

NOTE: The worklamps are only operative with the
tractor headlights switched on.
The switches are located on a panel mounted in the
roof console (1). Individual switches control the
front and rear work lamps and the rotating beacon
(for more information, see “Accessories” section).
Depress the switch to switch the headlight or the
beacon on, reactivating the switch switches it off
again.
When the key-start switch is turned on, the
switches will be internally illuminated. The light
intensity will increase as each switch is activated.
NOTE: Do not adjust a fender-mounted, rear work 27
lamp to point fully downwards. The heat generated
by the work lamp may distort the plastic housing of
the rear lamp cluster.
2 - 17
Mobile Telephone Usage

A storage bracket (1) is provided on the left-hand
cab “C” pillar for a mobile telephone. Auxiliary
power for the telephone may be taken from the
cigarette lighter socket above.
28
Implement Monitor Installation

To facilitate installation of an implement monitor,
two mounting points are provided:
To meet SAE standards, captive bolts (1), protected
by plastic covers, are provided on the the
right-hand cab “C” pillar.
It is recommended that a bracket be screwed to the
“C” pillar to mount the monitor. A suitable bracket is
available from your authorised dealer.
29
An alternative monitor mounting position (1) is

provided on the inner face of the right-hand “A”
pillar.
30
2 - 18
Cable and Harness Routing

So the operating cable from the monitor may be
conveniently routed to the equipment, a small
aperture is provided in the filler plate each side of
the lower rear window frame. By making a small
incision in the rubber at (1), cables or wiring can be
easily routed through the filler plate.
31
In Cab Storage
A storage box with a hinged lid (1) is located on the
left-hand side of the cab. The lid also incorporates a
drinks holder.
A recessed tray (2) is provided to the rear of the
storage box to hold small tools, oddments, etc.
32
2 - 19
ELECTRICAL POWER PANEL

Depending on the tractor specification there are a
number of electrical power connectors provided for
various applications. These are located as follows:
1. 8 A. Screw terminals. The red terminal is

positive, the black terminal negative.
2. 7 Pole Din/ISO implement socket (with radar
option only) provides the information below.
3. 30 A. ISO/JD implement power socket.
Provides constant and key-start switched live
feeds.
33
7 Pole Din/ISO Implement Socket Connectors

(where fitted)
Pin 1. True ground speed. (Radar sensed)
Pin 2. Theoretical ground speed. (Wheel sensed)
Pin 3. Rear PTO speed.
Pin 4. Rear 3-point hitch, operating/not operating.
Pin 5. Not used
Pin 6. 5 Amp power supply.
Pin 7. Common ground connection.
34
4. Cigarette light/Auxiliary power socket for mobile

telephone or coolbox (if fitted).
5. Single pole 8 amp auxiliary power socket.
Live with key-start in “ON” position.
IMPORTANT: To ensure that the screw terminals

and connecting cables do not get excessively hot
when loaded with near maximum current, it is
important to make secure, tight connections to
prevent overheating and damage. Ensure that
equipment is connected to the terminals with
cables of suitable gauge and insulation thickness
and fitted with appropriate terminal connectors.
35
2 - 20
Multi-Pin Diagnostic Socket
! WARNING !
For Dealer use only. This socket is provided for
dealers to connect diagnostic equipment to the
tractor’s electrical control systems. Any attempt to
connect other equipment to this socket may cause
damage to the tractor’s electrical system or its
components.
36
Beacon Power Socket
Two power sockets for the rotating beacon are
provided at the rear of the cab, one on each side.
37
2 - 21
Seven-pole socket
(except North America)
A standard 7-pin trailer lighting socket (1), is
provided and is mounted at the rear of the tractor.
With reference to the picture inset, the socket
connections (viewed from the front of the socket)
are as follows:
Pin Wire Colour Circuit

No.
1. Yellow Left turn signal
2. Not used -
3. Black Earth
4. Green Right turn signal 38
5. Blue Right-hand parking light
6. Red Brake lights
7. Brown Left-hand parking light
Seven PoleTrailer Light Connection

(North America only)
A standard SAE 7-pole connector (1) is provided to
operate the electrical system on implements and
trailers. With reference to the picture inset, the
socket connections (viewed from the front of the
socket) are as follows:
Pin Wire Colour Circuit

No.
1. Black Earth
2. Blue Right-hand parking light
3. Yellow Left turn signal
4. Red Brake lights 39
5. Green Right turn signal
6. Brown Left-hand parking light
7. Not used -
Three Pole Implement Socket (all countries)

A 3-pin, 40 amp socket (1) is standard on all
tractors with cab. (See Section 7 for adaptor cable).
NOTE: The 3-pin socket provides power up to
40 A. However the driver should be aware that the
screw terminals (4, Fig. 34) share the same 40 amp
fuse. The combined output of the 3-pin socket and
the screw terminals is, therefore, limited to
40 amps.
40
2 - 22
DRIVER’S SEAT
Two air suspension seats are available. Whichever
seat is installed in your tractor, you will find that it
has a comprehensive range of adjustments.
Before operating the tractor, it is important to adjust
the seat to the most comfortable position. Seat
adjusters are colour coded grey. See the following
text and illustrations for details.
AIR SUSPENSION SEAT

NOTE: All seat adjustments should be made while
sitting in the driver’s seat.
Storage pocket
A storage pocket for documents etc. can be found
on the rear of the seat back.
41
Height/weight adjustment
The standard air suspension seat has electrically
controlled, pneumatic suspension. In order to
adjust seat height, it is necessary to turn the
key-start switch on. Lift the lever (1) and a
compressor will raise the seat. When the lever is
released the seat will stop at the height selected.
Push the lever down to release air and lower the
seat.
Backrest adjustment
Lift the lever (2) on the left-hand side of the seat
frame and adjust the inclination of the backrest.
The backrest will lock in position when the lever is
released.
42
2 - 23
Travel adjustment
Lift the travel adjustment lever (1) and move the
seat forward or backward, as required. The seat will
lock in position when the lever is released.
Swivel adjustment
To aid observation to the rear of the tractor, the seat
may be allowed to swivel. Adjustment is available
as follows:
a) Lock in one of two positions, 14° or 21° to the
left of centre.
b) Lock in one of three positions, 7°, 14° and 21°
to the right of centre.
To swivel the seat, lift the handle (2), then rotate the
seat to the required position. When the lever is 43
released, the seat will lock at the selected angle.
Armrest adjustments
Rotate the knurled wheel (2) on the underside of
the left-hand armrest to adjust the angle of the
armrest. When not required, the armrest may be
lifted to the vertical position.
The left-hand armrest may also be adjusted for
height by loosening the two clamp bolts (3).
Move the armrest to a comfortable height and
re-tighten the clamp bolts.
44
2 - 24
DELUXE AIR SUSPENSION SEAT

NOTE: The following settings and adjustments
apply to both cloth and leather seats (where fitted).
The deluxe air suspension seat offers a full range of
adjustments for maximum driver comfort. Optional
heating elements in the seat cushion and backrest
are provided for additional comfort in low
temperatures.
NOTE: All seat adjustments should be made with
the tractor stationary and the handbrake applied.
45
Armrest Controls
Seat height adjustment
The deluxe air suspension seat has electrically
controlled, pneumatic suspension. In order to
adjust seat height, it is necessary to turn the
key-start switch on. Press and hold the top of the
rocker switch (2); the compressor will raise the
seat. When the switch is released the seat will stop
at the height selected. Press the bottom of the
switch to release air and lower the seat.
Heating element (where fitted)
The heating elements in the seat are controlled by
a two position switch (1), on the left-hand armrest.
Depressing the upper part of the switch will switch
on the seat heating. Depress the lower part of the
switch to turn off. When the seat heating is 46
switched, a red telltale on the switch will illuminate.
The temperature of the seat is controlled by internal
sensors within the switch.
2 - 25
Ride firmness selector (where fitted)

The optional semi-active suspension system
utilises an advanced damper system to reduce
vertical jolts and vibrations caused by operating on
rough terrain.
An electronic controller constantly monitors the
motion of the suspension and updates the damping
effect to significantly improve driver comfort.
A selector switch (3) allows the driver to choose the
most comfortable damping position consistent with
their weight and the movement of the tractor.
With the switch in the central position, the firmness
of the ride will suit most average conditions.
Depress the top of the switch to increase the 47
damping effect.
To reduce the damping effect, depress the bottom
of the switch.
Seat controls
Cushion tilt
The angle of the seat cushion may be adjusted to
three positions. Lift the lever (1) and lift the cushion
up at the front or press it downwards at the front.
The cushion will lock in position when the lever is
released.
Cushion extension
To suit drivers of differing heights, the length of the
seat cushion may be adjusted by up to max. 60 mm
(2.4 ins). Lift the lever (3) and move the cushion
forward or backward, as required. The cushion will
Travel adjustment
Lift the travel adjustment lever (2) and move the 48
seat forward or backward, as required. The seat will
2 - 26
Swivel adjustment
To facilitate observation of an implement attached
to the rear of the tractor, the seat may be allowed to
swivel. Adjustment is available as follows:
a) Lock in one of two positions, 14° or 21° to the
left of centre.
b) Lock in one of three positions, 7°, 14° and 21°
to the right of centre.
To swivel the seat, lift the handle (4), then rotate the
seat to the required position. When the lever is
released, the seat will lock at the selected angle.
Backrest inclination adjustment
Lift the lever (1) on the left-hand side of the seat
frame and adjust the inclination of the backrest. 49
The backrest will lock in position when the lever is
released.
Travel isolator
Having selected the required fore/aft position, the
seat is permitted a limited, spring controlled, fore/
aft movement (float) if the travel isolator (2) is
pulled up. This together with the pneumatic
suspension achieves the optimum seat comfort.
To cancel the float movement, push the travel
isolator down while slowly moving the seat fore and
aft until the seat locks in position.
2 - 27
Suspension damper
Turn the knob (3) clockwise (toward the rear) for a
softer ride. Turn anticlockwise if a firmer ride is
required.
NOTE: The suspension damper is not fitted to
tractors with Ride Firmness control.
50
Neck support
The deluxe seat features an integrated neck
support (2) (top of the backrest). The support may 3
be adjusted vertically by using the handwheel at the 2
rear of the seat cushion. Push down on the top of
the neck support to lower.
Lumbar support adjustment
The seat has a built-in lumbar support actuated by
a thumb wheel (3) located at the rear of the seat on
the left-hand side.
To increase lumbar support, rotate the thumbwheel
upwards, or rotate downwards to decrease support.
51
2 - 28
Left-hand armrest height adjustment

The left-hand armrest may be raised or lowered to
provide a comfortable operating height. To adjust
the height of the armrest, loosen the two bolts (4).
Grasp the armrest at the front and rear then lift or
lower the complete assembly. Re-tighten the two
bolts securely.
Left-hand armrest angle adjustment 4
Rotate the knurled wheel (5) on the underside of
each armrest to adjust the angle of the armrest to a
comfortable position. When not required, both
armrests may be lifted to the vertical position.
5
Storage pocket
A storage pocket for documents etc. can be found 52
on the rear of the seat back.
Leather seat
Adjustments and settings for leather seats are the
same as the Deluxe Air Suspension seat as
previously described.
53
2 - 29
SEAT BELT AND OPERATOR PRESENCE

SWITCH (where fitted)
! WARNING !
Your tractor is equipped with a safety cab and
retractable seat belt. Always use the seat belt when
a safety cab is fitted. Do not use a seat belt if the
tractor is not equipped with a safety cab.
To fasten the belt, pull the belt from the reel and
push the tongue (1) into the buckle end (2) until a
“click” indicates it is properly engaged.
To disengage, press the red release button (3) on
the buckle and remove the tongue from the buckle.
54
The driver presence switch, installed beneath the
seat, is connected to an audible alarm which will
sound if the driver leaves the seat with the PTO
engaged or without applying the parking brake.
INSTRUCTIONAL SEAT
(where fitted)
A folding instructional seat is available where local
legislation permits. To raise the seat backrest, lift to
the upright position. The seat will be retained in the
upright position by the gas strut (1). When not
required, fold the upper part of the seat down to
gain access to the drinks holder again.
! WARNING !
Always use the seat belt when the tractor is
equipped with a safety cab or ROPS frame. Do not
use a seat belt, if the tractor is not equipped with a
safety cab or ROPS.
55
IMPORTANT: The instructional seat is only

provided for instruction of the driver or for driving
instruction; it is not intended for carrying
passengers. Passengers should not be carried in
the cab at any time.
2 - 30
PARKING BRAKE, THROTTLE AND FOOT PEDALS

Parking Brake
A conventional parking brake lever is installed to
the left of the driver’s seat.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever (1) up.
A warning light will illuminate in the instrument
panel when the parking brake is applied. To
release, ease the lever up further, depress the
button (1) on the end and lower the lever fully.
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the parking brake is fully

released before driving off.
56
Clutch/inching pedal
When the clutch pedal (1) is depressed, the drive
between the engine and transmission will be
disengaged. Use the pedal to transfer engine
power smoothly to the driving wheels when moving
off from a standstill. See “TRANSMISSION” later in
this section for further details.
NOTE: To avoid premature wear, do not use the
clutch/inching pedal as a footrest.
57
Foot Throttle Pedal
The foot throttle (1) may be used independently of
the hand throttle to control the speed of the tractor.
It is recommended that you always use the foot
throttle when driving on the road.
NOTE: When the foot throttle is released, engine
speed will reduce to the level set by the hand
throttle. When using the foot throttle, set the hand
throttle to the minimum speed position (lever fully
back).
58
2 - 31
Hand throttle
The hand throttle (1) may be used independently of
the foot throttle to control the speed of the tractor.
Move the throttle lever forward to increase engine
speed.
IMPORTANT: Always return the hand throttle tothe

idle position, when driving the tractor on public roads
using the foot throttle.
1
59
Foot Brake
The wheel brakes are actuated by the two foot
pedals (1) and (2). When operating in the field the
brake pedals may be unlocked and operated
independently to aid turning in confined spaces.
When independent wheel braking is not required,
ensure both pedals are locked together to provide
normal braking.
! WARNING !
On four wheel drive tractors, the drive to the front
axle is automatically engaged at speeds above
8.5 km/h (4 MPH) when the brakes are applied to
provide four wheel braking. Owners should be
aware of the effectiveness of four wheel braking 60
which greatly enhances braking performance.
Appropriate care should be exercised during
sudden braking.
IMPORTANT: The trailer brakes will only operate

when both brakes are applied.
! WARNING !
For your safety, always lock the brake pedals
together when travelling at transport speeds or if a
hydraulically braked trailer is attached to the tractor.
To lock the pedals together, engage the locking pin
in the right pedal and swivel the latch (1), over the
left pedal support to lock, as shown.
61
2 - 32
CONTROL ELEMENTS ON THE STEERING COLUMN

The following text describes the use of the various
controls mounted on the steering column.
Steering Column Adjustment
The steering column on your tractor may be tilted
and height adjusted. Pull the end of the clamp
lever (2) up (toward you). Move the steering
column/wheel to the most convenient position and
return the clamp lever to the fully down position to
lock the steering column assembly.
To alter the steering column height, loosen the
centre boss (1) on the steering wheel by turning
anticlockwise. Move the steering wheel to the most
convenient position and re-tighten the centre boss.
IMPORTANT: Your tractor is equipped with

hydrostatic power steering. Never hold the steering
wheel at full left or right lock (wheels against the 62
steering stops) for more than 10 seconds or for
longer than 10 seconds in any one minute. Failure
to observe this precaution may result in damage to
steering system components.
Key-start switch
The key-start switch activates the grid heater (cold
start device), accessories and the starter motor.
See “Starting the Engine” in Section 3.
63
2 - 33
Multi-function switch
The stalk-typeswitch is mounted on the left-hand
side of the steering column. The switch controls the
tractor headlights, horn and turn signals.
The centre of the stalk switch rotates. Turn the
switch away from you to position 2 to turn on the
instrument lights and the position lights. Turn the
switch to position 1 to turn on the headlights.
With the headlights on, push the stalk away from
you to position 3 to change from dipped to main
beam. Pull the stalk toward you to position 4 to
change back to dipped beam. When main beam is
on, the blue telltale on the instrument panel is
illuminated.
64
When the headlights are off, pull the stalk towards
you against the spring pressure to position 5 to
flash the headlight main beam. The stalk will return
to the central position when released.
Move the stalk to position 6 to operate the right turn
signals or to position 7 to operate the left turn
signals. The turn signal telltales on the instrument
panel will also flash when the turn signals are
actuated. A warning buzzer will sound if the turn
signals are not cancelled within 20 seconds.
NOTE: On tractors with optional self cancelling turn
signals the warning buzzer does not sound.
NOTE: The turn signals will only operate with the
key-start switch turned on.
65
Press in the end of the stalk (position 8) to sound
the horn.
Follow You Home Lights
When leaving the tractor at night, external
illumination can be provided for a limited period by
operating the headlight flasher switch within
30 seconds of key-off. If you do this, the dipped
beam headlights remain illuminated (and,
depending on switch status, one of the worklamps).
Each movement of the headlight flasher will provide
30 seconds of illumination. The maximum period of
illumination is 31/2 minutes, after which the
headlights will automatically extinguish.
2 - 34
Hazard light switch

Press down the left-hand side of the switch (1) to
operate all the turn signals simultaneously.
The switch will flash with the turn signals.
66
Screen wash/wiper control
The stalk-type control on the right-hand side of the
steering column controls the front and rear screen
wipe and wash functions.
With the key-start switch on, move the stalk
backward to position 2 and the front wiper will
operate at the slower of the two wiper speeds,
move to position 3 for the faster speed. Press in the
end of the stalk (position 1) to operate the electric
screen wash.
67
From the centre “off” position move the stalk
downward to position 4 for intermittent front wipe.
Move the stalk upward against spring pressure for
single sweep operation, position 3. On release, the
switch will return to the off position.
To operate the rear screen wiper, rotate the end of
the switch clockwise to position 1 for intermittent
rear wipe and to position 2 for rear screen wash.
The switch will return automatically to the
intermittent mode when released.
NOTE: The windscreen washer jets are mounted in
the cab frame, immediately beneath the roof.
Insert a pin into the jet nozzle to adjust the angle of
the jet.
68
2 - 35
INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT (ICU)

The Integrated control unit (ICU) consists of three
analogue gauges (1), a liquid crystal display (LCD)
(2) and a dot matrix display (3).
In addition to the gauges and digital displays, there
are a number of coloured telltales (4) providing
other operating information or warning of system
malfunction.
A keypad (5), located at the bottom of the ICU, is
used to select and/or change the settings displayed
in the digital display screens. The illustration shows
a tractor with the optional enhanced keypad.
69
GAUGES
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
When the engine is running, this gauge (1)
indicates the oil pressure in the engine lubrication
system. If the oil pressure falls below safe limits
while the engine is running, a warning light in the
gauge will illuminate. This will be accompanied by a
warning buzzer and symbol appearing in the dot
matrix display. Stop the engine and investigate the
cause.
Coolant Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge (2) indicates the
temperature of the engine coolant. If the needle
enters the upper (red) section while the engine is 70
running, a warning light in the gauge will illuminate.
Stop the engine and investigate the cause.
Fuel Level Gauge
The gauge (3) indicates the total level of fuel in both
fuel tanks; it is only operative with the ignition
turned on. If the quantity of fuel in the tanks falls to
a critical level, a yellow warning light will illuminate
in the gauge. See Section 8 for fuel capacities.
2 - 36
WARNING LIGHTS AND TELLTALES

The coloured lights provide operating information or
give warning of system malfunctions. Illumination of
a warning light may be accompanied by an audible
alarm (see page 2 - 67).
NOTE: All telltales and warning lights will illuminate
for a short period at “key-on” as the electrical
systems carry out a self diagnostic check.
1. Red Stop light - If Stop light comes on, stop the

tractor immediately and investigate the cause.
A warning symbol will appear in the dot matrix
display to confirm the location of the fault.
2. Trailer brake pressure.
Italy only - Light will illuminate to indicate that
hydraulic oil pressure to the trailer brake circuit
is low. Stop the tractor and investigate the
cause.
NOTE: The light will also illuminate when the
handbrake is applied as this will release pressure in
the trailer brake circuit.
All air braking systems - Light will illuminate to
indicate the pressure in the air brake system
has fallen below 4.5 bar (65.2 lbf. in2). Stop the
tractor and investigate the cause.
3. Headlight main beam - The telltales will
illuminate when the headlights are switched to
main beam.
4. Amber warning light - Illumination of this light 71
will be accompanied by a warning symbol in the
dot matrix display. Stop the tractor and
investigate the cause.
5. Brake pedals not latched - The telltales will
illuminate to show when pedal latch is unlocked
(Japan only).
6. Trailer turn signal telltale - The telltale will flash
with tractor/trailer turn signals when a trailer is
attached.
2 - 37
Telltales and Warning Lights (continued)

7. Trailer turn signal telltale - The telltale will flash
with tractor/trailer turn signals, when a second
trailer is attached.
8. Rear differential lock - The telltale will illuminate
when the differential lock is engaged.
NOTE: In “Automatic Differential Lock” mode this
telltale will flash, when the differential lock is
automatically disengaged.
9. Fast Steer - The orange telltale will illuminate
when steering wheel ring is depressed to
engage Fast Steer function.
10. Fast Steer - The green telltale will illuminate
when the Fast Steer system is activated
(isolator switch “ON”).
11. Right turn signal telltale - The telltale will flash
with the tractor’s right turn signal. Intermittent
alarm will sound, if indicator is not cancelled
after 20 seconds (tractor moving) or after
5 minutes (stationary tractor).
12. Front auto PTO function - The telltale will 72
illuminate when the Auto PTO function is
enabled. Each time the implement is raised with
Auto PTO activated, the telltale will flash. When
the implement is lowered into the working
position, the telltale will cease to flash and
become permanently lit.
13. Not used.
14. Front suspension - The light will illuminate to
indicate front suspension switch is in the locked
position (suspension deactivated).
15. Left turn signal telltale - The telltale will flash
with the tractor’s left turn signal. Intermittent
alarm will sound, if indicator is not cancelled
after 20 seconds (5 minutes with tractor
stationary).
16. Engine exhaust brake - This telltale will
illuminate when exhaust brake system is
activated.
2 - 38
17. Auto Rear PTO - If the Auto rear PTO is

engaged, the telltale will illuminate. Each time
the implement is raised and the PTO is
stopped, the telltale will flash. When the
implement is lowered into the work position and
the PTO engages, the telltale will cease to flash
and become permanently lit.
18. Four wheel drive - The telltale will illuminate
when the drive to the front wheels is engaged.
NOTE: In auto four wheel drive mode, this telltale
flashes, when four wheel drive has been
automatically disengaged.
19. Parking lights - The telltale will illuminate when
the tractor lights are switched on.
20. Parking brake - This light will illuminate with the
key-start switch ON and parking brake applied.
If the key-start switch is turned to OFF or the
operator leaves the seat without applying the
parking brake, a warning buzzer will sound and
the parking brake telltale will flash for
approximately 10 seconds or until the
handbrake is applied.
73
2 - 39
INSTRUMENT PANEL DISPLAYS
IMPORTANT: On tractors equipped with the AFS

200 Monitor a number of displays and setting
procedures will change. Consult the AFS 200
Monitor Operator’s Manual for details.
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)
The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) at the top of the
instrument panel is divided into three sections
covering engine functions, vehicle speed and a
time display.
Engine function displays (1)
The upper part of the engine display consists of a
digital rev counter and four warning lights relating to
engine functions, these are from left to right:
z Cold start device - This telltale will illuminate

when the grid heater is activated using the
key-start switch.
z Engine power boost activated - This telltale will

illuminate to indicate engine power boost has
been activated.
z Engine Speed Management - This telltale will

74
illuminate when Engine Speed Management is
activated.
NOTE: When programme 2 is selected, “2” will
appear above the symbol; with programme 1 no
number is indicated.
Ground speed display (2)
Displays the tractor ground speed in MPH or km/h.
(See section “Changing the ground speed
displayon” page 2 - 47).
Digital Clock (3)
The digital clock can be set to display the time in
12 or 24 hour mode. (See section “Changing the
time display” on page 2 - 46).
2 - 40
DOT MATRIX DISPLAY AND CENTRAL DISPLAY

The dot matrix display and the central display
consists of five individual sections in which various
tractor functions can be displayed.
Where Electro Hydraulic Remote Valve* (EHR)
functions are shown, the three centre sections are
combined into one display.
Using the keypad, the displays can be configured to
show the following functions:
1. Hour meter, Hour meter, permanently displays

the number of hours the tractor has operated.
2. Battery voltage
EHR valve* visualisation. Select required valve
display by repeated operation of key 2.
To toggle between front and rear displays,
depress and hold key 2 for two seconds.
3. Rear or front* 3-point hitch position EHR valve*
visualisation, select valve by repeated
operation of key 3.
4. Air brake system pressure* EHR valve*
visualisation.
75
5. Rear or front* PTO shaft speed. Select function
using key 1.
When the central display is configured for Electro
Hydraulic Remote Valve visualisation (dot matrix
display), the screen will provide the following
information:
1. Hour meter
2. EHR valve visualisation.
3. Rear or front* PTO shaft speed.
*Where fitted
76
2 - 41
KEY PAD
The standard keypad consists of six keys, a
number of which have a dual function.
1. Rear or front* PTO selection.

2. Electro Hydraulic Remote Valve* visualisation.
Home/Escape key in SETUP mode.
3. Rear or front* 3-point hitch display.
4. DOWN key / Select Digit.
EHR* valve setting, reduce oil flow.
5. Enter SETUP mode.
EHR* visualisation, exit display. 77
6. UP key / Increase Digit value.
EHR* valve setting, increase oil flow.
*Where fitted.
2 - 42
SELECTING OR CHANGING THE DISPLAY SETTINGS

Changes to the settings and values within the
digital displays are made using the keypad at the
bottom of the ICU.
NOTE: A delay of more than 2 seconds in the
set-up procedure will cause the process to time out
and any unsaved changes will be lost.
Key Functions
1. Select rear or front Power Take Off speed

display.
1. Rear and front* PTO speed-
2. Home/Escape key. Depress this key to exit display.
set-up mode and return to the initial screen
after making changes to the display settings.
When equipped with Electro Hydraulic Remote 2. Home/Escape key and
Valves, this key selects the flow and directional ElectroHydraulic RemoteValve
visualisation for each valve. (EHR) display*.
NOTE: The Home/Escape key can also be used to
exit set-up at any time; but any unsaved data will be 3. Rear or front* 3-point-hitch
lost. -position.
3. This key toggles between the rear and front

3-point hitch position display: 4. UP key/Change digit value and
“0” = 3-point hitch fully lowered. “100” = 3-point EHR oil flow setting*.
hitch fully raised.
4. UP key. When making a setting change, use
this key to scroll UP through the menu screens * Where fitted.
or to increase the value of a digit. To enter a
lower value continue to depress the key until
the appropriate value is displayed.
When making changes to Electro Hydraulic
Remote Valve (EHR) settings, this key
INCREASES oil flow through the valve when
the appropriate remote valve visualisation is
displayed.
2 - 43
Key Functions (continued)

5. The Menu/Enter key is used to access the Representation ofaffected remote valve displayed.
menu and to select the various displays.
Depress this key to save any new settings after
making changes. 5. Menu/Enter key.
6. DOWN key. When making a setting change,
use this key to scroll DOWN through the menu
screens or to select the digit to be changed.
When making changes to Electro Hydraulic
6. DOWN key/select digitand EHR
Remote Valve (EHR) settings, this key
flow setting*.
INCREASES oil flow through the valve when
the appropriate remote valve visualisation is
displayed.
Changing the Display Set-up * Where fitted.
With the tractor stationary and the key-start ON,
depress and hold the Menu/Enter key for
3 seconds; the configuration screen SETUP MENU
will appear and after 2 seconds one of the following
displays will appear.
CAL (tractors without ground speed radar only)
OR
Clock setup (tractors with ground speed radar)
Using the UP key or DOWN key other displays can
now be accessed. Each time the DOWN key is
depressed new displays will appear in the following
order, using the UP key this order will be reversed.
Clock setup (tractors without ground speed radar)
MPH/km/h setup ACOUSTIC SIGNAL On/Off
Implement Width (tractors with enhanced keypad
and performance monitor only)
2 - 44
Wheelslip Alarm (tractors with enhanced keypad

and ground speed radar)
Service Interval (tractors with enhanced keypad)
Automatic Engine Shutdown
Error Code Visualisation
AFS 200 Monitor ONLINE/OFFLINE (where fitted)
Instrument Cluster Backlight Adjustment
SETUP SCREEN (tractors with enhanced keypad)
DIGITAL CLOCK
The digital clock provides a constant read-out of the
time; it can be set to display the time in 12 or
24 hour configuration.
Setting the Time
To set the time carry out the following procedure.
z With the clock screen displayed, depress the

Menu/Enter key to select the clock symbol
and the SET screen.
z Depress the Menu/Enter key; the display will

change to show 00:00 (or a previously set time
display). The left-hand digit in the display will
start to flash.
z Use the UP key to select the value of the first

digit. If a lower figure is required, continue to 78
depress the UP key until the lower figure
appears. With the first figure set, depress the
DOWN key to select the next digit to be
changed.
z Repeat the above procedure until the time

display is correct.
z Depress the Menu/Enter key again; Value

XX:XX* Saved will appear in the display and
the LCD clock will automatically update.
Depress the Home/Escape key to exit set-up
and return to the normal operating display.
*XX:XX represents the time display.
2 - 45
Changing the Time Display

The clock can be set to show the time in either 12
or 24 hour modes, the display can be changed
using the following method.
z With the clock screen displayed, depress the

Menu/Enter key to select the clock symbol
and the SET screen.
z Using the UP/ DOWN keys, select the display

showing the clock symbol and 12/24 and
depress the Menu/Enter key again.
z With the new display, select either 12 or 24 hour

79
display; use the UP/ DOWN keys to move the
arrow to 12 or 24 and depress the Menu/Enter
key.
z The screen will change to show Value 24h

Saved or Value 12h Saved, depending on the
time display selected. In the LCD the clock
display will automatically update.
z Depress the Home/Escape key to exit set-up

mode and recall the normal operating display.
2 - 46
TRACTOR SPEED DISPLAY

The tractor speed display provides a read-out of the tractor ground speed in km/h or MPH.
Changing the Speed Display
z With the MPH km/h screen displayed, depress

the Menu/Enter key.
z The screen will change to show values MPH

(US), MPH (UK), and km/h; use the UP/
DOWN keys to move the arrow to the required
unit.
z When the arrow points to the required value,

depress the Menu/Enter key again; Value XXX
Saved* and the LCD speed display will
automatically update. 80
z After 2 seconds the configuration screen

MPH km/h will appear again; depress the
Home/Escape key to exit set-up mode and
recall the normal operating display.
*XXX represents the speed value.
NOTE: Changing the speed setting from Km/h to
MPH will cause all other display values in the LCD
and DMD to change from Metric to Imperial units.
IMPORTANT: For operations in the UK, ensure

MPH (UK) is selected otherwise the accuracy of
any area or fuel calculations will be compromised.
As liquid volume based on the US gallon are
smaller than UK volumes, it is important the correct 81
value is used during the set-up procedure.
2 - 47
AUDIBLE “BEEP” ON/OFF

The keypad can be set to provide an audible “beep”
each time a key is depressed. If this feature is not
required, the “beep” can be turned off.
z With the BEEP On/Off screen displayed,

depress the Menu/Enter key.
z The display will change to the On/Off selection

screen. Use the UP DOWN keys to move the
arrow to Off and depress the Menu/Enter key
again.
z The screen will now show Value OFF Saved.

82
After 2 seconds the BEEP On/Off screen will
reappear; depress the Home/Escape key to exit
set-up mode and recall the normal operating
display.
2 - 48
BACKLIGHT ADJUSTMENT
The brightness of the instrument displays may be
adjusted to suit varying light conditions.
z With the rev counter displayed, depress the

Menu/Enter key.
z The screen will change to show a MIN - MAX,

bargraph display that represents the level of
backlighting.
z Depressing the UP/ DOWN keys will make the

bargraph and backlight intensity increase or
decrease accordingly. 83
z Depress the Menu/Enter key again to save the

change; Value Saved will appear in the display.
z Pause for 2 seconds until the rev counter

symbol appears in the display then depress the
Home/Escape key to exit set-up and return to
the normal operating display.
2 - 49
AUTOMATIC ENGINE SHUTDOWN

Your tractor is equipped with an automatic engine
shut-down function for protection against accidental
damage should an engine based malfunction occur.
Further details can be found on page 3 - 9.
The mode of engine shutdown can only be selected
by your authorised CIH dealer using specialised
equipment.
z With the Engine symbol displayed, depress the

Menu/Enter key
z The display will change to show the Engine

Symbol and NO, YES1 or YES2 (depending on
tractor specification). 84
NOTE: This display is advisory only, no changes

can be made to the setting shown on the display.
z Depress the Home/Escape key TWICE to exit

the engine shutdown screen and return to the
normal operation display.
2 - 50
CALIBRATING THEGROUND SPEED DISPLAY

Should you wish to install alternative rear tyre
equipment that would provide a radius difference of
more than 13 mm (0.5 in), then the electronic
control module should be re-calibrated to display
an accurate ground speed figure. To recalibrate use
one of the following methods:
IMPORTANT: If your tractor is equipped with the

optional slip control feature, then the ground speed
displayed is a true speed, as sensed by the radar
unit. Calibration is therefore not required and the
calibration menu will not be available in for setup.
z Ensure that the tyre pressures are correct for

the load being carried. (See Tyre Load/Inflation
tables in Section 3 of this manual).
z Select a stretch of dry, firm, level ground

(preferably concrete) and carefully measure out
a distance of exactly 100 metres (328 ft). Mark
the start and finish of this measured distance
with a bold chalk line.
Auto Calibration
z Stop the tractor a short distance in front of the

start line and, with the engine running, depress
and hold the Menu/Enter key for 3 seconds.
z SETUP_MENU will appear in the dot matrix

display, pause for two seconds and the display
will change to CAL. Depress the Menu/Enter
key again to display CAL manual. Using the
UP/ DOWN keys, select CAL auto (automatic
calibration). Confirm the selection by
depressing the Menu/Enter key, so that the
display changes to CAL auto READY 85
(automatic calibration ready); the counter at the
top of the screen indicates 0000.
NOTE: The set up procedure may be cancelled at
any time by turning the key-start to OFF or
depressing the Menu/Enter key.
2 - 51
z Select a suitable transmission ratio to provide a

speed above 3 km/h (1.8 MPH), and drive up to
the start line at a steady speed. As the centre of
the front tyres pass over the start line, press
and release the Menu/Enter key. CAL auto ON
will appear in the dot matrix display. The four
digit figure in the counter will increase as the
tractor moves forward.
NOTE: If the calibration procedure is incorrectly
performed, e. g., speed below 3 km/h (1.8 MPH),
the display will revert to CAL auto READY.
Start the sequence again increasing the tractor
speed.
86
z As the centre of the front tyres passes over the
finish line, press and release the Menu/Enter
key; CAL auto OK (automatic calibration OK)
will appear in the display. Depress the Menu/
Enter key again to save the setting and to
return to the CAL AUTO/MAN screen; then
depress the Home/Escape key to exit set-up
mode and recall the normal operating display.
If the auto set-up procedure was not completed
successfully, the display will show CAL auto NOT
OK. Depress the Home/Escape key to return to the
CAL auto screen and then Menu/Enter to restart
the calibration procedure.
87
2 - 52
Manual Calibration
The manual calibration allows the driver to set the
rolling circumference of the rear tyre without the
need to drive over a measured distance.
Consult the table on page 2 - 54 and make a note
of the rolling circumference figure for your tyre size.
If the correct tyre size is not in the table obtain the
figure from your authorised dealer or tyre supplier.
IMPORTANT: When entering a new tyre rolling

circumference figure, use metric values
(centimetres) with km/h and Imperial values
(inches) with MPH.
z With the tractor stationary and the key-start on,

3 seconds.
z SETUP_MENU will appear in the dot matrix

display for two seconds and the display will
change to CAL. Depress the Menu/Enter key to
display the CAL manual screen, depress the
Menu/Enter key again to access the set-up
display CAL man 100.0.
z The first digit on the left side of the display will

start to flash. Using the UP key, set the value of
the first digit. When the value has been set, use
the DOWN key to move the cursor to the next
digit to the right and repeat the process.
88
z With the new rolling circumference figure
entered into the display, depress the Menu/
Enter key again to save the setting. The display
will change to Value XXX.X Saved.
*XXX.X represents the rolling circumference
figure.
z Pause for 2 seconds and the display will

change to CAL AUTO/MAN. Depress the
return to the normal operating display.
any time by depressing the Home/Escape key.
89
2 - 53
Ground speed calibration values Rear Tyre Rolling Circumferences

The rolling circumference for any given tyre size will
vary depending on tyre manufacturer. The figures
shown in the table are an average based on rolling Tyre Size Tyre Rolling Circumference
circumference data supplied by several
manufacturers. To obtain an accurate figure for Centimetres Inches
your rear tyres, consult your authorised dealer or 20.8R - 38 550.1 216.6
tyre supplier.
580/70R - 38 543.6 214.0
If the size of tyre on your tractor is not listed, then 650/65R - 38 545.3 214.7
road speed calibration may be carried out using
one of the following procedures. 650/75R - 38 581.1 228.8
Carry out the Auto calibration as previously 710/70R - 38 576.2 226.8
described or measure the rear tyre rolling 710/60R - 42 567.5 223.4
circumference. 18.4R - 42 555.7 218.8
20.8R - 42 581.5 228.9
1. To measure the rolling circumference of the
rear tyre, park the tractor on a level surface and 580/70R - 42 569.0 224.0
make a vertical chalk mark on the sidewall 650/65R - 42 577.6 227.4
where the tyre tread contacts the ground. Make 620/70R - 42 580.9 228.7
a second chalk mark on the ground aligning 14.9R - 46 554.2 218.2
with the mark on the tyre. 420/80R - 46 555.5 218.7
2. Slowly drive the tractor forward until the rear 480/80R - 46 587.2 231.2
wheel has made one revolution and the chalk 520/85R - 46 608.8 239.7
mark on the sidewall is again in contact with the 18.4R - 46 587.0 231.1
ground. Mark the ground again and measure 320/90R - 50 559.0 220.1
the distance between the two chalk marks. 320/90R - 54 529.0 208.3
IMPORTANT: If your tractor is equipped with the

optional slip control feature, then the ground speed
displayed is a true speed, as sensed by the radar
unit. Calibration is therefore not required.
! WARNING !
The ground speed radar sensor emits a low
intensity microwave signal which will not cause any
ill effects in normal use. Although the signal
intensity is low, do not look directly into the face of
the sensor while in operation so as to avoid eye
damage.
2 - 54
ENHANCED KEYPAD AND PERFORMANCE

MONITOR
The enhanced keypad consists of a number of
buttons or “keys” that the driver can use to select,
control or programme various tractor functions and
displays in the central and dot matrix displays.
Keys 6, 8, 9 and 10 are used to set-up and
programme many of the enhanced keypad
functions.
Unless otherwise described, depress the keys once
to obtain the appropriate display. A symbol will
appear in the display to confirm the function
selected.
1. PTO Shaft Speed. Depress this key once to

display rear Power Take Off speed. Press the
key again, to display front PTO speed (if fitted).
2. Rear Wheel Slip. The level of rear wheel slip
will appear as a one or two digit percentage (%)
figure (with radar option only).
3. Combined function, Hour Meter and Trailer
Brake Air Pressure. Hour Meter. Touch the key
to view the total number of hours that the tractor
has operated. The hours recorded should be
used as a guide to the service intervals for the
tractor. Trailer Brake Air Pressure.
The display will show the air pressure in the 90
trailer braking system in bar graph format
(where fitted).
4. Hitch Height Position. Depress once to display
the rear hitch height, press again to show front
linkage height (where fitted). The display will
show a percentage figure between “0” (fully
lowered) and “100” (fully raised).
5. Odometer (D). The odometer provides a visual
record of the distance travelled in kilometres or
miles depending on the ground speed unit
selected. Depress repeatedly to toggle between
displays 1 and 2.
2 - 55
ENHANCED KEYPAD (continued)

6. Home/Escape key. Use this key to Exit or
cancel set-up and programming modes.
7. Remote Valve Operation. The display will show
the flow rate through each valve as a
percentage (%), the direction of cylinder
movement (extend, retract or neutral), the
number and location of the valve selected (front
or rear). (See Electronic Remote Control Valves
in Section 3).
8. DOWN key or Digit Select key. Depress this key
to scroll downwards through the menu or select
an alternative digit in the dot matrix display.
Also used to decrease oil flow when 91
programming Electronic Remote Valves. (See
Electronic Remote Control Valves in Section 3).
9. UP key or Value Input key. Depress this key
repeatedly to scroll upwards through the menu
or change the value of a number. Also used to
increase oil flow when programming Electronic
Remote Valves. (See Electronic Remote
Control Valves in Section 3).
10. Menu/Enter key. Depress and hold for three
seconds to select set-up and programming
modes. This key is also used to exit Electronic
Remote Valve visualisation; depress the key
once to exit.
11. Programmed Service Reminder. The service
schedule key provides two levels of reminder
identified as “Heavy” and “Light”. Depress key
repeatedly to toggle between “Heavy” and
“Light” displays.
12. Area Accumulator or Area per Hour Forecaster.
Depress key to access dual display:
Upper display: Area Accumulator - The total
area worked will be displayed in hectares or
acres depending on the ground speed unit
selected.
Lower display: Area per Hour Forecaster -
The area/hour symbol will display together with
a forecast of the area that will be worked in one
hour if the current rate of work is continued.
2 - 56
DOT MATRIX DISPLAY AND CENTRAL DISPLAY

with PERFORMANCE MONITOR
When equipped with Enhanced Keypad and
Performance Monitor, the central display and dot
matrix display are multi-functional. Each of the five
sections can be configured to provide different
operating information.
When it is required to use the dot matrix display, the
three centre sections combine to make one screen.
The lower section can be used to permanently
display one of the tractor functions when the three
centre sections are used in the dot matrix format.
Using the Enhanced Keypad, the displays can be
configured to show the following functions:
1. Central display
(Tractor hours displayed).
Rear or front* PTO shaft speed. Rear or front*
hitch position.
Rear Wheel Slip.
2. Configurable display 1.
(Battery voltage displayed)
EHR visualisation*.
Performance Monitor display.
3. Configurable display 2.
(Rear hitch position displayed) EHR
visualisation*.
Performance Monitor display. 92
4. Configurable display 3. (Air brake
pressuredisplayed)
EHR visualisation*.
Performance Monitor display.
5. Configurable for permanent display. (Rear PTO
displayed)
*Where fitted
2 - 57
Configurable Displays
Each of the four configurable displays can be set to
show one of the following screens (depending on
tractor specification).
z Battery voltage
z Wheel Slip
z Front hitch height (%)
z Rear hitch height (%)
z Front PTO Speed
z Rear PTO speed
z Engine hours operated
z Service interval display (Heavy service)
z Service interval display (Light service)
z Air brake system pressure
z Odomoter 1 93
z Odomoter 2
z Area worked
z Area per Hour Forecaster
Configuring the Displays
To configure the screens for Sections 2, 3, 4 and 5
carry out the following procedure.
z With the tractor stationary and the key-start on,

3 seconds.
z SETUP MENU will appear in the dot matrix

display; Depress the Menu/Enter key or the UP
or DOWN key to display CAL. (Alternatively,
pause for 2 seconds and the display will
automatically change from SETUP MENU to
CAL).
NOTE: On tractors with ground speed radar, CAL
will not be shown. The display will change from
SETUP MENU to CLOCK.
z Using the UP/ DOWN keys, scroll through the

the various screens until the SETUP SCREEN
appears. Then depress the Menu/Enter key
again; a 5 section screen will appear. 94
2 - 58
z The screen will show the segment numbers for

the various displays, i.e. #1, #2, #3 and #4.
The number for segment #1 is framed with a
black box. Using the UP/ DOWN keys, move
the box to the display that is to be reconfigured.
z With the display number outlined in the required

section, depress the Menu/Enter key and the
box will move to the right. The symbol within
that box will appear inversed (grey symbol on
black background). Use the UP/ DOWN key to
scroll through the symbols until the desired
symbol is displayed. Depress the Menu/Enter
key again to save the setting. 95
By following the above procedure, the
remaining configurable displays can be
changed to provide the desired operating
information.
z After setting the configurable displays, depress

the Home/Escape key twice to exit Setup mode
and return to the normal operating display.
NOTE: Operating information shown in Section 5
will remain constantly displayed irrespective of any
changes made to the central or dot matrix displays.
any time by depressing the Home/Escape key; but
any unsaved data will be lost.
2 - 59
PERFORMANCE MONITOR
Odomoter (range finder)

The odometer provides a visual record of the
distance travelled in kilometres or miles depending
on the ground speed unit selected. Depress the
Odometer key to display the distance travelled.
Two displays are available, “1” and “2”. “1” may be
used for individual journey distances and “2” to
provide a total for all journeys travelled.
Both displays may be reset to zero.
Touch the key once to select reading “1”, touch
again to select reading “2”. Keeping the key
depressed for more than 3 seconds will reset the
selected odometer to zero.
The journey distance in the display will appear in
steps of: 96
0 to 19.999 Km/Miles 0.001 Km/Miles
2000 to 19999 Km/Miles 1.0 Km/Miles
NOTE: If the radar option is not installed, area per
hour calculations are based on axle speed and are
subject to inaccuracies caused by any wheel slip
that may occur.
2 - 60
Area Accumulator (upper display)

NOTE: Prior to switching on the Area Accumulator,
ensure that the correct working width has been
stored in the performance monitor.
The accumulated area (total area worked) and area
forecaster (Ha/Acre per hour) can be displayed by
depressing the AREA key (1).
Depending on the unit set in the tractor speed
display (km/h or MPH) the reading will be in
hectares or acres.
Depress the area key repeatedly to toggle through
the three displays in the dot matrix screen:
1. Auto. The area accumulator will start recording
when the tractor moves and the implement is
lowered. It will stop accumulating when the
implement is raised.
2. ON. The area accumulator is switched on. Area
will be accumulated as the tractor moves 97
irrespective of the position of the implement.
3. OFF. The area accumulator is stopped but the
area forecaster per hour will continue to
function.
The symbols for area accumulator (2) and area
forecaster/hour (3) will appear in the display along
with the relevant figures.
With trailed equipment, area accumulation may be
temporarily interrupted, for example, at the
headland, by means of a switch connected into the
implement status socket. See “Electrical Power
Panel” on page 2 - 20.
98
2 - 61
The area measurement in the display (3) will

appear in steps of
0 to 199.99 Ha/acre 0.01 Ha/acre
200 to 1999.9 Ha/acre 0.1 Ha/acre
2000 to 19999 Ha 1.0 Ha
2000 to 49418 acre 1.0 acre
Area accumulation can be reset tozero at any time
by selecting OFF and holding down the AREA key
(1, Fig. 97) until it is reset.
Area per Hour Forecaster (lower display)
The area forecast will appear in steps of 1.0 Ha/Acre
per hour.
NOTE: If the radar option is not installed, distance 99
calculations are based on axle rotation and are
subject to inaccuracies caused by any wheel slip
that may occur.
2 - 62
Implement Width Set-up

In order that the microprocessor may calculate the
cumulative area worked or area/hour figure, the
working width of the implement must be entered
into the memory. For example, to enter an
implement working width of 6.50 metres (21.3 ft.)
z With the implement width symbol displayed,

depress the Menu/Enter key to access the
width setup screen. The display will show 0.00
(unless a previous width has been entered) and
the first digit on the left will be flashing.
NOTE: If the display is set to Imperial units, the
100
width is displayed as 00.00 (feet).
z The width is set using the UP key to change the

value of the flashing digit and the DOWN key to
select the next digit to be changed.
z To set an implement width of 6.5 metres,

depress the UP key, until the left-hand figure
shows “6”. Move the cursor to the right of the
decimal point and enter “5” and then “0”.
The display should now read 6.50 meters
(21.3 ft.).
z Depress the Menu/Enter key again, Value 6.50

Saved will appear in the display.
z Pause for 2 seconds and the display will revert

to the implement width setup screen. Depress
the Home/Escape key to exit set-up mode and
recall the normal operating display. 101
IMPORTANT: The microprocessor cannot calculate

the area worked unless the correct implement width
is entered.
2 - 63
Setting the Wheel Slip Limit (where fitted)

If your tractor is equipped with optional ground
speed radar, the percentage (%) of rear wheel slip
may be displayed. The slip factor is calculated from
information provided by the transmission speed
sensor (theoretical ground speed) and the radar
(true ground speed).
NOTE: If the optional radar unit is not installed, the
slip alarm function will be omitted from the display.
The slip alarm point may be set as a one or two
digit figure that, if exceeded, will cause an audible
alarm to sound. To set a wheel slip limit of 15%
z With the wheel slip screen displayed, depress 102

the Menu/Enter key to select the wheel slip limit
change screen.
z The first digit on the left side of the display will

start to flash. To modify the slip factor, use the
UP key to change the value of the flashing digit
and the DOWN key to select the next digit for
change.
z To set a slip factor of 15, depress the UP key

until the flashing digit reads “1”, then move the
cursor to the right using the DOWN key and
enter “5”.
z Depress the Menu/Enter key again, the display

will change to Value 15 Saved.

to the wheel slip limit setup screen. Depress the
NOTE: The wheel slip alarm is an advisory function
only. Any adjustments required to reduce tractor
wheel slip must be applied manually.
2 - 64
Setting a Heavy Service Reminder

The service reminder function allows the driver to
programme two service interval reminders using
the Enhanced Keypad. The following procedure is
the same for LIGHT and HEAVY service intervals.
z With the service reminder screen displayed,
depress the Menu/Enter key.
z The HEAVY (major service interval) screen will
appear (to select the LIGHT (minor service
interval) screen use the UP/DOWN keys).
Depress the Menu/Enter key; the display will
change to HEAVY 000 and the left-hand figure
will flash.
103
z To set a major service interval of 600 (hours),
depress the UP key, until the left-hand digit
reads “6”, then move the cursor one place to
the right using the DOWN key, enter “0” there,
then move the cursor again and enter the
second “0”.
z Then depress the Menu/Enter key again; the
display will change to Value 600 Saved.
to the service interval setup screen Depress the
Light Service Reminder: 104
Two hours before the service is due, the Light

Service symbol will be displayed at “key-on”.
This display will remain active for 4 seconds after
the engine is started.
Heavy Service Reminder:
Ten hours before the service is due, the Heavy
Service symbol will be displayed at “key-on” and
the amber warning light will be illuminated. This
display will remain active for 4 seconds after the
engine is started.
From this time, the Heavy Service symbol and
amber warning light will be displayed every hour
along with the remaining number of hours to the
service interval.
When the service reminder time limit is reached or
exceeded, the hour figure will be replaced by
3 flashing bars.
2 - 65
Checking Service Reminder Hours

The hours remaining to both Light and Heavy
service reminders can be accessed using the
Service Interval key on the Enhanced Keypad.
Depress the key repeatedly to toggle between
Heavy and Light service reminder screens.
NOTE: These screens are for information purposes
only; to change the screen contents, you must
change to setup mode.
Disabling the Service Reminder
One or both service reminders can be disabled, if
not required.
z Enter the service reminder setup screen as

previously described and, starting with the first
digit on the left enter 000. When the cursor
flashes on the third digit (0), depress the Menu/
Enter key. The display will change to Value
OFF Saved and the service reminder will be
disabled.

to the service reminder setup screen. Depress 105
the Home/Escape key to exit set-up mode and
2 - 66
ALARM FUNCTIONS
The illumination of a warning light may be
accompanied by an audible alarm. Depending on
the severity of the malfunction, one of the following
alarms may be heard.
Critical Malfunction
A continuous pulse alarm accompanied by the red
warning light (1). The tractor must be stopped
immediately. The alarm will sound until the fault is
corrected or the engine switched off.
Non Critical Malfunction
A 4 second pulsating alarm will be accompanied by
the amber warning light (2). A failure or error has
occurred but the driver may continue work. The
fault should be rectified as soon as possible.
Driver intervention required
A two pulse alarm will sound for 1 second to advise
the driver that a certain action is required.
The alarm will continue to sound until the driver 106
carries out the appropriate action or the tractor
engine is switched off.
Safety and General Alarms
A continuous alarm will sound if the driver attempts
to carry out an inappropriate action e.g. to drive the
tractor with the hand brake applied.
Parking Light
A pulse alarm will sound for a short period if the
engine is switched off and the parking lights are left
on.
Status “Beep”
A “beep” will sound each time a key is depressed
on the keypad. This sound may be disabled if
required. (See page 2 - 48).
2 - 67
ERROR CODES AND WARNINGS

The advanced electronics on your tractor are able
to detect a malfunction or error occurring in key
areas such as engine, transmission, electrical and
hydraulic systems. Should a malfunction or error
occur, the relevant symbol and error code will
appear in the dot matrix display.
NOTE: The warning and advisory symbols are
explained on page 2 - 71, 2 - 75.
This may be accompanied by the illumination of a
warning light and an audible alarm depending on
the severity of the fault. In this case, consult your
authorised dealer.
Active and Non Active Warnings 107
In addition to the error codes previously described,
there are a number of other warning symbols that
may appear in the dot matrix display. These
symbols will be accompanied by either a red
(critical) or amber (non-critical) warning light.
Critical symbols appearing with a red warning light
will remain permanently displayed until the tractor
is stopped and the fault rectified.
Depending on the severity of the fault, non critical
symbols accompanied by the amber light will be
displayed for five seconds before the DMD defaults
to the symbol previously shown. The amber
warning light will continue to illuminate. However, if
the fault is of a simple nature, then the amber light
may go out when the fault code disappears from
the display.
For more severe faults, the amber warning light
may remain illuminated until the fault is rectified.
By using the keypad, active warnings that are not
permanently displayed may be recalled.
2 - 68
Accessing Stored Error Codes
z With the WARNING SYMBOLS screen

displayed, depress the Menu/Enter key.
z If an error code is stored, the display will

change to show the error code number and
appropriate symbol. If no error codes are
stored, the display will not change; depress the
Home/Escape key to exit the error code screen.
z If one or more error codes are stored, the

display will cycle through all error codes
displaying each one for 4 seconds. This is 108
repeated three times, after which the display
will return to the initial Error Code screen.
z Depress the Home/Escape key to recall the

normal operating display.
See page 5 - 2 for a list of error code symbols and
their application. In this case, consult your
authorised dealer.
2 - 69
WARNING and ADVISORY SYMBOLS

The dot matrix display can display a number of
warning/advisory symbols. The symbols can be
categorised into four main groups.
1. Warning. These symbols advise of a fault that
are critical to the operation of the tractor. Stop
the tractor as soon as possible, investigate the
cause and rectify the fault.
2. Maintenance. Warning symbols advise the
driver of a fault that may be critical to the
operation of the tractor, e. g., water
contamination in the fuel, alternator not
charging, etc.
3. System faults. System fault symbols relate to
an electrical or mechanical fault in one or more 109
of the tractor’s main components. In addition a
four-digit error code may also be displayed.
In this case, consult your authorised dealer.
4. Advisory. Advisory symbols are not
detrimental to the operation of the tractor but
should not be ignored. Take appropriate action
where necessary.
2 - 70
ADVISORY DISPLAYS AND INFORMATION
DOT LIGHT IN WARNING ALARM CAUSE ACTION

MATRIX INSTRU- LIGHT
DISPLAY MENT
PANEL
Amber Safety Handbrake applied with Release handbrake.
flashing vehicle moving.
Amber Safety Driver leaves seat without Apply handbrake.

flashing applying handbrake.
Driver Handbrake Release handbrake.

intervention not released during auto
required take-off.
- Safety Handbrake Apply handbrake.

not applied at key OFF.
Driver Drive engaged without Depress clutch pedal.

intervention depressing clutch pedal.
required
Driver Shuttle lever in drive. Move the power reversing lever

intervention to the neutral position.
required
Driver Transmission park lock Disengage transmission

intervention engaged. park lock.
required
Driver Transmission oil Run tractor until oil
intervention temperature too low. temperature increases.
required
Driver Key ON, engine not Turn key OFF or start engine.
intervention running.
required
General Indicators not cancelled. Cancel indicators.
Information
Park lights Parking lights ON at Turn parking lights off.

key-off.
Amber Safety Rear PTO engaged, Accompanied by a critical fault

flashing driver not present. alarm. Apply handbrake.
Amber Safety Front PTO engaged, Accompanied by a critical fault

F flashing driver not present. alarm. Apply handbrake.
2 - 71

(continued)

DISPLAY MENT
PANEL
Amber Non critical Incorrect use of PTO Do not engage PTO until DMD
flashing control - timed Out. symbol clears.
Amber Non critical Wheel slip limit exceeded. Reduce tractor or implement
flashing/ draught load.
continuous
- None Instrument display Adjust backlighting to

backlighting. required level.
- - AFS 200 monitor Configure to “ONLINE” status.

present but not
configured “ON LINE”.
Amber Non critical Front remote valve Reduce oil flow requirements to
flashing/ not functioning due to other remote valves.
continuous insufficient oil flow.
Move lever or joystick control
Lever or joystick not in to neutral.
neutral at key-on.
Amber Non critical Rear remote valvenot Reduce oil flow requirements to
flashing/ functioning due to other remote valves.
continuous insufficient oil flow.
Move lever or joystick control
Lever or joystick not in to neutral.
neutral at key-on.
2 - 72

DISPLAY MENT
PANEL
Red flashing Critical Transmission oil pressure These symbols advise of a
too low. fault that is critical to the
operation of the tractor.
Stop the tractor as soon as
- Amber - Transmission oil possible, investigate the
flashing/ temperature too high. cause and rectify the fault.
continuous If the fault cannot be easily
rectified, consult your
authorised dealer.
Red flashing Critical Engine coolant temperature
too high
Red flashing Critical Engine oil pressure too low
Red flashing Critical Oil pressure in Hydro

steering too low
Red flashing Non critical Hydraulic pump charge These symbols advise of a
pressure too low. fault that may be critical to
the operation of the tractor.
Amber Non critical Network malfunction. possible, investigate the
flashing cause and rectify the fault.
If the fault cannot be easily
authorised dealer.
Amber Non critical Air brake pressure too low.
flashing
Amber - Battery voltage too high.

flashing/
continuous
Amber Non critical Battery voltage too low.

flashing
Red flashing Non critical Brake boost

pressuretoo low.
2 - 73
WARNING DISPLAYS AND INFORMATION - WITH ENGINE SHUTDOWN ACTIVATED
DOT MATRIX LIGHT IN WARNING ALARM CAUSE ACTION

DISPLAY INSTRU- LIGHT
MENT
PANEL
Red Critical Engine Oil Pressure Low. These symbols advise of
flashing a fault that is critical to the
operation of the tractor.
Automatic engine
Red Critical Low transmission oil. shutdown will beactivated
flashing and the engine will STOP.
-
Investigate the cause and
rectify the fault.
Red Critical Transmission oil If the fault cannot be
flashing temperature too high. easily rectified, consult
- your authorised dealer.
Red Critical Engine coolant

flashing temperature too high.
-
Red Critical Engine control system

flashing malfunction.
-
Red Critical Engine ECU control

flashing data compromised.
-
The dot matrix display will cycle ENGINE STOP symbol with the appropriate warning symbol.
2 - 74
MAINTENANCE DISPLAYS AND INFORMATION

DISPLAY MENT
PANEL
Amber - Alternator not charging. Warning symbols advise the
flashing/ driver of a fault that may be
-
continuous critical to the operation of
the tractor.
Amber Engine intake filterblocked possible, investigate the
flashing/ cause and rectify the fault.
- continuous
If the fault cannot be easily
Amber Non critical Water in fuel authorised dealer.
flashing/
- continuous
Amber Transmission/Hydraulic oil

- flashing/ filter blocked.
continuous
Amber HEAVY maintenance

flashing/ schedule due in “xx” hours*.
-
continuous
LIGHT maintenance
schedule due in “xx” hours*.
-
* “xx” represents the hours remaining until the next service.
2 - 75
POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION SYSTEM

This transmission is an electronically controlled full
powershift transmission of an advanced design that
offers many automated functions to make changing
gear easier for the driver.
Subject to legal requirements in your country, the
following transmissions are available:
50 km/h transmission.
19 forward gears and 6 reverse gears
IMPORTANT: When travelling at high road speeds

with trailed or semi-mounted equipment attached to
the tractor, ensure the equipment is rated for
50 km/h operation in respect to its construction,
brakes and tyres.
110
40 km/h economy transmission
19 forward gears and 6 reverse gears
40 km/h transmission
18 forward and 6 reverse gears plus optional 10 x 6
creeper range
30 km/h transmission
17 forward and 6 reverse speeds
(18th gear cannot be selected) plus optional
10 x 6 creeper range.
Details of creeper gear operation will be found on
page 2 - 91.
IMPORTANT: Tractors with Full Powershift

Transmission cannot be tow started. They must on
no account be towed over longer distances than
from the field to a trailer or lorry. When towing the
tractor, the speed should not exceed 5 km/h
(3.1 MPH) with the engine switched off, or 10 km/h
(6.2 MPH) with the engine running.
GROUND SPEED CHARTS

The tractor’s ground speed may be displayed on
the control panel. If your tractor is equipped with
radar, then the ground speed displayed will be a
true reading. Tractors without radar may due to the
effects of wheel slip, tyre pressures, etc. display a
ground speed that is subject to minor inaccuracies.
See “Calibrating the ground speed display” on page
2 - 51.
The charts starting on page 2 - 93 show the ground
speeds in km/h and MPH. To find the road speed
for your tractor in any given gear ratio, use the
column with your rear tyre size in the heading.
2 - 76
Clutch Pedal
A clutch pedal (1) is provided but is not required for
gear changes or forward/reverse shuttle
operations.
The clutch pedal is required only for positioning the
tractor to attach equipment or if operating in
confined spaces when the low ratios do not provide
a slow enough speed, at moderate/low engine
speeds, to give precise control.
NOTE: The clutch pedal incorporates a safety start
device and must be depressed when starting the
tractor engine.
IMPORTANT: To avoid premature wear, do not use 111

the clutch pedal as a footrest.
Powershift control
The Powershift transmission is operated by means
of the Multi-Controller. Depress the switch (1) to
upshift through the gears, depress the switch (3) to
downshift. Changes can be made on the move,
even when performing operations such as
ploughing, etc.
A digital display (2) indicates both forward and
reverse gear ratios. It is not necessary to depress
the clutch pedal when upshifting or downshifting. 1
112
You can adjust the armrest to the most comfortable
position. Loosen the clamp knob (1), move the
control to the most comfortable position by rotating
left or right, or by extending the arm forwards or
backwards. Tighten the knob securely to clamp the
armrest in the new position.
Grasp the armrest at the front and rear then lift or
lower the complete assembly. Re-tighten the clamp
knob securely.
113
2 - 77
Shuttle lever
Selection of forward or reverse travel is by means
of an electrically operated shuttle lever on the left of
the steering wheel. The lever is spring-loaded to
the neutral position to prevent inadvertent
movement. It is not necessary to depress the clutch
pedal when actuating the shuttle lever.
Press the Neutral switch to shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL.
NOTE: If the shuttle lever is moved to the forward
or reverse position with the parking brake engaged, 1
an audible alarm will be heard
NOTE: To select forward or reverse drive, the
operator must be in the tractor seat. If the shuttle 114
lever or a transmission lever is inadvertently moved
from the neutral position without the operator in the
seat, one of the following actions must be taken to
re-enable drive:
With the operator in the seat and the shuttle lever in
neutral, depress and release the clutch pedal.
OR
Release the parking brake with the shuttle lever in
the neutral position.
! WARNING !
To prevent inadvertent tractor movement, always
place all gear shift levers in neutral and firmly apply
the parking brake before stopping the engine and
leaving the tractor. The transmission will not
prevent the tractor from rolling when the engine is
shut off.
NOTE: When operating in low temperatures,

upshifting may be restricted to the lower gears, until
the transmission oil temperature reaches 10 °C
(50 °F). Restricted upshifting will be accompanied
by the warning “CL” in the digital transmission
display. With cold transmission oil, avoid shuttle
operations, as far as practicable, until the oil has
warmed up.
2 - 78
Driving the Tractor

Start the engine with the shuttle lever in neutral and
the clutch pedal depressed. The LCD on the
instrument panel will display “N”. This will be
repeated in transmission gear display by a frame
surrounding the “N” (for neutral) symbol. The figure
“7” will also appear in the gear display. (When the
tractor is initially started, the transmission will
automatically select 7th gear).
NOTE: Neutral start switches prevent operation of
the starting motor unless the shuttle lever is in
neutral and the clutch pedal depressed.
115
For forward travel, with the engine idling, pull the
shuttle lever (1) toward the steering wheel, against
light spring-pressure, and move it up. The frame
around the “N” will move up to enclose the forward
direction symbol. Each time the shuttle lever is
operated, the “frame” will move to highlight the
forward, neutral or reverse symbol.
116
Once the tractor is moving, select the required ratio
with the upshift button (1) or downshift button (3), 2
as previously described. An example of the display
that you will see is shown at, where the upper
tractor symbol indicates forward and “10” indicates 1
that 10th gear is selected. The LCD segment for
10th gear will also be displayed.
An alternative lower or higher ratio may be
preselected before pulling away. However, if a ratio
higher than 12 is selected then the electronic
control will select 12, this being the highest ratio
permissible when pulling away from a standstill. 3
117
2 - 79
If, for example, 15th gear is selected before pulling

away, the 15th gear segment will flash and the 12th
gear segment will be steady. The tractor will pull
away in 12th gear and change up, sequentially, to
the selected gear as engine load, engine speed
and road speed are optimised. The segments for
13th and 14th gears will appear, as these ratios are
automatically selected. As soon as the required
gear is engaged, then the 15th gear segment will
stop flashing and become steady.
NOTE: In very cold conditions it may be necessary
to allow the transmission oil to warm up before
attempting to shift into the higher gears. Should this
occur, a warning symbol will appear in the dot
matrix display. When the symbol disappears from
the display, the transmission will function normally.
Further details can be found on page 3 - 6.
To reverse the direction of travel, reduce engine
speed, pull the shuttle lever (1) toward the steering
wheel, then move it down.
NOTE: When changing from forward to reverse
travel, the nearest available ratio will be selected.
As there are six ratios available in reverse, the
ground speed in reverse gear may be different to
the speed in the selected forward gear.
2
1
118
When performing shuttle operations in a high gear,
for example forward F15, when the shuttle lever is
moved to the reverse position, the transmission will
select the highest available ratio in reverse (R6).
When the shuttle lever is moved forward again,
ratio (F12) will be selected and the F12 segment
will appear in the display.
119
2 - 80
Auto Shift Function

Engaging AUTO shift permits automatic gear
changing in the forward ratios. Two auto shift
ranges are available:
“Auto Field” mode -
a range of five gears may be selected between
gears 1 and 11.
Auto Road mode -

Lowest auto gear - 17 (30 km/h transmission)
or
or
1
Auto Shifting in Road Mode 120
While travelling forward in 12th gear or higher,

press and release the AUTO switch (1 Fig. 120),
this will provide Auto shifting from 12th gear
upwards.
If required, the range of Auto shift gears can be
expanded to include additional lower gears. Any
gear between 7 and 11 can be programmed as the
Lowest Auto Gear (LAG). To set the lowest gear,
z Depress the neutral key (2) and at the same

time move the shuttle lever (1) to forwards and
hold the lever in this position (1,2 Fig. 118).
NOTE: Do not depress the clutch pedal during the
programming procedure.
z Keep the AUTO switch depressed (1), Fig. 120.
z While holding down the shuttle level, turn on

the key-start switch (but do not start the
engine). The central display in the integrated
ICU will show “OPt”.
z Release the shuttle level and, using keypad 121

buttons 1 or 3, select “OPt2”. Pause for two
seconds until the display changes to show the
currently selected Lowest Auto Gear.
2 - 81
z Using the keypad buttons again, select the new

lowest gear (between gears 7 and 11) Depress
button (3) to select a higher gear, depress
button (1) to select a lower gear.
z When the new lowest gear has been selected,

turn off the key-start to store the setting.
The transmission is now able to automatically make
upshifts or downshifts within the selected range of
gears, as dictated by engine torque, speed, and the
use of brakes and foot throttle.
It is now possible to engage the Auto Road Mode
while operating in the lower gears, providing the
current gear engaged is within the extended auto
range but below 11th gear. To engage Auto Road 122
Mode press and release the AUTO function switch
twice within one second.
In Auto Road Mode, with the clutch pedal
depressed and the tractor stopped, Auto shift will
automatically select the lowest auto gear in the
range in preparation to move off.
The driver can, if required, manually select a higher
gear to move off (e. g., on a downhill slope).
During road transport operations, it is possible to
override the auto function and manually select a
lower gear by depressing the downshift button.
Providing the downshift does not exceed the preset
auto shift load and speed parameters, the auto
function will remain engaged.
To disengage the Auto shift function and return to
manual shifting, press and release the AUTO
switch (1).
Alternatively, Auto Road Mode may be cancelled by
pressing either of the upshift or downshift buttons or
by using the shuttle lever to select reverse.
123
2 - 82
Auto Shifting in “Auto Field Mode”

While operating in any forward gear between 1 and
11, press and release the AUTO switch. This will
cause the transmission to momentarily upshift to
establish a torque output value from the engine.
As the engine speed drops the transmission will
downshift again.
This sequence will establish the shift parameters
and these will be entered into the auto memory.
Dependent on load and speed, the transmission is
now able to make automatic shifts within a span of
five gears.
The gear ratio currently selected will already be
displayed with the appropriate LCD segment. When
“Auto Field” mode is engaged, the plough symbol
will appear in the display.
Example 1: While operating in 7th gear, “7” is
displayed along with the 7th gear segment. If the
AUTO switch is pressed, LCD segments on the
side of the display for the 5th and 9th gear will flash
to indicate that automatic changing can occur
between the 5th and 9th gear.
Example 2: With 11th gear selected and displayed,
press the AUTO function switch. The segments for
8th and 12th gears will start to flash indicating the
tractor will automatically shift between 8th and 12th
gears.
124
Auto Shifting and “Go To” mode
If the transmission is already in “Go To” mode (see
page 2 - 87) when the Auto Field function is
selected, 2 - 87 the lowest “Go To” gear will
become the lowest gear of the Auto span unless
the current operating gear is lower. If the currently
selected gear is lower, then it will become the
lowest “Go To” gear. With both “Auto Field” and “Go
To” modes selected, the lowest limit gear for both
functions will always be the same.
2 - 83
Changing the Auto Shift Point
IMPORTANT: Changes to the Auto Shift point must

be made before engaging the Auto Shift function.
To suit different applications, the point at which the
transmission makes an automatic gear shift may be
adjusted from the default setting of 20%. Auto Shift
gear changes are related to an increase or
decrease in engine speed which can be set at 5,
10, 15, 20 or 25 percent.
NOTE: In “Auto Road” mode the shift point is
automatically set to 20% and remains at this value.
With the shift point set at 10%, a transmission
upshift will occur every time the engine speed
increases by 10%. Consequently, as the engine
speed decreases by the same amount, the
transmission will make a downshift.
It is recommended that during field operations the
shift point is set at a low percentage.
To change the shift point, depress and hold the
AUTO function switch for at least one second.
The current shift point figure will appear in the gear
display and the “ramp” symbol (1) will begin to
flash. Depress the AUTO function switch
repeatedly to scroll through the shift points.
With the new shift point selected, release the AUTO
switch and pause for five seconds. The new setting
will be stored and the display will return to normal.
IMPORTANT: At key-off (engine stop), electronic

programme settings made during tractor operation
are transferred from the operating memory to the
main memory. To provide sufficient time for the data
to transfer, allow a minimum of five seconds delay
125
before turning the key on again.
2 - 84
Changing the Gear Span

The gear span may be expanded by two gears both
up and down while on the move, using the
downshift and upshift buttons (1) and (2).
Example 1: Upshifting: When operating in Auto
mode in 7th gear, as described previously, the
segments for 5th and 9th gear will flash.
On reaching 9th gear, press the upshift button (1)
once to select 10th gear. When the tractor has
upshifted to 10th, press the control again to select 1
11th gear. Auto shifting will now be provided
between 5th and 11th gears. The segment for 5th 2
will continue to flash identifying this as the lowest
limit gear currently available.
Example 2: Downshifting: Assuming 5th has 126
been selected as the lowest Auto gear, slow the
tractor until this gear has been engaged.
Then, using the downshift control (2), select 4th
gear and further reduce speed until 4th gear
engages. 3rd gear may now be selected, if
required. Applying this technique it is possible to
select gears 1 to 11 in the Auto range.
Reducing the Gear Span
If necessary, the number of gears available in the
“Auto Field” mode may be reduced by using the
upshift and downshift controls in the following way.
Example 1: Upshifting: Upshift gears: With the
upper limit gear showing as 9th (flashing segment)
and the tractor operating in a lower gear, depress
the downshift button (2, Fig. 126). The flashing
segment will show a one gear reduction each time
the button is depressed.
Example 2: Downshifting: With the tractor
stopped and the engine running, depress and hold
in the AUTO switch (1). Then move the lower limit 1
gear upwards (flashing segment) using the upshift
button (1, Fig. 126), until the desired gear is 127
obtained and then release the AUTO switch.
This procedure will permit the lower limit gear to be
changed without affecting the upper limit gear
setting in the AUTO memory.
2 - 85
Changing Gear Shift Threshold

The point at which the gears change is established 2
by the original throttle setting and torque applied to
the engine at the time the AUTO function switch
was depressed. It is possible to alter the upshift or
downshift point to a higher or lower engine rpm if
required.
Higher Engine RPM: Move the hand throttle (1), to
a higher engine rpm setting than originally set. The
parameters for the upshift will automatically update
and gear shifts will occur at a higher engine speed.
Lower Engine RPM: Move the hand throttle (1), to 1
a lower engine rpm setting than originally set and
hold down the upshift button. The transmission will
upshift and the shift parameters will be updated. 128
Auto gear shifting will now occur at a lower engine
speed.
NOTE: Changing the gear shift parameters may
cause the shift point for one or more gears to fall
outside the original 5 gear span. If this should
occur, widen the gear span using the procedure
outlined on the previous page.
Standby mode
“Auto Field” mode is switched to Standby mode,
when:
z the 3-point hitch is raised.
z the clutch pedal is not depressed;
z the shuttle lever is moved from the forward

drive position.
While in the standby mode the gear segment LCDs
will continue to flash (unless reverse direction is
selected) and the established shift parameters will
remain in the AUTO function memory.
To exit programming mode
“Auto Field” mode can be exited in three ways:
1. Momentarily depress the AUTO function

switch (1), while in “Auto Field” mode.
2. Select 13th gear or a higher gear, while
“Auto Field” mode is engaged.
3. Engage creeper gears.
129
2 - 86
“Go To” mode

An additional feature on your tractor is the “Go To”
mode. The “Go To” system can be programmed to
downshift to a lower gear below that of the working
gear whenever the implement is raised.
This feature can be further enhanced by activating
the “Auto Field” function, whereby the tractor will
also automatically upshift again on lowering the
implement.
To programme “Go To” mode, proceed as follows.
With the engine running, press and hold the AUTO
function switch (1)
130
Within one second, press and release the top of
the Raise-Lower switch (1) to raise the implement. 1
The Auto Field symbol will appear on the
transmission display. Continue to press and hold
the AUTO function switch.
131
With the AUTO function switch still depressed,
select the required “Go To” gear using the upshift
button (1) or downshift button (2). The segment for
the “Go To” gear selected will flash. Release the
AUTO switch. Lower the implement by pressing
and releasing the fast raise switch.
NOTE: AUTO shift in the field range is disengaged
every time the implement is raised and re-engaged
when it is lowered.
1
132
2 - 87
To switch off “Go To” mode and reactivate the

normal shift mode, depress and hold the AUTO
switch (1). Move the switch (2) to raise or lower the
implement.
2
NOTE: With AUTO shift selected in conjunction
with the “Go To” mode, the lowest gear in the Auto
shift function also becomes the lowest “Go To”
gear.
Speed matching
When decelerating in the transport range of gears,
the transmission is able to automatically select a
gear to match engine speed and road speed. 1
As the tractor slows, either depress and release the
clutch pedal or, momentarily place the shuttle lever 133
in neutral. The transmission will automatically
select a lower gear to match engine speed with
road speed.
Available ratios:
“Auto Road” mode -
gears 12 to 17, 18 or 19
“Auto Road” mode - Extended Shift span
Lowest Auto Gear to 17, 18 or 19
NOTE: Providing the Extended Shift is activated,
Speed Matching will function down to the Lowest
Auto Gear.
The currently selected gear, if higher than the
speed matched gear, will be stored as the “target”
gear identified by its flashing LCD gear segment.
If, when in the Extended Shift span, the clutch
pedal is depressed and the tractor stopped, Speed
Matching will enter standby mode. Releasing the
clutch pedal will re-engage the Speed Matching
function and the tractor will move off in the Lowest
Auto Gear.
If required, the driver may manually select a
different gear to move off. Providing the chosen
gear is within the auto shift range, Speed Matching
will continue to operate across the full range of
gears from the Lowest Auto Gear upwards.
2 - 88
Programming Reverse Gear Ratios

When changing from forward to reverse, the
transmission will normally select the same or
closest possible ratio in reverse as was selected for
forward travel closest possible ratio in reverse as
was selected for forward travel.
For special shuttle shift applications, Power
Command transmission offers the advantage of
automatically changing the reverse gear ratio up to
three ratios higher or lower than the currently
engaged forward gear ratio.
To programme an alternative reverse gear, proceed
as follows:
z Depress the neutral key (2) and at the same

time move the shuttle lever (1) to forwards and
hold the lever in this position.
NOTE: Do not depress the clutch pedal during the
programming procedure.
2
1
134
z While holding the switch, turn on the key-start
switch (but do not start the engine). The central
display will show “OPt”.
z Release the shuttle lever and, using keypad

buttons (1) or (3), select “OPt 1”.
135
2 - 89
To programme a higher reverse ratio
z Pause for two seconds and the display will

change to show the currently programmed
reverse ratio.
NOTE: If the reverse ratio has not been previously
changed, the figure will be “0”.
1
z Press the upshift button (1) one, two or three
times, as required. The display will show “1”, “2”
or “3”. This indicates that when reverse is 2
selected the ratio will be one, two or three ratios
higher than the forward gear ratio.
136
To programme a lower reverse ratio
z Press the downshift control (2) one, two or

three times, as required. The display will show
“-1”, “-2” or “-3”. This indicates that when
reverse is selected the ratio will be one, two or
three ratios lower than the forward gear ratio.
To exit programming mode
z Turn the starter switch to the OFF.

The transmission is now programmed.
NOTE: Remember that only six reverse gears are
available. Consequently, if travelling forward in ratio
F13 or above, the transmission will always behave
as if ratio F12 (the highest ratio in the field range) is
selected. Therefore, if the transmission has been
programmed to select 2 ratios lower in reverse,
then R4 will be selected.
Conversely when travelling forwards in ratios F1-6,
the transmission will always react as if ratio 7 is
engaged. Therefore, if the transmission has been 137
programmed to select 2 ratios higher in reverse,
then R3 will be selected.
2 - 90
CREEPER GEARS (where fitted)

For operations requiring extra low ground speeds,
a reduction gear set (creeper gears) is available.
The reduction gear set is installed within the main
transmission housing.
With the reduction gears, an additional 10 forward
and 6 reverse creeper gear ratios are provided. The
reduction gear set has the effect of reducing the
ratios within the main transmission to provide very
low operating speeds.
The creeper gears are selected by means of a
rocker switch (1) located on the right-hand control
console.
With the engine running, clutch depressed and the
shuttle lever in neutral, apply and hold down the
tractor footbrakes. Momentarily depress the upper
part of the selector switch (1) to engage the creeper
gears.
138
The creep speed symbol (1) will appear flashing in
the transmission display When the creep gears are
fully engaged, the symbol will cease to flash and
become steady.
To disengage creeper gears, repeat the above
procedure and depress the selector switch again.
The creep speed symbol will cease to illuminate.
NOTE: Creeper gears offer very low ground
speeds. Do not use the low gearing advantage to
apply excessive draft loads to the tractor.
139
2 - 91
Fault Codes
In the unlikely event of a fault occurring in the
transmission controls or electronic circuit, a
malfunction symbol and a four-digit error code, will
appear in the dot matrix display Error codes for the
transmission will start with the figure “2”.
The code indicates the tractor circuit or sensor in
which the fault lies and the type of fault, e. g., open
circuit, short circuit, etc. In this event, the tractor will
require the attention of your authorised dealer.
Should a fault occur causing the tractor to become
disabled, contact your authorised dealer and report
the error code displayed.
There are a number of “action required” error codes
which can also appear in the dot matrix display,
these are listed below.
140
Error Driver intervention required

code
P Parking brake on, release parking

brake lever.
Clutch Depress clutch pedal to enable
Pedal transmission (restore drive).
N Place the shuttle lever in neutral.
Transmission Calibration
Should transmission shifts become slow or jerky,
the clutches in the transmission may require
re-calibrating. In this case, consult your authorised
dealer.
CALCULATING PTO SPEEDS

The gear speeds shown on the following pages are
at rated engine speed (2200 rpm). To determine the
ground speeds for PTO operations, divide the
ground speeds in the chart by the rated engine
speed and multiply by the PTO engine speed.
Example: To determine the ground speed at
540 rpm PTO speed in gear F7 (5.0 km/h) use the
following calculation:
5.0 (km/h) ÷ 2200 (rated speed) x 1950
(PTO engine rpm) = 4.43 km/h
2 - 92
GROUND SPEEDS in km/h and MPH at Rated Engine Speed (2200 rpm) for 30 km/h (17 x 6), 40 km/h
Transmission (18 x 6) or 50 km/h Transmission (19 x 6), Models 165, 180 and 195
Gear Ratio Rear Tyres Rear Tyres Rear Tyres

18.4R-38 20.8R-38 20.8R-42
Forward Gears - Standard Gears
km/h MPH km/h MPH km/h MPH
F1 1.7 1.0 1.8 1.1 1.9 1.1
F2 2.1 1.3 2.2 1.3 2.3 1.4
F3 2.4 1.4 2.6 1.6 2.7 1.6
F4 3.0 1.8 3.1 1.9 3.3 2.0
F5 3.6 2.2 3.8 2.3 4.0 2.4
F6 4.3 2.6 4.6 2.8 4.8 2.9
F7 5.0 3.1 5.3 3.2 5.6 3.4
F8 6.0 3.7 6.3 3.9 6.7 4.1
F9 7.2 4.4 7.6 4.7 8.1 5.0
F10 8.7 5.4 9.2 5.7 9.7 6.0
F11 10.5 6.5 11.1 6.8 11.7 7.2
F12 12.5 7.7 13.3 8.2 14.1 8.7
F13 14.4 8.9 15.3 9.5 16.2 10.0
F14 17.4 11.8 18.4 11.4 19.5 12.1
F15 20.9 12.9 22.1 13.7 23.4 14.5
F16 25.1 15.5 26.6 16.5 28.2 17.5
F17 30.2 18.7 32.0 19.8 33.9 21.0
F18 36.3 22.5 38.5 23.9 40.7 25.2
F19 46.1 28.6 48.9 30.3 51.7 32.1
*F19 E 38.3 23.7 42.5 26.4 42.5 26.4
NOTE: Ratios F18 and F19 are not available with 30 km/h transmissions.
NOTE: Ratio F19 is only available with 50 km/h transmissions and 40 km/h economy transmissions.
NOTE: *With the 40 km/h economy transmission the maximum speed in F19E is electronically regulated.
Reverse Ratios - Standard Gears

R1 3.8 2.3 4.0 2.4 4.2 2.6
R2 4.6 2.8 4.8 2.9 5.1 3.1
R3 5.5 3.4 5.8 3.6 6.1 3.7
R4 6.6 4.1 7.0 4.3 7.4 4.5
R5 7.9 4.9 8.4 5.2 8.9 5.5
R6 9.6 5.9 10.1 6.2 10.7 6.6
2 - 93
GROUND SPEEDS in Km/h and MPH at Rated Engine Speed (2200 rpm) with optional Creeper Gears,
Models 165, 180 and 195
Rear Tyres Rear Tyres Rear Tyres

Gear Ratio
18.4R-38 20.8R-38 20.8R-42
Forward Ratios - Creeper Gears
F1 0.28 0.17 0.30 0.18 0.32 0.19
F2 0.34 0.21 0.36 0.22 0.38 0.23
F3 0.41 0.25 0.44 0.27 0.46 0.28
F4 0.50 0.31 0.53 0.32 0.56 0.34
F5 0.60 0.37 0.63 0.39 0.67 0.41
F6 0.72 0.44 0.76 0.47 0.81 0.50
F7 0.83 0.51 0.88 0.54 0.93 0.57
F8 1.00 0.62 1.06 0.65 1.12 0.69
F9 1.20 0.74 1.28 0.79 1.35 0.83
F10 1.45 0.90 1.54 0.95 1.62 1.0
Reverse Ratios - Creeper Speeds
R1 0.63 0.39 0.67 0.41 0.71 0.44
R2 0.76 0.47 0.81 0.50 0.86 0.53
R3 0.92 0.57 0.97 0.60 1.03 0.64
R4 1.10 0.68 1.17 0.72 1.24 0.77
R5 1.33 0.82 1.41 0.87 1.49 0.92
R6 1.60 0.99 1.69 1.05 1.79 1.11
2 - 94
GROUND SPEEDS in Km/h and MPH at Rated Engine Speed (2200 rpm) for 30 Km/h (17 x 6), 40 Km/h
Transmission (18 x 6) or 50 Km/h Transmission (19 x 6), Model 210
Gear Ratio Rear Tyres Rear Tyres Rear Tyres

18.4R-38 20.8R-38 20.8R-42
Forward Ratios - Standard Gears
F1 1.5 0.9 1.6 0.9 1.7 1.0
F2 1.9 1.1 2.0 1.2 2.1 1.3
F3 2.3 1.4 2.4 1.4 2.5 1.5
F4 2.7 1.6 2.9 1.8 3.1 1.9
F5 3.4 2.1 3.6 2.2 3.6 2.2
F6 4.1 2.5 4.4 2.7 4.6 2.8
F7 4.6 2.8 4.9 3.0 5.1 3.1
F8 5.5 3.4 5.9 3.6 6.2 3.8
F9 6.6 4.1 7.0 4.3 7.4 4.5
F10 8.0 4.9 8.5 5.2 9.0 5.5
F11 10.0 6.2 10.6 6.5 11.2 6.9
F12 12.0 7.4 12.7 7.8 13.5 8.3
F13 13.3 8.2 14.1 8.7 14.9 9.2
F14 16.0 9.9 17.0 10.5 16.0 9.9
F15 19.3 11.9 20.4 12.6 21.6 13.4
F16 23.2 14.4 24.6 15.2 26.0 16.1
F17 26.9 16.7 30.7 19.0 32.4 20.1
F18 34.6 21.5 36.9 22.9 39.0 24.2
F19 42.6 26.4 45.2 28.0 47.8 29.7
*F19 E 35.6 22.1 37.8 23.4 39.9 24.7
NOTE: Ratios F18 and F19 are not available with 30 km/h transmissions.
NOTE: Ratio F19 is only available with 50 km/h transmissions and 40 km/h economy transmissions.
NOTE: *With the 40 km/h economy transmission the maximum speed in F19E is electronically regulated.
Reverse Ratios - Standard Gears

R1 3.5 2.1 3.7 2.2 3.9 2.4
R2 4.2 2.6 4.5 2.7 4.7 2.9
R3 5.1 3.1 5.4 3.3 5.7 3.5
R4 6.1 3.7 6.5 4.0 6.8 4.2
R5 7.6 4.7 8.1 5.0 8.5 5.2
R6 9.2 5.7 9.7 6.0 10.3 6.4
2 - 95
GROUND SPEEDS in Km/h and MPH at Rated Engine Speed (2200 rpm) with optional Creeper Gears,
Model 210
Rear Tyres Rear Tyres Rear Tyres

Gear Ratio
18.4R-38 20.8R-38 20.8R-42
Forward Ratios - Creeper Gears
F1 0.26 0.16 0.28 0.17 0.29 0.18
F2 0.32 0.19 0.33 0.20 0.35 0.21
F3 0.38 0.23 0.40 0.24 0.43 0.26
F4 0.46 0.28 0.49 0.30 0.51 0.31
F5 0.57 0.35 0.61 0.37 0.64 0.39
F6 0.69 0.42 0.73 0.45 0.77 0.47
F7 0.77 0.47 0.81 0.50 0.86 0.53
F8 0.92 0.57 0.98 0.60 1.04 0.64
F9 1.14 0.70 1.18 0.73 1.25 0.77
F10 1.34 0.83 1.42 0.88 1.50 0.93
Reverse Ratios - Creeper Gears
R1 0.58 0.36 0.62 0.38 0.66 0.41
R2 0.70 0.43 0.75 0.46 0.79 0.49
R3 0.85 0.52 0.90 0.55 0.95 0.59
R4 1.02 0.63 1.08 0.67 1.14 0.70
R5 1.27 0.78 1.35 0.83 1.43 0.88
R6 1.53 0.95 1.82 1.13 1.71 1.06
2 - 96
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
Four wheel drive tractors have a differential lock
installed in the front and rear axles to lock all four
wheels together in conditions where wheel slip may
be encountered. Two wheel drive tractors have a
differential lock in the rear axle only.
The differential locks are controlled by a spring
centred rocker switch on the console to the right of
the driver’s seat.
The differential lock(s) may be operated in manual
mode or automatic mode. To confirm mode 1
selected, the appropriate symbol on the switch will
illuminate when engaged.
! WARNING !
Avoid using the differential lock at speeds above 141
8km/h (5 MPH) and never at speeds above 15 km/h
(9 MPH) or at any time when turning the tractor.
When engaged, the differential lock will make
steering the tractor very difficult.
IMPORTANT: If wheel spin is encountered, reduce

engine speed before engaging the differential lock,
to avoid shock loads to the transmission.
Operating in Manual Mode (all models)
In slippery conditions, momentarily depress the
bottom of the switch (1, Fig. 141) to lock both
wheels together. The differential lock(s) will engage
and a warning light in the switch and on the
instrument panel (1) will light up.
When one or both brake pedals are applied or if the
switch is returned to the Off (central) position, the
differential lock will be disengaged again and the
warning lights in the switch and instrument panel
will go out. Alternatively, depress the bottom of the
switch again to disengage the differential lock(s).
NOTE: The lock(s) will remain engaged until
traction at the wheels equalises.
142
2 - 97
Operating in Automatic Mode

To engage both front and rear differential locks in
automatic mode, depress the top of the switch (1).
The warning light in the switch will illuminate. 1
The indicator light (1, Fig. 144) on the instrument
panel will also illuminate, but will only remain lit
while Differential locks are engaged.
In automatic mode, disengagement of the
differential lock will occur as follows:
143
Fast raise switch Temporary

activated (to raise the disengagement
rear 3-point hitch) (the differential- lock is
re-engaged when the -
3-point- hitch is
re-engaged-)
Either brake pedal is Temporary
applied disengagement-
Both brake pedals are Differential lock remains
applied at the same time engaged
Tractor speed exceeds Differential locks will
15 km/h (9 MPH) permanently disengage
144
Front steering angle Temporary
exceeds one of the disengagement-
preset limits (where (Re-engaged - when -
fitted) steering lock angle -
is reduced)
Momentarily depress the Differential locks will
top of the differential permanently disengage
lock rocker switch
NOTE: If the differential lock is active when the

key-start is turned off, it will remain active when the
key-start is switched on again.
2 - 98
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE

Four wheel drive greatly improves traction in
difficult conditions. The drive to the front wheels is
designed to be engaged or disengaged with the
tractor stationary or moving.
NOTE: The drive to the front wheels is actuated by
a three position rocker switch on the right-hand
control console. To confirm mode selected, the
appropriate symbol on the switch will illuminate
when engaged.
Operating 4WD in Manual Mode 1
Press the bottom of the switch to engage the drive
to the front wheels. Warning lights in the switch and
instrument panel will illuminate when four wheel
drive is engaged. To disengage four wheel drive 145
return the switch to the OFF (central) position.
NOTE: If four wheel drive is engaged when the
key-start is turned off, it will remain engaged when
the key-start is switched on again.
Operating in Automatic Mode
To engage “Automatic four wheel drive mode”,
depress the top of the four wheel drive switch (1)
Fig. 145. The warning light in the switch will
illuminate. The telltale (9) on the instrument panel
will also illuminate but will only remain lit when four
wheel drive is engaged.
Four wheel drive will remain permanently engaged
unless one of the following occurs:
z Ground speed exceeds 20 km/h (12.4 MPH).

Four wheel drive will re-engage when wheel
speed falls below 18 km/h (11.1 MPH).
146
2 - 99
NOTE: The following applies only to tractors fitted

with a steering angle sensor.
z Wheel speed falls below 10 km/h (6.2 MPH)

and steering angle exceeds 30°. Four wheel
drive will re-engage when the steering angle is
reduced.
z Wheel speed is between 10 km/h and 20 km/h

(6.2 and 12.4 MPH) and steering angle
exceeds 25°. Four wheel drive will re-engage
when the steering angle is reduced.
NOTE: The above steering angles are set during
manufacture. If an alternative angle setting is 147
required, consult your authorised dealer.
The telltale (9) on the instrument panel will also
illuminate but will only remain lit when four wheel
drive is engaged.
4WD Operating Precautions

! CAUTION !
! WARNING ! On four wheel drive tractors, drive to the front axle
Four wheel drive greatly increases traction. Extra is automatically engaged when both brake pedals
caution is needed on slopes. Compared to are applied simultaneously to provide four wheel
two-wheel drive, a 4WD tractor maintains traction braking. Additionally, you may have the optional
on steeper slopes, increasing the possibility of front disc brakes. The effectiveness of four wheel
overturning. braking greatly enhances tractor braking
performance therefore appropriate care should be
exercised during heavy braking.
IMPORTANT: To avoid excessive tyre wear, when
travelling on the public highway or any hard Front tyres should never be inflated above the
surface, it is recommended that four wheel drive be recommended pressure. Ideally, rear tyre
pressures should be maintained at least 0.4 bar
disengaged. Always use the specified front/rear (6 lbf/in2) above front tyre pressures, provided the
tyre combinations to ensure acceptable tyre wear. manufacturer’s recommendations are not
exceeded.
! WARNING !
Tractors with four wheel drive (engaged or IMPORTANT: Never attempt to drive the tractor
disengaged) should not be allowed to exceed with the front drive shaft removed, even if you have
50 km/h (31 MPH) where permitted. Overspeeding no intention of using four wheel drive. With the front
by towing or coasting downhill with the clutch
depressed or the transmission in neutral may drive shaft removed, application of the brakes
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. will result in severe damage to transmission
There is a risk of accidents, personal injury to the components.
operator or bystanders and damage to the
transmission.
NOTE: Keep the tractor in the same gear going

downhill as would be used when going uphill.
2 - 100
FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION (where fitted)

The optional, self-levelling, front axle suspension
will provide improved stability, control over the
vehicle, comfort and traction. The suspension
function is automatically activated each time the 1
tractor is started; but will not function at speeds
below 1.5 km/h (0.9 MPH).
When operating at speeds up to 12 km/h
(7.4 MPH), the front axle suspension may be
locked out, if not required.
148
To lock out the suspension, press the top of the
switch (1) on the right-hand “B” pillar illumination of
a warning light (2) in the instrument panel indicates
that the suspension is locked. Press the top of the
switch again to reactivate the suspension function.
At speeds above 12 km/h (7.4 MPH) the front axle
suspension will automatically engage, overriding
any lock out. In this situation the warning light will
remain on.
NOTE: Should the lock out switch warning light
begin to flash, this would indicate a malfunction of
the suspension system. Consult your authorised
dealer.
IMPORTANT: Read also “Ballasting and Tyres” on 149

page 3-144, regarding the use of front end weights
in tractors with front axle suspension.
! WARNING !
Hydraulic oil in the front axle suspension system
operates under very high pressure. Escaping
hydraulic oil under pressure can penetrate the skin
causing serious injury. Unqualified persons should
not attempt to disconnect any lines in the front axle
hydraulic system. Failure to follow these
instructions can result in serious injury.
! WARNING !
If a transmission ratio is engaged, with the engine
running and the tractor supported on axle stands,
the self-levelling function of the suspension may
cause the axle to make corrections (move up and
down). The suspension should be locked out to
maintain stability.
2 - 101
NOTES:
2 - 102
SECTION 3
BEFORE OPERATING
! CAUTION ! Topic Page

Before driving or operating the tractor, study the
safety precautions in Section 1 of this Manual. Important Notes 3-2
Read this section carefully for a thorough Connecting Jump Leads 3-4
understanding of operational requirements. Even if to the Battery
you operate other tractors, you should read this
section of the manual thoroughly and ensure that Starting the Engine 3-5
you are familiar with the location and function of all
the features of the tractor. Stopping the Engine 3-8
Do not start the engine or attempt to drive or Power Management (PM) 3 - 10
operate the tractor until you are fully accustomed
with all the controls. It is too late to learn once the Constant Engine Speed (CES) 3 - 11
tractor is moving. If in doubt about any aspect of
operation of the tractor, consult your authorised Headland Management Control (HMC) 3 - 13
CIH dealer.
Power Assisted Steering 3 - 24
PROGRAMMING THE TRACTOR FUNCTIONS
Your tractor is equipped with a sophisticated Rear PTO 3 - 26
electronic network system, which utilises various
memory facilities to programme and control many Front PTO and 3-Point Hitch 3 - 40
of the tractor functions. An operating memory
temporarily stores settings and adjustments made Electronic Draft Control (EDC) 3 - 56
while operating the tractor and these are
transferred to the main memory when you key-off Electronic Remote Valves 3 - 68
(engine stop).
Continuous Oil Supply for Remote 3 - 83
If you key-off and key-on again too quickly asdata is Services
being transferred between the operating and main
memories, some of the data may be lost or Three-point Hitch 3 - 86
corrupted.
If changes have been made to any memorised Quick Hitch 3 - 92
settings while operating the tractor, pause for five
seconds between key-off and key-on to provide Linkage Stabilisers 3 - 94
sufficient time for data to transfer between the
operating memory and the main memory. Once Drawbars and Towing Attachments 3 - 99
transferred, the new settings will remain unchanged
until they are reprogrammed. Trailer Braking Systems 3 - 112
Front Wheel Track Adjustment 3 - 119
Rear Wheel Track 3 - 126

Adjustment
Ballasting and Tyres 3 - 134
3-1
SECTION 3 - FIELD OPERATION
IMPORTANT NOTES
Before operating your tractor in the field, it is PRE-OPERATION CHECKS
important you read the following information.
Before operating the tractor, ensure that you are
RUNNING IN thoroughly familiar with the location and operation
of the controls.
IMPORTANT: Your new tractor will provide long Perform all daily lubrication and maintenance
and dependable service if it is given proper care operations in accordance with Section 4.
during the 50 hour running-in period and if it is After completing the daily maintenance operations,
serviced at the recommended intervals. perform a walk around visual inspection of the
tractor. Pay particular attention to the following
Avoid overloading the engine. Operating in too high items:
a gear under heavy load may cause excessive
engine overloading. Overloading occurs when the z Poly “V” belt for cracks or damage
engine will not respond to a throttle increase.
Do not operate without a load on the engine. This z Engine and exhaust areas for accumulation of
can be as harmful to the engine as overloading. debris
Vary the type of operation undertaken so that the
engine is subjected to heavy as well as light loads
during the running-in period. z Hoses, lines and fittings for leaks or damage.
Use the lower gear ratios when pulling heavy loads
and avoid continuous operation at constant engine z Tyres for damage
speeds. Operating the tractor in too low a gear with
a light load and high engine speed will waste fuel. z Hardware for looseness
You will save fuel and minimise engine wear by
selecting the correct gear ratio for each particular z Driveline and hydraulic pump areas for leaks or
operation.
debris accumulation
Check the instruments and warning lights
frequently and keep the radiator and various oil Make any necessary repairs before using the
reservoirs filled to the recommended levels. tractor.
PRESSURE WASHING THE TRACTOR

Your tractor is fitted with a number of Electronic
Control Units (ECUs) that are linked to various
sensors throughout the vehicle. These units
electronically control many tractor functions
including engine, transmission, PTO and hydraulic
systems.
It is very important therefore, when cleaning the
tractor body or chassis with a high pressure water
jet, that care should be taken not to aim the water
jet directly at any electrical component, wiring
harness or connector.
3-2
TOWING THE TRACTOR CARRYING THE TRACTOR ON A

IMPORTANT: The tractor should only be towed a TRANSPORTER
short distance, such as out of a building. Do not tow Transport the tractor on a low loader or flat bed
the tractoron the road. truck on which it will stand on all four wheels.
Securely chain the tractor to the transporter.
IMPORTANT: If it is necessary to tow the tractor, all
transmission controls mustbe moved to the
IMPORTANT: Do not chain around the frontdrive
neutral position before stopping the engine,
shaft, steering cylinders, front wheel drive axle
otherwise damage to transmission components
other components that could be damaged by
may occur during towing. If creeper gears
contacting the chain orby heavy loading.
(reduction gear set) are fitted, then the selector
control must be in the OFF position. Use the drawbar or drawbar hanger for a rear tie
down point.
If the tractor is towed, use a strong chain. Tow the
tractor from the rear using only the drawbar, rear IMPORTANT: Cover the silencer outlet so that the
tow hitch or the three-point hitch. Tow the tractor
wind does not spin the turbocharger and damage
from the front using the tow pin in the front weights
or front support. When towing, a driver must be in the bearings. Turbocharger turbine freewheeling
position on the driver’s seat to steer or brake the (turning without engine running) must be avoided
tractor. since lubrication will not be provided to the
To avoid damaging the transmission or other turbocharger bearings.
components that turn but are not lubricated during
towing, observe the following: TILTING HIGH VISIBILITY ROOF PANEL
Where road speeds in excess of 50 km/h (31 MPH)
z Only tow a short distance.. are likely to occur when transporting the tractor, it is
advisable to secure the high visibility roof panel
z Keep speed below 8 km/h (5 MPH). with ties to prevent it from opening.
z If possible, run the engine to provide lubrication

and power steering.
IMPORTANT: The brakes on your tractor are
hydraulically power assisted. With the engine off,
the brakes will still function but with a higher pedal
effort.
! CAUTION !
Do not tow the tractor faster than 8 km/h (5 MPH).
The steering is much slower and steering wheel
effort is much greater without the engine running.
150
! WARNING ! Secure both handles to the sun visor support using
Do not use cables or rope to tow the tractor. If the a flexible strap such as a cable tie (1) as shown in
cable or rope breaks or slips, it may whip with the illustration above. Do not use wire or metal
sufficient force to cause serious injury. When using straps as these may damage the paintwork.
a chain, attach the chain with the hook open side
facing up If the hook slips, it will drop down instead
of flying up.
NOTE: Four wheel drive will be engaged if the

engine is not running, regardless of the position of
the 4WD activation switch.
3-3
CONNECTING JUMP LEADS TO THE BATTERY

Jump Terminals
! WARNING !
Always sit in the driver’s seat to operate the starter
motor. If the key-start switch is bypassed and the
tractor has been left in gear, sudden and
unexpected movement of the tractor which which
could cause serious injury. Wear eye protection
when starting the tractor with jump leads or when
charging the battery.
If it is necessary to use jump leads (booster cables)

to start the tractor, use only heavy duty leads.
Proceed as follows:
Your tractor is equipped with remote jump terminals
installed on the right-hand side of the engine.
The positive terminal (1) mounted on the starter
solenoid, is encased in an insulated housing.
The negative terminal (2) is attached to the upper
mounting bolt of the starter motor.
Connect one end of red jump lead - to the positive (+)
remote jump terminal (1) and the other end to the
positive (+) terminal of the auxiliary battery.
Connect one end of black jump lead to the
negative (-) remote jump terminal (2) and the other
end to negative (-) terminal of the auxiliary battery. 151
Follow the starting procedure as described later in
this section.
When the engine starts, allow it to run at idle speed,
turn on all electrical equipment (lights, etc.) then
disconnect the jump leads in the reverse order to
the connecting procedure. This will help protect the
alternator from possible damage due to extreme
load changes.
3-4
Turn off all electrical equipment and run the tractor

engine until the battery is fully charged.
IMPORTANT: When using an auxiliary battery to
start the engine, ensure that the polarity of the jump
leads is correct - positive to positive, negative to
negative, otherwise the alternator may be
damaged. Only use an auxiliary battery if the tractor
batteries are discharged. Excessive amperage
(above 1600 cca) may damage the starter motor. In
the event of the batteries being severely
discharged, such that terminal voltage is below 7
volts, recovery will require a special charging
procedure Consult your authorised dealer.
STARTING THE ENGINE

Before starting the engine, always carry out the
following procedure:
z Sit in the driver’s seat.
z Ensure that the parking brake is firmly applied.
z Ensure the shuttle lever is in neutral.
z Ensure that the PTO knob is in the “OFF”

position.
z Place the remote control valve levers in the

neutral position.
z Move the hydraulic lift control lever fully

forward.
! WARNING !
Check the area beneath the equipment to ensure
that no injury or damage will be caused when
equipment is lowered.
z Depress and hold the clutch pedal.
IMPORTANT: The high operating speed of the

turbocharger makes it essential that adequate
lubrication is assured when the engine is started.
Therefore, idle the engine at 1000 rpm for
approximately one minute before driving the tractor.
3-5
GRID HEATER COLD START AID (where fitted)
! WARNING !
Your tractor may be equipped with an electronic
cold weather starting aid. Do not use start spray
(ether), if a cold start aid is installed. It will
explode in the intake manifold. If any difficulty is
experienced when trying to start your tractor in cold
temperatures, consult your authorised
dealer.
The grid heater, which is effective in ambient

temperatures down to -18° C (0° F), consists of a
heating element installed in the intake manifold.
Operation of the grid heater is automatic when the
the engine coolant temperature falls to -3° C
(26.6° F) or below.
A warning light on the instrument panel will
illuminate to confirm operation.
If temperatures below -18° C (0 ° F) are
encountered, a block coolant heater is available as
an accessory. The block coolant heater is effective
in ambient temperatures down to -29° C (-20° F)
when used in conjunction with the grid heater.
152
Key-start switch
A five-position key-start switch is installed. The key-
start switch positions are as follows:
Position 1 Not used
Position 2 OFF
Position 3 Accessories ON
Position 4 Warning lights, instruments
and grid heater ON
Position 5 Grid heater ON, starter motor
engaged
IMPORTANT: Never push or tow the tractor to start

the engine. Use an auxiliary battery and jump 153
leads.
NOTE: Neutral start switches prevent operation of
the starter motor unless the shuttle lever is in the
neutral (N) position and the clutch pedal is
depressed.
3-6
Starting the engine in cold weather (with a cold

engine)
z Open the hand throttle halfway and turn the

key-start switch clockwise to position (4). The
indicator light (1, Fig. 155) on the instrument
panel will illuminate for 10 to 15 seconds to
show the grid heater has been activated.
z When the light extinguishes, turn the key fully

clockwise to position (5). Crank the engine until
it starts but do not operate the starter motor for
more than 60 seconds.
NOTE: If cranking is not carried out within 154
30 seconds of the light extinguishing, turn the key-
start to the “Off” position, pause and restart the
sequence.
z If the engine fails to start, repeat the above

mentioned procedure. If the engine still fails to
start, allow the battery to recover for
4 - 5 minutes, then repeat the procedure.
z When the engine starts, return the throttle to the

idle position and check that all warning lights
extinguish and gauge readings are normal.
155
Starting in warm weather or when the engine

is hot
z Open the hand throttle halfway, depress the

clutch and turn the key-start switch fully
clockwise to position (5, Fig. 154), to operate
the starter motor. Crank the engine until it starts
but do not operate the starter motor for more
than 60 seconds.
NOTE: After activating the starter motor, you must
return the key-start switch to the OFF position,
before you can try to start the motor again.
z Return the throttle to the idle position and check

that all warning lights extinguish and gauge
readings are normal.
3-7
STOPPING THE ENGINE

IMPORTANT: Before stopping, idle the engine at
1000 rpm for approximately one minute. This will
allow the turbocharger and manifold to cool and
prevent possible distortion of components.
To stop the engine, carry out the following
procedure:
z Sit in the driver’s seat.
z Move the hand throttle to idle.
z Ensure that the parking brake is firmly applied.
z Ensure the PTO is disengaged.
z Place the remote control valve levers in the

neutral position.
z Lower 3-point hitch mounted equipment to the

ground.
z Turn the key-start switch to OFF (position 2).
AUTOMATIC ENGINE SHUTDOWN
IMPORTANT: Before attempting to start an engine

that has automatically shutdown, trace and rectify
the fault that caused the engine to be stopped.
Automatic engine shutdown is operated through the
electronic engine controller (ECU). In the unlikely
event that one or more of the following conditions
occurs then the engine will be shut down after
30 seconds.
z A critical error is detected within the engine

electronic control system.
z The generated engine horsepower attempts to

exceed the specified design limit.
Should either of the above situations occur and the
engine shuts down, consult your authorised dealer
before attempting further operations with the
tractor.
NOTE: Automatic engine shutdown function is
permanently activated and cannot be switched off.
3-8
Automatic Engine Shutdown with Enhanced

Keypad (where fitted)
The automatic engine shutdown system on tractors
equipped with the optional Enhanced Keypad
provides a further level of protection. The system
monitors four key areas that are critical to the safe
operation of engine and driveline. In the unlikely
event that one or more of these reaches a critical
condition, the engine will be shut down.
z The engine oil pressure falls below safe limits
z The engine coolant temperature exceeds safe

limits.
z The driveline oil pressure falls below safe limits.
z The driveline oil temperature rises above safe

limits.
Prior to engine shutdown the red Stop light will start
to flash and the critical alarm will sound. In addition,
the engine fault warning and malfunction symbols
will flash alternately in the dot matrix display.
If, after 30 seconds, the driver has not stopped the
engine, the automatic shutdown feature will be 156
activated and the engine will be shut down.
After the engine has shut down, the red Stop light
will remain on but the alarm will cease to sound.
Both engine and malfunction symbols will continue
to flash alternately.
The automatic engine shutdown function may be
programmed by your authorised dealer to operate
in one of the following modes:
1. No engine shutdown. In this mode the engine is
not capable of automatic shutdown.
2. Always engine shutdown. The engine will
shutdown at any time if one or more of the
monitored conditions reaches a critical level.
3. Stationary engine shutdown. The engine will
shutdown only during stationary operations, if
one or more of the monitored conditions
reaches a critical level.
Although the Automatic Engine Shutdown linked to
the Keypad can be disabled, the ECU controlled
system will continue to function in the normal way.
3-9
POWER MANAGEMENT (PM)

Power Management is an automatic system
designed to boost engine power levels where
tractor performance may be compromised due to
increased loads.
Once activated, PM will monitor and respond to
increased power demands by gradually raising the
level of horsepower available.
IMPORTANT: Power Management will be disabled
if the engine coolant temperature is below 105°C
(221°F). In this situation either increase the engine
speed or reduce the load on the engine until the
coolant temperature is reduced.
Use of the Auto PTO Control
Before PM will operate the following must apply:
Engine speed exceeds 1300 RPM
Tractor forward speed above
0.5 km/h (0.3 MPH).
PTO power output is above 27 kW (36.2 HP).
PTO driveline torque is above 250 Nm.
NOTE: Power Management will operate at all PTO
speeds, i.e. 540, 540E and 1000 rpm.
With the tractor moving and the engine running
above 1300 rpm, engaging the rear PTO will
activate Power Management in standby mode.
As the torque and load on the PTO reaches or 157
exceeds the above levels, the warning light (1) will
illuminate and Power Management will be
activated.
When the power requirement is reduced, the
amount of boost is also reduced until the system
reverts to standby.
Road Transport Applications
Before the Power Management function becomes
available, the following must apply:
16th gear or above is selected “Auto Transport”
mode is selected.
Engine speed is between 1800 and 2200 rpm.
Power Management will only function when Auto
Shift is selected and the tractor is operating in 16th
gear or higher. PM will be deactivated if one or
more of the following occurs:
Downshifting below 16th gear.
Engine speed falls below 1800 rpm.
Auto Shift is disengaged.
3 - 10
CONSTANT ENGINE SPEED

With Constant Engine Speed, the driver may preset
one or two fixed engine speeds appropriate to the
work in hand.
With CES engaged, the indicator light on the
instrument panel (1) will illuminate to confirm
operation.
When in operation CES constantly monitors engine
load and speed for any change. When engine load
increases and engine speed falls, CES balances
engine speed control accordingly so that engine
speed remains constant.
158
Setting Constant Engine Speed
With the engine running, set the hand throttle
above 1000 rpm. To activate Speed Management,
momentarily depress the top of the switch (2) on
the right-hand console. To deactivate, depress the
top of the switch again.
Select programme 1 by momentarily depressing
the bottom of switch (2) and then, using the speed
control switch (1), increase the engine speed to the 1
desired level. When the speed for programme 1
has been entered, programme 2 can then be
selected (if required) by momentarily depressing
the bottom of switch (2) again. Repeat the above
procedure to set the second speed. 2
NOTE: Momentarily depressing the speed 159
adjustment switch will increase or decrease the
speed in 10 rpm increments. Maintaining pressure
on the switch will permit the speed to ramp up or
down at 100 rpm/second, providing there is no load
on the engine.
IMPORTANT: At key-off (engine stop), settings

made during tractor operation are transferred from
the operating memory to the main memory.
To provide sufficient time for the data to transfer,
allow a minimum of five seconds delay before
turning the key on again.
3 - 11
Operating with Constant Engine Speed

The Constant Engine Speed function can be
engaged at any time providing the engine is
running above 1000 rpm. Momentarily depress the
top of the Speed Control switch (2) to activate CES.
The system will automatically default to programme
1. Depress the bottom of the control switch to
select programme 2.
The programme number will appear above the
1
engine display.
When operating in the field, shuttling between
programmes 1 and 2 may be achieved by
repeatedly depressing the bottom of the control 2
switch or, if more convenient, the Headland
Management Control step switch (1) Fig. 160. 160
NOTE: If the HMC step switch is used to shuttle
between CES speeds, the control switch (2) will be
disabled. To re-enable switch operation, exit and
re-enter the CES function.
NOTE: Moving the hand throttle in CES mode will
disable the speed settings and return engine speed
control to the hand or foot throttle.
Accessing a Previously Stored Setting
To access a previously stored speed setting,
depress and hold the top of the engine speed
switch (2), Fig. 160. The indicator light will start to
flash in the instrument panel.
NOTE: The hand throttle must be set to 1000 rpm
before depressing the switch.
Continue to hold the switch until the light stops
flashing and goes out. The engine speed will
increase or decrease to the previously stored
setting. Depress the bottom of the control switch (2) 1
or the HMC switch (1) to select the required CES
programme.
NOTE: If the CES switch (2) is released whilst the 161
light is flashing, Constant Engine Speed will reset
to the default setting. Depress and hold the CES
switch again to restart the procedure.
To exit Constant Engine Speed:
Depress the CES switch. Move the hand throttle to
idle. Turn the key-start to the OFF position.
3 - 12
HEADLAND MANAGEMENT CONTROL (HMC)

Quick Guide to Headland Management
Control (HMC)
Where there is a need to repeat a sequence of
actions, such as those made during a headland
turn, HMC can be used to create, store and play
back a programme of these actions.
The following text is provided as a quick guide to
the operation of Headland Management Control.
A more comprehensive guide to HMC can be found
in the pages following this guide.
NOTE: For HMC to function, the hand throttle must
be set above 900 rpm.
ACTION - RECORDING CON-

VISUAL
TROL
1.To start recording the HMC programme, depress and hold the top of the record
switch (1) for three seconds. The “recording” symbol will flash in the gear display.
2.To start recording a second programme sequence, momentarily depress the Multi-
Controller. The “recording” symbol will stop flashing and will remain lit.
3.Carry out the headland turn sequence in the normal way. As each step in the
sequence is recorded, the corresponding symbol will appear in the gear display.
When a step is finished, this will be displayed in the gear display. When a step is
completed and a new one started, the symbol for the completed step will scroll
downwards to be replaced by the new one.
In Section 4 the recording of a second sequence for headland management control
is described. The ending of the current recording is described in Section 6.
4.To record a second programme sequence after the first one is completed, depress
and hold the switch on the Multi-Controller for three seconds. The “recording” symbol
will illuminate.
5.To start recording, depress the switch again. The “recording” symbol will stop flashing
and will remain lit. You can now start the sequence.
6.When the HMC recordings are completed, momentarily depress the top of the record
switch to save the recorded sequences and exit HMC.
3 - 13
ACTION - PLAYBACK CON-

VISUAL
TROL
1. To enter playback mode, depress and hold the top or bottom of the playback switch.
The programme number will appear at the top of the HMC display.
Release the switch; the programme symbols will start to flash indicating HMC is in
standby mode.
NOTE: Depress the top of the switch to provide AUTOMATIC replay of all programme
steps, depress the bottom of the switch to select MANUAL replay of each individual step.
2. If a second sequence was recorded, continue to depress the top or bottom of the
playback switch until the required programme number, 1 or 2, is displayed, then release
the switch.
Programme number will flash the “playback” symbol.
3. To begin playback, depress and hold the step switch until a “beep” is heard.
The playback symbol will stop flashing and will remain lit.
NOTE: In MANUAL replay the programme will pause after each step is completed.
Momentarily depress the step switch to replay the next step.
4. During playback, the function symbols will scroll upwards towards the top of the
HMC display.
5. After the current sequence has been replayed, the next sequence will be held in standby
mode (playback symbol flashing). Depress and hold the switch until a “beep” is heard.
To resume programme playback, depress and hold the switch until a “beep” is heard,
release the switch.
6. To skip a playback sequence it will be necessary to exit HMC by depressing the record
switch. To re-enter HMC, start at point 1 above.
See page 3 - 17 for an explanation of HMC symbols.
3 - 14
Headland Management Control Operation (HMC)

In the recording mode a sequence of actions or
“steps” are recorded to create a programme. In
playback mode, HMC will replay the sequence
exactly as recorded.
Programmes may be replayed as a continuous
operation (AUTOMATIC) or as a series of individual
steps (MANUAL), each one initiated by depressing
the step switch.
HMC permits up to 28 individual steps to be
recorded as one or two separate programmes.
Three switches control the operation of HMC:
1. Playback switch. To replay a programme,

momentarily depress the top of this switch (A)
for AUTO replay, depress the bottom of the
switch for MANUAL replay.
2. Record switch. This switch is used to activate or 2
deactivate the system and to select the record
mode.
3. Headland switch. The switch is used to start, 1
pause or stop a programme. The switch can
also be used to insert pauses during a recording 162
or to pause a programme during playback.
NOTE: Each pause inserted during a recording will
be recognised as a programme step by HMC.
Where HMC is used to create a recording, the
following actions or functions may be included in
the programme.
z Engine Speed Adjustment.
z Shift transmission gears up and/or down.
z Raise and lower the rear three point hitch.*
z Raise and lower the front three point hitch.*

3
z Operate rear electronic remote valves.
163
3 - 15
IMPORTANT: When operating in Field Auto Mode,

activating HMC will suspend the Auto Mode
function. After completing a headland turn
manoeuvre programme, HMC will be suspended
and the Field Auto Mode programme will be
resumed.
In a similar way, CES will also be disabled when
HMC is active and will be re-enabled when HMC is
suspended. However, the CES light will still remain
illuminated while the programme is disabled.
When HMC is activated, the corresponding symbol
will appear in the gear display.
The symbol (2) indicates whether HMC is in record
or playback mode.
When recording or replaying a programme, each
action or step will be represented by the
appropriate symbol, i.e. a gear change or series of
gear changes will be accompanied by a
transmission symbol.
See page 3 - 17 for an explanation of HMC
symbols.
As each step is recorded, the accompanying
symbol will move down the display as the next step
begins. The symbol for the new step will appear
immediately below the recording symbol. 164
During playback, symbols will scroll upwards from
the bottom of the display. When a symbol reaches
the top of the display (below the playback symbol)
the corresponding function will begin to operate.
A maximum of seven symbols may be displayed at
one time.
IMPORTANT: If a programme fault occurs and the

error symbol is displayed, exit and re-enter HMC to
clear the fault.
3 - 16
Explanation of HMC Symbols

The symbols shown below are examples of those
which may, depending on programme content,
appear in the transmission gear display when HMC
is active.
HMC Programme Engine Speed - Reduce
Programme Number Transmission - Shift Up
Switch Symbol - Record Transmission - Shift Down
Record Remote Valve - Retract
Switch symbol Remote Valve - Extend

Manual Playback Mode
Switch symbol Remote Valve - Float

Automatic Playback Mode
Play Hitch - Up
Pause Programme Hitch - Down
Fault Front 3-Point Hitch - Raise
Engine Speed - Increase Front 3-Point Hitch - Lower
3 - 17
Recording a programmel
NOTE: HMC is only available, if the engine speed
has been set above 900 rpm with the hand throttle.
IMPORTANT: In record mode, if the tractor is

stopped or no controls used for approximately
13 minutes, the system will automatically revert to
standby mode and all recorded steps will be 2
deleted.
To record a Headland Management Control
sequence, depress and hold the top of the record 1
switch (2) for three seconds. This will activate HMC
but the system will remain in standby mode.
165
The HMC symbol will appear in the upper part of
the display adjacent to the recording symbol which
will start to flash.
To start recording, momentarily depress the
switch (3). As each HMC linked control is operated,
a grey coloured symbol will appear in the display
immediately below the recording symbol.
As each symbol moves down the display to be
replaced by the next one, the colour will change
from grey to black.
NOTE: Symbols relating to the function in current
3
use, either in record or playback mode, will always
appear inversed (grey symbol on black
background).
166
After the first HMC sequence has been completed,
a second (opposite headland) sequence may be
recorded.
Depress and hold the switch (3) for three seconds
to end the first recording and switch to standby
mode. The recording symbol will start to flash.
To start recording a second sequence, momentarily
depress the switch (3).
NOTE: Transmission shifts made whilst the tractor
is in reverse will not be recorded or played back by
HMC. A pause will be automatically entered in the
programme at this point.
3 - 18
During a recording, pauses may be inserted into

the programme by momentarily depressing the
switch (3). HMC recording will pause at this point
and a pause symbol will be inserted in the
programme. Depress the switch again to continue
the recording.
To store a recorded sequence, depress the top of
the record switch (2) again. This will deactivate the
HMC function and no further recording will occur.
NOTE: If, during a recording sequence, the engine
is stopped (key-off) then all steps recorded up to
that point will be saved. 3
167
NOTE: Shuttling actions are not recorded but a
pause is automatically inserted into the sequence
when the shuttle lever is operated.

programme settings made during tractor operation
main memory. To provide sufficient time for the data
to transfer, allow a minimum of five seconds delay 2
before turning the key on again.
168
IMPORTANT: When including electronic remote F
valve operation in a HMC sequence, it is important L
to allow sufficient time for the movement of the
N
control lever to be correctly recorded as it passes
through R, N, L and F positions (or vice versa).
R
Pausing the lever in each position for
approximately 1/2 second will provide sufficient
time for the step to be recorded accurately. Moving
the lever too quickly may confuse data transfer.
This can cause the implement to respond
incorrectly on play-back.
NOTE: The maximum time permitted for a single
step in an EHR valve sequence is 25 seconds.
After this time another step will be created to 169
continue the operation and a new symbol will
appear in the display.
3 - 19
Playing a Programme
! CAUTION !
Before commencing work, it is recommended that
HMC programmes are given a “dry run” to ensure
all programme steps have been retained in the
memory and any timed EHR sequences replay
correctly.
To replay a recorded sequence, momentarily

depress the top of the playback switch (1) for AUTO
replay, or depress the bottom of the switch for
MANUAL replay. Playback will be activated but will
remain in standby mode.
If the suspend/resume function (step switch) was
used to record a second programme, the driver
may now cycle between programmes 1 and 2 by
holding down the AUTO or MANUAL side of the
playback switch. 2
When the correct number appears at the top of the
transmission display, release the switch.
The programme number will be replaced by a 1
flashing playback symbol.
170
When reaching the point at which the programme is
to start, depress and hold the switch (3) until a
“beep” is heard, then release the switch. Playback
will start as soon as the switch is released and the
first symbol in the sequence will appear below the
playback symbol
NOTE: To initiate playback, the engine speed must
be above 900 rpm and tractor speed must be
above 0.5 km/h (0.31 MPH).
When playback begins, the symbol will stop
flashing and will remain lit. 3
As each function is executed, the corresponding
symbol will appear immediately below the playback
symbol. At this point it will change from black on
grey background to grey on black background 171
(inversed).
3 - 20
Subsequent symbols in the programme sequence

will appear below the one currently being executed.
As each step is completed, the corresponding
symbol will disappear from the display to be
replaced by the next one.
If playback is activated in MANUAL mode,
depressing the switch will only play the first step in
the programme sequence. When the first step is
completed, the programme will pause until the
switch is depressed again to start the next action in
the sequence.
In playback mode, each step will be replayed
exactly as it was recorded.
NOTE: If necessary, the foot throttle may be used
to increase engine speed during HMC playback.
If pauses were inserted into the sequence during
recording, playback will automatically stop at each
pause point. To resume the sequence, depress and
hold the switch until a “beep” is heard. The next
step will start immediately the switch is released.
By delaying the point at where the step switch is
used to restart a programme in AUTOMATIC mode,
adjustments can be made to the time span of a
sequence or to extend the delay between individual
steps. This only applies to pauses inserted at the
recording stage.
In playback mode, the programme may be stopped 3
at any time by depressing the step switch (3).
The programme will pause and the playback
symbol will begin to flash.
172
3 - 21
IMPORTANT: If the step switch is used to suspend

a function in play, all current HMC actions, including
timed electronic remote valve sequences, will be
aborted and it may be necessary to manually
complete the paused step before restarting HMC
playback manually complete the paused step
before restarting HMC playback.
To resume programme playback, depress and hold
the switch until a “beep” is heard and then release
the switch.
IMPORTANT: During playback, one or more of the

following actions will cause HMC to be stopped and
all automated functions, including timed EHR
sequences, to be terminated:
z Tractor speed drops below 0.5 km/h (0.3 MPH)

or the tractor is stationary for more than
10 seconds.
z The driver leaves the seat for more than

2 seconds.
z Fender mounted 3-point hitch or PTO controls

are operated.
z Hand throttle is set to idle.
z Operating one or more of the HMC linked

tractor controls to override the programme.
NOTE: A control is not regarded as overridden by
HMC until the sequence reaches the point at which
the automated operation of that control begins.
At this time, the sequence will be stopped.
On completion of a sequence or if HMC is halted
during playback, electronic remote valves will not
return to float even if the relevant lever is in the float
position. The following are exceptions:
z The lever was already in the float position when

the HMC system was activated.
z The last HMC command step selected the

valve float function.
3 - 22
If an EHR function is being executed and the

switch (3) is used to cancel the action e. as to stop
a hydraulic cylinder extending, then the cylinder will
stop and playback will be suspended.
The cancelled action will be by-passed and the
programme will move on to the next step when
playback is restarted.
However, the cancelled action will remain in the
programme memory for subsequent replays.
To continue the programme, depress and hold the
switch until a “beep” is heard and then release the
switch. 3
NOTE: When a HMC programme is suspended, the
symbols will flash in the display until the switch is
depressed to restart the programme. 173
IMPORTANT: If an HMC programme is halted by

the driver leaving the seat for more than 2 seconds,
the current engine speed will be maintained until
the driver returns to the seat, the throttle setting is
changed or the HMC sequence is cancelled.
Before leaving the driver’s seat, always
deactivate HMC and apply the tractor parking
brake.
3 - 23
TURN ASSIST (WHERE FITTED)

The optional Turn Assist steering system is
designed to provide fast steering response when
required e. g., when operating with a front loader. 1
From the straight ahead position, Turn Assist will
provide full right or left hand steering lock with less
than a 105 movement of the steering wheel.
IMPORTANT: Before travelling on the public

highway, Turn Assist must be deactivated and
normal steering reinstated. Before starting your
journey, check normal steering operation: turn the
wheel fully from lock to lock.
174
NOTE: Turn Assist will not operate if the tractor
speed is above 10 km/h (6.2 MPH).
To activate the Turn Assist function, depress the
On/Off switch (1). A green warning light (3) on the
instrument panel will illuminate to confirm system
activation.
To operate Turn Assist, depress and hold the centre
ring (4) on the steering wheel. To disengage,
release the ring. With the centre ring depressed, a
yellow indicator light (2) will illuminate on the
instrument panel. It will extinguish when the centre
ring is released.
NOTE: If the On/Off switch (1) is left in the “ON”
position at engine key-off, then Turn Assist will be
deactivated at the next key-on. The On/Off switch 175
warning light will not illuminate and the yellow
indicator light (2) will flash if the centre ring is
depressed. To reactivate Turn Assist, turn the On/
Off switch “OFF” and then “ON”.
Turn Assist can only be operated if the following
three conditions are met.
1. The On/Off switch is in the ON position and the

switch warning light is illuminated.
2. The speed of the tractor is below 10 km/h
(6.2 MPH).
3. The transmission oil temperature is above 5° C.
NOTE: Attempting to use the Turn Assist function
without meeting all the above conditions, will cause
the yellow indicator light (2) to flash.
176
3 - 24
NOTE: If tractor speed exceeds 10 km/h (6.2 MPH)

with Turn Assist in operation, it will be disengage 1
and the green indicator light (2) will flash.
NOTE: Where the transmission oil temperature is
low, it is recommended to turn the steering wheel
twice, from full lock to full lock, before operating
with Turn Assist.
Turn Assist will be disabled, if a fault occurs.
Should the system become disabled, an audible
warning will sound and an error code will appear in
the dot matrix display. If the fault is of a critical
nature, the “STOP” warning lamp will also flash on
the instrument panel. In this case, consult your
authorised dealer.
177
To reactivate Turn Assist turn the On/Off switch to
“OFF”, remedy the fault and then turn the switch
back to “ON”.
IMPORTANT: To promote safe operation of Turn

Assist, it is advised that the operator become
familiar with the system before operating in the
field.
3 - 25
REAR PTO
Description
The PTO is engaged and disengaged by means of
a knob (1) on the right-hand console. The adjacent
warning light (2) will illuminate when the PTO is
engaged.
Three types of rear PTO system are available,
dependent upon tractor model and country.
a) 540/1000 speeds with interchangeable output
shafts.
b) 540/1000 shiftable with interchangeable output
shafts and the option of fender-mounted
switches.
c) 540E/1000 shiftable with interchangeable
output shafts and the option of fender-mounted
switches. 178
An automatic “soft start” facility is provided to

permit easy start up of heavy, high inertia, PTO-
driven equipment.
Soft start modulates PTO clutch torque over the
first 5 seconds of engagement to provide a slower,
gradual take up of the drive.
NOTE: Soft start only operates at engine speeds of
1800 rpm and below. Above this speed, normal
PTO engagement will occur.
With a shiftable lPTO, a range lever is provided to
select 540 or 1000 PTO speeds. The range
lever (1) is located at the rear of the right-hand
console.
179
3 - 26
PTO Switch Operation - Timeout

To engage the PTO, depress the knob (1) then lift
the collar (2) and knob together. This movement
should be decisive in its application as hesitant or
incorrect operation of the knob or collar may cause
the PTO system to time out.
Do not under any circumstances:
z Depress and hold the knob (1) for more than

10 seconds.
z Depress and hold the knob and lift the collar (2)
for more than 10 seconds without engaging
the PTO. 180
z Operate the fender mounted and internal PTO

controls simultaneously or within 2 seconds of
each other.
Either action above will cause the PTO to become
inoperable (timed out) for 10 seconds.
Should this occur, the PTO time out symbol will
appear in the dot matrix display and the amber
warning light will flash for 10 seconds.
Also the alarm will sound for 4 seconds for non-
critical faults.
During the 10 seconds when the PTO system has
timed out, avoid operating any of the PTO controls
as this may extend the duration of the timeout
period.
3 - 27
ATTACHING PTO-DRIVEN EQUIPMENT
! CAUTION !
Before attaching or detaching equipment or
changing the PTO stub shaft:
z Apply the parking brake fully.
z Ensure all gear levers are in neutral.
z Disengage the PTO (knob fully down) and wait

until the PTO and equipment stops. Switch off
the engine before getting off the tractor.
With the engine stopped, the PTO brake is released

and the stub shaft may be turned by hand to aid
implement shaft alignment.
Mount or hitch the equipment to the tractor as
outlined in THREE-POINT HITCH on page 3 - 86.
A plastic PTO cap (1) is supplied and should
always be installed over the stub shaft when the
PTO is not in use. Store this protective cap in the
tractor toolbox when using the PTO.
A lift-up PTO guard is fitted as standard. This also
serves as a support for driveline shields used with
PTO-driven equipment and provides for your safety.
Do not modify the guard.
181
Remove the “R” clip (1) from the locating pin and
slide the guard upwards to clear the pin. Lift the
guard to gain access to the PTO stub shaft.
A second locating pin allows the guard to be fixed
at 45° if required.
To connect PTO-driven equipment to the PTO stub
shaft, tilt the guard up for access.
NOTE: Tractors with slider type, vertically
adjustable drawbars have a lift-up PTO guard plate
fixed to the slider frame. See “Slider Frame
Drawbars” in Section 7.
182
3 - 28
Fasten the mounted equipment to the PTO stub

shaft and ensure that the locking pins (3) or or prop
shaft coupler detent balls engage in the groove in
the PTO stub shaft (2). If the coupler does not have
a locking arrangement, pin the coupler to the shaft.
Lower the lift-up guard and replace the “R” clip.
IMPORTANT: After attaching mounted equipment,

carefully raise and lower using Position Control and
check clearances and PTO shaft slide range and
articulation. When attaching trailed equipment,
ensure that the drawbar is correctly set.
PTO Operating Precautions
183
! WARNING !
Whenever operating PTO equipment, observe the
following precautions:
z Check that you are using the correct PTO

speed for the implement. Follow the
instructions in the equipment’s operator’s
manual.
z Ensure that the PTO guard is installed when

using PTO-driven equipment.
z Do not wear loose clothing when operating

PTO-driven equipment.
z Firmly apply the parking brake, place all

gearshift levers in neutral and block all four
wheels before operating any stationary PTO 184
equipment.
z Do not approach, clean or adjust PTO-driven

equipment while the tractor engine is still
running. Disengage the PTO (knob fully down)
and wait until the PTO and equipment stops.
Switch off the engine before getting off the
tractor.
z With the engine stopped, the PTO brake is

released and the stub shaft may be turned by
hand to aid the installation or removal of the
implement PTO shaft.
185
3 - 29
DUAL SPEED POWER TAKEOFFS

GENERAL
Generally speaking, PTO-driven equipment not Operating with Stationary PTO Equipment
having a high power requirement is designed to run
at 540 PTO rpm and will have a 6-spline female Before operating static PTO equipment, make sure
coupling. A PTO shaft speed of 540 rpm is obtained the tractor is safely positioned and the parking
at an engine speed of 1950 rpm. brake is applied. Sitting in the driver’s seat, engage
the PTO drive and, observing the instrument panel
Equipment having a high power requirement is display, set the appropriate speed.
designed to operate at 1000 PTO rpm and will be
provided with a 21-spline female coupling. With the NOTE: On tractors fitted with Constant Engine
21-spline stub shaft installed, run the engine at Speed, it may be prudent to use the CES function
2120 rpm to provide a PTO speed of 1000 rpm. to maintain a constant speed, if the load on the
Tractors with 2-speed 540E/1000 PTO have the PTO is subject to variations.
advantage of running low power 540 PTO-driven
equipment at a reduced engine speed by selecting If the driver leaves his seat, an alarm will sound for
540E on the lever. See page 3-31 for PTO and approximately 5 seconds and the amber warning
engine speeds. light will illuminate. If the alarm sound is a constant
tone, check to ensure the parking brake is firmly
applied.
IMPORTANT: Implements with a high power
requirement should be operated with the 1000 rpm
(21-spline shaft). If it is necessary to use the 6-
spline shaft (at 540 rpm.) to operate implements
having a power requirement of more than 75
horsepower, then it is strongly recommended that
the implement is fitted with a slip clutch to avoid
damage to the PTO stub shaft and other tractor
components.
NOTE: When required, change the PTO stub shaft
to suit the operation and equipment in use. This is
described under “Changing the PTO stub shaft” on
page 3 - 35.
3 - 30
TWO-SPEED PTO WITH CHANGEABLE STUB

SHAFT
A 6-spline PTO stub shaft of 34.9 mm (1.375 in.)
diameter is supplied, designed to operate at
540 rpm.
Dependent upon tractor specification, an
alternative 21-spline stub shaft of 34.9 mm
(1.375 in.) diameter, designed to operate at
1000 rpm may also be supplied with the tractor or is
available from your dealer.
A 20-spline stub shaft of 45.44 mm (1.75 in.)
diameter, designed to operate at 1000 rpm, is also
Operation
With the engine running at 1000 rpm or lower,
press the knob (1) and lift the collar (2) and knob up
to engage the PTO. The knob will remain up while
the PTO is engaged and the adjacent warning
light (3) will be illuminated.
NOTE: The light will be illuminated when the PTO
is engaged. If overspeeding of the PTO occurs
(PTO speed exceeds 630 rpm) the light will flash for
5 seconds, then remain steady. When the 1000 rpm
stub shaft is in use, the light may also flash (but
may be ignored) as PTO stub shaft speed passes
through the 630 rpm range. The light will flash
again at 1100 PTO rpm to indicate that 186
overspeeding has occurred in the 1000 rpm PTO
range.
Use the hand throttle to set the required engine/
PTO speed; the PTO speed can be displayed in (1).
PTO Speeds
540 @ 1950 rpm engine speed
1000 @ 2178 rpm engine speed
187
3 - 31
To disconnect PTO drive, reduce engine speed

and press the knob (1) firmly down to disengage
the PTO.
If it is necessary to dismount from the tractor,
ensure any PTO-driven equipment is allowed to
come to a complete stop before leaving the seat.
! DANGER !
To avoid inadvertent movement of the implement,
disengage the PTO after each use.
NOTE: If the engine is stopped, the PTO will not

operate when the engine is restarted until the PTO 188
knob is reset. Return the control knob manually to
the OFF position (by pressing the knob down) then
re-engage the PTO, as previously described.
IMPORTANT: An automatic PTO brake is installed

to stop stub shaft rotation quickly when the PTO is
disengaged. Avoid overstressing the PTO brake. 1
Always slow down the implement by reducing
engine speed before disengaging the PTO. This is
particularly important with implements having a
high inertia. Such implements should, ideally, be
equipped with an overrun clutch. To avoid damage
to the brake when operating high inertia
implements, depress and hold the top of the switch
(1) to disengage the brake and allow the implement
to come to rest naturally.
189
3 - 32
TWO-SPEED SHIFTABLE PTO

(540/1000 or 540E/1000)
A 6-spline PTO stub shaft of 34.9 mm (1.375 in.)
diameter is supplied, designed to operate at
540 rpm.
Dependent upon tractor specification, an
alternative 21-spline stub shaft of 34.9 mm
(1.375 in.) diameter, designed to operate at
1000 rpm may also be supplied with the tractor or is
A 20-spline stub shaft of 45.44 mm (1.75 in.)
diameter, designed to operate at 1000 rpm, is also
available from your CIH dealer.
Operation
Before engaging the PTO, select a PTO ratio, as
follows:
6-spline stub shaft
z With the tractor stationary and the PTO control

knob on OFF, select the required speed by
means of the range lever. Lift the spring-loaded
collar (2) beneath the knob (1) and move the
lever to engage 540, 540E or 1000 PTO
speeds.
IMPORTANT: The PTO range lever cannot be

moved until the spring-loaded collar beneath the
knob is lifted
21-spline stub shaft
190
z With the tractor stationary and the PTO control
knob on OFF, lift the spring-loaded collar (1)
beneath the knob (2) and move the lever fully to
the right. This will provide a PTO speed of
1000 rpm at 2178 engine rpm.
NOTE: The PTO range lever should always be in
the 1000 rpm position when the 21-spline stub shaft
is installed. If you only ever operate with a 21-spline
stub shaft, leave the range lever in this position.
191
3 - 33

the PTO is engaged and the adjacent warning light
(3) will be illuminated.
operate when the engine is restarted until the PTO
knob (1) is reset. Return the control knob manually
to the OFF position (by pressing the knob down)
then re-engage the PTO, as previously described.
192
With the PTO engaged gradually increase engine
rpm, until the required speed is displayed in (1).
Engine PTO shaft

Range Lever Position Speed Speed
(rpm) (rpm)
All the way back

(540, 6-spline) 1950 540
All the way back

(540E, 6-spline shaft) 1526 540E
193
All the way forward
(1000, 21-spline shaft) 2178 1000
NOTE: If overspeeding of the PTO occurs (e. as

PTO speed exceeds 630 rpm) the light (2) will flash
for 5 seconds, then remain steady. When the
1000 rpm stub shaft is in use, the light may also
flash (but may be ignored) as PTO stub shaft speed
passes through the 630 rpm range. The light will
flash again at 1100 PTO rpm to indicate that
overspeeding has occurred in the 1000 rpm
PTO range.
To disconnect PTO drive, reduce engine speed
and press the knob (1) firmly down to disengage
the PTO.
If it is necessary to dismount from the tractor,
ensure any PTO-driven equipment is allowed to 194
come to a complete stop before leaving the seat.
3 - 34
IMPORTANT: An automatic PTO brake is installed

to stop stub shaft rotation quickly when the PTO is
disengaged. Avoid overstressing the PTO brake. 1
Always slow down the implement by reducing
engine speed before disengaging the PTO. This is
particularly important with implements having a
high inertia. Such implements should, ideally, be
equipped with an overrun clutch. To avoid damage
to the brake when operating high inertia
implements, depress and hold the top of the
switch (1) to disengage the brake and allow the
implement to come to rest naturally.
195
! DANGER !
REPLACING THE PTO STUB SHAFT

Using a suitable tool, compress and remove the
circlip (1) from the PTO housing and carefully
withdraw the PTO stub shaft.
With the stub shaft removed, check the “O” ring
seal in the PTO housing for any damage. Replace
“O” ring if worn or damaged.
Thoroughly clean the replacement stub shaft before
inserting it into the housing. Replace the circlip,
ensuring it engages fully with the groove in the PTO
housing.
Protect the removed stub shaft by wrapping in a
clean cloth and place in the tool box.
196
3 - 35
Use of the Auto PTO (if installed)

The Auto PTO function provides automatic
engagement or disengagement of the rear PTO
drive when using the EDC Transport/Control
switch (1). Operating the switch to raise the
implement will automatically disengage the PTO
drive. Lowering the implement with the switch will
re-engage the PTO drive. 1
The height at which the PTO is engaged or
disengaged can be set using the following method.
IMPORTANT: The tractor must be stationary and
the PTO switched off before attempting this
procedure.
197
z With the engine running and the PTO switched
off, move the lift control to match the position of
the hitch.
z Depress and hold the PTO switch for

2 seconds. The central display will show “u”
followed by two figures, e. as “u38”.
The number 38 represents the current height of
the hitch.
z Raise the hitch to point at which the PTO is to

disengage. Depress the PTO switch once.
The central display will show “d xx” (where “xx”
is the current height of the hitch).
z Lower the hitch to the point where the PTO is to

re-engage and depress the PTO switch again.
The central display will show “End” for two
seconds and then return to the option selected
prior to entering set-up mode..
Providing the tractor is stationary and the PTO is
disengaged, this procedure can be carried out at
any time. The new settings will remain in the
memory until reprogrammed.
To activate the Auto function, engage the PTO as
previously described and then depress and hold
the switch (1) for more than one second. The Auto
PTO light on the instrument panel will illuminate to 1
confirm activation.
198
3 - 36
With the 3-point hitch in the lowered position and

the PTO engaged, the light will remain on. Raising
the implement will disconnect PTO drive and cause
the Auto light to flash. Lowering the implement will
re-engage the PTO drive; the Auto light will stop
flashing and remain on.
Depressing the Auto PTO switch again will
reactivate the function and the Auto light will go out.
NOTE: The Auto PTO function will be deactivated
every time the key start is switched off.
Auto PTO will be deactivated should one or more of
the following occur:
z The tractor speed is above 0.5 km/h (0.3 MPH)

with the 3-point hitch in the raised position for
more than 2 minutes.
z With the 3-point hitch raised, the tractor speed

falls below 0.5 km/h (0.3 MPH) or the tractor is
stationary for more than 10 seconds.
z If one of the external switches for PTO or

3-point hitch is operated.
z The PTO is switched off using the switch in the

cab or is switched off using the external
controls.
z The switch in the cab and the external switch

for operating the PTO are actuated at the same
time.
z Ground drive PTO is selected.
z The operator leaves the driver’s seat for more

than 2 minutes with Auto PTO activated and the
3-point hitch in the raised position.
To reactivate Auto PTO, clear the error and re-
engage the function as previously described.
3 - 37
EXTERNAL OPERATION OF THE PTO

(where fitted)
An optional, fender-mounted PTO switch (1) may
be installed on both rear fenders to aid alignment of
the stub shaft splines with equipment and facilitate
stationary PTO operations.
With the engine running, touch the switch
momentarily to cause the PTO stub shaft to index
round to align the splines. If the switch is pressed
for less than 5 seconds, the shaft will stop turning
when the switch is released.
Press and hold in the switch for more than
5 seconds and the PTO will operate continuously.
Depressing the switch again will stop the PTO
again. Alternatively, the PTO may also be stopped 199
by means of the in-cab controls, as previously
described.
NOTE: The warning light on the PTO control panel
will illuminate when the PTO is engaged,
momentarily or permanently.
NOTE: The PTO may be engaged or disengaged
from the fender switch, whether the in-cab control is
in the On or Off position.
NOTE: Almost simultaneous operation of in-cab
and external PTO controls (within two seconds) will
result in the corresponding symbol appearing in the
dot matrix display. In this case a 10 second delay
will occur before PTO operation.
NOTE: The soft start function will operate
irrespective of whether the PTO is engaged from
inside the cab or from a fender switch.
3 - 38
! CAUTION !
Before leaving the tractor to operate the external
PTO switches, the following preparations must be
made.
z Move all transmission controls to neutral.
z Disengage the PTO.
z Apply the parking brake.

With the engine running, move the hand throttle
lever to the bottom idle position (all the way back).
The operator must only activate the external PTO

switches (1) while standing to the side of the tractor
(outside next to the rear tyres). To avoid damage to
implement or tractor, operation of the in-cab and
external PTO switches should not be carried out
simultaneously.
! WARNING !
Before using the external Power Take Off switches,
ensure that no person or object is in the area of the
implement, 3-point hitch or PTO shaft.
Never operate the external controls while standing:
z Directly behind the tractor or tyres.

200
z Between the lower links.
z On or near the implement.
z Never extend arms, legs, any part of the body

or any object into the area near the 3-point
hitch, PTO stub shaft or implement while
operating the external switch.
z Never have an assistant working the opposite

set of controls.
z When moving to the opposite set of controls,

move around the tractor or implement.
z Do not cross between the implement and

tractor.
3 - 39
FRONT PTO AND THREE-POINT HITCH (where fitted)

Tractors with four wheel drive may be equipped
with an engine-driven PTO and front 3-point hitch.
These features are available as a factory installed
option or dealer installed accessory.
Front PTO
The front power take-off (PTO) transfers engine
power directly to front-mounted equipment via a
6-splined shaft. The PTO stub shaft rotates
anticlockwise (as viewed from the front).
NOTE: A 21-spline stub shaft is available as a
dealer installed accessory.
A plastic cap (1) is provided to protect the PTO stub
shaft when not in use.
NOTE: With the engine stopped, the PTO brake is
released and the stub shaft may be turned by hand
to aid implement shaft alignment.
The front PTO is electro-hydraulically operated and
is activated by a selector knob on the right-hand
console, similar to the rear PTO. 201
When tractors are fitted with the Auto PTO feature,
drive to the implement can be programmed to
disengage and re-engage as the front hitch is
raised and lowered.
An automatic “soft start” facility is provided to
permit easy start up of heavy, high inertia, PTO-
driven equipment.
Soft start modulates PTO clutch torque over the
first 5 seconds of engagement to provide a slower,
gradual take up of the drive.
NOTE: Soft start only operates at engine speeds of
1800 rpm and below. Above this speed, normal
PTO engagement will occur.
3 - 40

the PTO is engaged and the adjacent warning light
(1) will be illuminated. Using the accelerator pedal
or the throttle increase engine speed to 2100 rpm
until the P.T.O is turning at 1000 rpm. To disengage
the PTO, press the PTO control knob (2) down.
NOTE: If overspeeding of the PTO occurs, e. as
PTO speed exceeds 1100 rpm) the light (1) will
flash for 5 seconds, then remain steady.
Reduce engine speed to 2100 rpm.
operate when the engine is restarted until the PTO
knob (1) is reset. Return the control knob manually 202
to the OFF position (by pressing the knob down)
then re-engage the PTO, as previously described.
! DANGER !
PTO Switch Operation - Timeout

Engagement of the PTO control should be decisive
in its application as hesitant or incorrect operation
of the knob or collar may cause the PTO system to
time out.
Do not under any circumstances:
z Depress and hold the knob (1) for more than

10 seconds.
z Depress and hold the knob and lift the collar (2)
for more than 10 seconds without engaging
the PTO.
Either action above will cause the PTO to become
inoperable (timed out) for 10 seconds.
3 - 41
Should this occur, the PTO time out symbol will

appear in the dot matrix display and the amber
warning light will flash for 10 seconds.
Also the alarm will sound for 4 seconds for non-
critical faults.
During the 10 seconds when the PTO system has
timed out, avoid operating any of the PTO controls
as this may extend the duration of the timeout
period.
203
Use of the Auto PTO (if installed)
The Auto PTO function will automatically disengage
and re-engage front PTO drive when raising and
lowering the front hitch.
Auto PTO can be used in conjunction with the front
hitch height limiter. Raising the hitch will cause PTO 1
drive to be disengaged at a predetermined point
and the hitch to continue lifting until it reaches the
maximum height setting.
The height at which the PTO is engaged or
disengaged can be set using the following method.
IMPORTANT: The tractor must be stationary and

the PTO switched off before attempting this
procedure. 204
z Depress and hold the Auto PTO switch (1) for

2 seconds. The central display will show “Fu”
followed by two figures, e. as “Fu38”.
The number 38 represents the current height of
the hitch.
3 - 42
z Raise the hitch to point at which the PTO is to

disengage. Depress the Auto PTO switch once,
the central display will show “Fd xx” (where “xx”
is the current height of the hitch).
z Lower the hitch to the point where the PTO is to

re-engage and depress the Auto PTO switch
again. The central display will show “End” for
two seconds and then return to the option
selected prior to entering set-up mode.
Providing the tractor is stationary and the PTO is
disengaged, this procedure can be carried out at
any time. The new settings will remain in the
memory until reprogrammed.
To activate this Auto function, engage the PTO as
previously described and then depress and hold
the Auto PTO switch for more than one second.
The Auto front PTO light on the instrument panel
will illuminate to confirm activation.
With the front 3-point hitch in the lowered position
and the PTO engaged, the Auto light will remain on.
Raising the implement will disconnect PTO drive
and cause the Auto light to flash. Lowering the
implement will re-engage the PTO drive; the Auto
light will stop flashing and remain on.
Depressing the front Auto PTO switch again
will deactivate the function and the Auto light will
go out.
205
3 - 43

Auto PTO will be deactivated should one or more of
the following occur:
z The tractor speed is above 0.5 km/h (0.3 MPH)

with the 3-point hitch in the raised position for
more than 2 minutes.
z With the 3-point hitch raised, the tractor speed

falls below 0.5 km/h (0.3 MPH), or the tractor is
stationary for more than 10 seconds.
z The PTO is deactivated.
z The operator leaves the driver’s seat for more

than 2 minutes with Auto PTO activated and the
3-point hitch in the raised position.
To reactivate Auto PTO, clear the error and re-
engage the function as previously described.
3 - 44
FRONT THREE-POINT HITCH (where fitted)

The optional front hitch, consists of an adjustable
top link (1) and a pair of folding lower links (2).
The top link and the lower links have open claw
ends that permit rapid coupling and uncoupling of
implements. The claws are equipped with self-
locking latches to ensure positive connection
between the 3-point hitch and the implement.
206
The front hitch can be operated by a rear or mid-
mounted remote valve (where fitted). The height of
the hitch (1) can be shown in the dot matrix display
as a percentage (%) ranging from 0 (fully lowered)
to 100 (fully raised).
207
Three ball-bushings are supplied for installation on
the implement, if required. The ball-bushing with
projecting lips (1) should be installed on the
implement upper hitch pin. The two plain ball-
bushings (3) with their detachable guides (2) should
be installed on the implement lower hitch pins.
208
3 - 45
Operating the Front Hitch

The front hitch may be operated by mechanical rear
remote valves, electronic rear remote valves or,
where fitted, electronic mid-mount remote valves.
A height limit control permits the operator to set a
pre-determined limit on the maximum lift height of
the hitch.
Setting the Height of the Front Hitch

Height limit control is provided by a rotary knob (1)
on the right-hand console. Turn fully clockwise for
maximum height. Turn anti-clockwise to reduce the
height. The height setting will be shown in the Dot
Matrix Display as a percentage (%) between 0 (fully
lowered) and 100 (full raise).
Turn the control fully anti-clockwise to disable the 1
height limit function.
NOTE: The height limit setting may be affected by
the oil flow through the system. If the height limit is
initially set at a low engine/hydraulic pump speed, it
may change if the engine speed is increased to a
higher setting.
209
On tractors equipped with both mid and rear
mounted electronic valves:
Mit dem joystick can be used to control the front
hitch using the electronic rear remote valves or,
where fitted, the mid-mount remote valves.
Where a front hitch is supplied as a factory option,
electronic mid-mount remote valve F1 will be used 1
to operate the hitch. To operate the hitch move the
joystick longitudinally.
On tractors equipped with both mid and rear
mounted electronic valves, the joystick can be used
to control either valve pack. A selector switch on
the armrest (1) allows the operator to switch
joystick control between the rear (2) and mid-mount
remote valve pack (1).
NOTE: Switching the joystick from mid-mount to
rear valve operation will automatically suspend 210
lever operation of the rear remote valves.
IMPORTANT: Before switching joystick operation
between mid and rear valve packs or vice versa,
ensure all remote valves are in the neutral position.
3 - 46
At key-on, the joystick indicator lamps will start to

flash but the joystick will remain disabled. To 3
activate the joystick the operator must be in the
seat and the tractor engine running for a minimum
of five seconds. Once activated, the mid-mount
valve indicator lamp (3) will stop flashing and
remain illuminated.
NOTE: Operation of the joystick will be disabled if
the operator leaves the seat or the tractor engine is
stopped.
211
Where it is required to operate the front hitch using
the rear remote valves and joystick, depress the
bottom of the selector switch (2). The front indicator
lamp will go out and the rear remote valve indicator
lamp will start to flash.
After five seconds the rear indicator lamp will stop 2
flashing and will remain on, confirming joystick
control of the rear remote valves has been
activated.
Operation of the front hitch may now be controlled
by the joystick through the rear remote valves.
NOTE: The mid-mount indicator lamp will flash
even where mid-mount valves are not fitted.
212
For operation of rear and mid mount remote valves, F
see 3 - 71. L
Move the joystick rearwards (R) to raise the
N
implement. When the front hitch reaches the
position set by the height limit control the hitch will
stop. R
Pushing the joystick forward to the “lower” position

(L) will cause the implement to lower to the ground
at a controlled rate of descent.
Further forward movement of the joystick will select
“float” (F) which will allow the implement to lower
under its own weight. Float can also be used to let
the hitch lift cylinder extend or retract freely
allowing front mounted equipment to follow ground
contours.
213
NOTE: Always use the float position to lower a
single-acting cylinder. The “lower” position is for
double-acting cylinders only.
IMPORTANT: Always use lower and float positions
to operate a hydraulic motor. To stop the motor,
move the lever from the “lower” position to the
“float” position. The motor will then slow to a
gradual halt and not stop abruptly which may cause
internal damage to the motor.
3 - 47
The joystick may also be moved laterally, (R) and L

(L), to provide oil flow for equipment connected to N
the optional front couplers. R
By moving the joystick diagonally, two cylinders

may be operated simultaneously.
214
To switch control of the rear valves back, depress
the top of the selector switch (1), to activate the
mid-mount valves, the rear indicator lamp will go
out and the mid-mount indicator lamp will start to
flash. After two seconds the front lamp will stay on
confirming joystick operation has been switched
back to the mid-mount valves (where fitted).
215
3 - 48
Auxiliary Front Couplers (where fitted)

Two auxiliary couplers with 1/2 inch female
couplings may be fitted to the front of the hitch
frame. These will provide a double-acting hydraulic
service for equipment mounted on the front 3-point
hitch.
When operated by the joystick, lateral movement of
the lever (left or right) will provide pressurised oil at
the couplings. See page 3-47 for details.
NOTE: When the front couplers are not in use
always re-insert the protective plug into the coupler
to prevent dust or debris from entering the hydraulic
system.
216
3 - 49
Setting the Hitch Operating Mode

Located on the front of the hitch assembly, the two
selector levers (1) permit the front hitch to be
operated in single-acting mode, double-acting
mode, or to be set at a fixed height.
217
Position P1:
Upper lever horizontal, lower lever vertical.
Front hitch operates in single-acting mode being
hydraulically raised but lowered using weight of
implement.
Position P2:
Both levers horizontal.
Hitch operates in double-acting mode being
hydraulically raised and lowered. Operating in this
mode will provide additional penetration for ground
engaging equipment in hard soil conditions or when
using a front mounted scraper blade.
Lock Position:
Both levers vertical.
With the levers in this position, both lift cylinders are 218
hydraulically “locked” preventing movement of the
lower link arms. It is recommended this mode
should be selected when transporting front
mounted equipment on the highway.
3 - 50
EXTERNAL FRONT 3-POINT HITCH CONTROLS

(where fitted)
External raise and lower buttons are provided on
the left-hand side of the front hitch assembly.
Depress and hold the appropriate button to raise or
lower the hitch, release the button to halt
movement of the hitch.
! WARNING !
Do not stand on or near the implement or between
the implement and tractor when operating the
controls for the external front 3-point hitch.
NOTE: The external front 3-point hitch controls are

disabled when the operator is in the seat.
219
Before leaving the tractor to operate the external
controls:

! WARNING !
Before using the external front 3-point hitch
controls, ensure that no person or object is in the
area of the implement or 3-point hitch.
z Between the lower links or
z on or near the implement.
! WARNING !
Never extend arms, legs, any part of the body or
any object into the area near the front 3-point hitch
or implement while operating the external controls.
3 - 51
Transport Locks
When travelling on the highway, both mid-mount
and rear electronic remote valves can be disabled
to prevent inadvertent lowering of the front hitch
which may cause damage to the tractor or road
surface.
Electronic remote valves

To isolate rear or mid-mount remote valve
operation, depress the top of the switch on the cab
“C” pillar. The warning lamp on the remote valve
lever console will illuminate to confirm the valves
are disabled.
Switch positions:
top = remote valves enabled
central = EDC and remote valves

disabled 1
bottom = EDC and remote valves
enabled
220
To re-enable operation of the rear and mid-mount
remote valves, depress the top or bottom of the
switch.
3 - 52
Hitch Settings and Adjustments Transport

Position
The top link and lower links should be placed in the
transport position when not in use. Raise the top
link (1) to the vertical position and secure by sliding
the adjuster handle extensions (2) into the slots in
the support (3).
221
Each lower link pivots about the pin (2). This pin
should not be removed unless it is required to
remove the lower links. To raise the lower link,
extract the pin (3) from the support assembly and
raise the link (1) to the vertical position, as shown.
Re-insert the pin through the support when the
holes in the lower link and support are correctly
aligned. Before operating the tractor ensure both
pins are fully secured using the lock pins.
222
To convert to the working position, remove the lock
pins, pull out the pin (5) and manually lower the
lower link down to the operating position, as shown.
Re-install the pin in one of the holes (4) or (6), as
required and secure.
When installed in the rear hole (5), the lower link
will be locked as a rigid unit. If the pin is installed in
the front hole (6), the lower link will be allowed to
move up and down freely (float) through a range of
approx. 75 mm (3 in). Secure the pin using the lock
pins.
Repeat on the other lower link, ensuring that both
lower links are set up the same, i.e., both are
locked as rigid units or both are allowed to float.
223
3 - 53
NOTE: With the lower links pinned in the float

position, the left- and right-hand sides of the
implement can move up and down independently to
allow for operation on uneven surfaces. In addition,
the remote control valve float function will allow the
whole implement to move up or down as it passes
over uneven ground.
Coupling Implement to Tractor Tractor L

Start the engine. Move the joystick from neutral (N)
to lower (L) until the link arms are just clear of the N
ground. Position the tractor so that the open claw

ends are beneath the implement hitch pins.
224
Slowly move the joystick rearward to raise the
lower links until the claw couplers engage the ball-
bushings. An audible click will be heard as the self-
locking latches engage the ball-bushings on the
implement. The lift control should be returned to the
neutral position before the lower links start to lift the
implement from the ground.
IMPORTANT: Before operating the tractor, ensure

the release latches (1), are fully retracted into the
link end.
225
Attach the top link to the implement, adjusting to the
correct length by rotating the threaded centre
section (1) using the handles (2) as leverage. To
prevent the centre section from rotating while in
work, place the locking latch (3) over one of the
adjuster handles. The top link has a similar claw
end to the lower links. Lower the top link claw onto
the upper implement ball-bush and press down
until the latch is heard to engage.
The implement supports, where fitted, may now be
removed or retracted and the implement supported
on the front hitch.
226
3 - 54
Uncoupling Implement from Tractor

Using the joystick, lower the implement to the
ground, ensuring that it cannot fall when
disconnected from the front hitch. Use the
implement supports (where fitted).
Pull back the lever on the top link to release the
claw from the implement upper hitch pin.
Pull the ring (1) on both lower links fully rearwards.
The lever will lock in position with the latch
retracted. This will allow the links to clear the ball-
bushings on the implement lower hitch pins when
the links are lowered fully.
Fully lower the lower links using the joystick and
reverse the tractor clear of the implement.
227
3 - 55
ELECTRONIC DRAFT CONTROL (EDC)

The system described here is known as Electronic
Hitch Control. This electronically controlled
hydraulic system senses changes in the draft
loading via sensors in the lower link pins of the 3-
point hitch and changes in the position of the hitch
via a sensor on the cross shaft. The system
functions in Position Control or Draft Control.
Position Control provides accurate control of
implements, such as sprayers, rakes, graders, etc.,
that operate above the ground. Once implement
height has been set, the system will maintain the
selected position irrespective of any external forces
acting upon it.
Draft Control is designed for mounted or semi-
mounted implements operating in the ground.
Changes in soil resistance cause the draft loading
on the implement to increase or decrease.
Draft Control Draft control
Draft control sets the working depth in the soil by
maintaining a constant draft load. If the Position
Control knob (1), is set just below the normal Draft
Control working depth, it will prevent the implement 1
from “diving” or working too deep if an area of soft
or light soil is encountered.
228
Position Control will override draft control when the
Position Control lever is moved above the working
depth set by the draft loading wheel (2). Therefore,
the Position Control can be used to lift the
implement out of the ground, from the normal Draft
Control working depth, without changing the Draft
Control setting.
229
This function can be useful when a gradual lift out is
required. The thumbwheel stop can be set so that
the Position Control knob can be returned quickly to
a lower limit position just below the normal Draft
Control working depth.
The raise/lower switch would normally be used to
raise or lower an implement during a work cycle.
3 - 56
Console
The hitch position control knob (2), is used to set 1
implement height, when operating in Position
Control and maximum implement depth when
operating in Draft Control. 2
The adjustable stop (1) is used to provide a repeat
height or depth setting when used in conjunction
with the hitch Position Control.
The draft loading wheel (3), determines the draft
load and therefore implement working depth by
setting a force on the draft sensitivity pins. Rotate
fully anti-clockwise to provide maximum load and
therefore maximum implement depth.
230
The raise/lower switch (4) enables the operator to
rapidly raise the implement to the position set by
the height limit control and to lower the implement
back down to the working depth/height set by the
Position or Draft Controls, without disturbing the
settings. The switch also provides for faster ground
engagement, if required. For detailed information,
see text on page 3-64.
4
231
EDC CONTROL PANEL
The draft sensitivity control (7), is used to make the
system more sensitive or less sensitive to changes
in draft loading. Maximum sensitivity is obtained by
rotating the control fully clockwise.
The drop rate control, 6, adjusts the speed at which
the three-point hitch drops during the lowering
cycle. Position 1 selects the slowest drop and is
denoted by the tortoise symbol, position 7 provides
the fastest rate of drop.
The height limit control knob (5), limits the height to
which the hitch may be raised. Adjust this knob to
avoid the possibility of a large implement 3 5 6 7 8
damagingthe tractor when fully raised.
The slip limit control knob (8) is available only on 232
tractors with the optional radar sensor unit.
It enables the operator to select a wheel slip
threshold, above which the implement will raise
until wheel slip returns to the set level.
3 - 57
Indicator light panel

The malfunction warning light (4), serves two
purposes:
- Flashing light means that there is a malfunction
in the system circuits. This will be accompanied by
the hitch error symbol appearing in the Dot Matrix
Display.
- Steady light signifies `hitch disabled. Again, the
“hitch disabled” warning is repeated in the Dot
Matrix Display with the hitch symbol.
The indicator lights (1) and (2), operate when the
position control lever is used to raise or lower the
implement or as lift and lower corrections occur
during normal tractor operation. The lower light (3)
will illuminate when the 3-point hitch lowers. 233
The upper light (1) will illuminate when the hitch
raises.
The slip limit “on” indicator (3), will illuminate when
slip control is activated.
Hitch Position Display

The digital display in the instrument panel indicates
the position of the lower links (1) over a scale of “0”
to “100”. A display of “0” indicates that the links are
fully lowered. “100” indicates they are fully raised.
Select the display using the standard or Enhanced
keypad (where fitted).
234
Malfunction Warning Light
In the unlikely event that a fault occurs in the EHC,
the malfunction warning light (1, fig. 233).
The warning light will be accompanied by the
appearance of the hitch symbol (1), and error code
(2), in the Dot Matrix Display.
235
3 - 58
The code indicates the tractor circuit or sensor in

which the fault lies and the type of fault, as short
circuit, open circuit, sensor failure, etc. In this
event, the tractor will require the attention of your
authorised dealer.
A steady malfunction warning light signifies “hitch
disabled” which is repeated in the Dot Matrix
Display by the apperance of the hitch symbol (1)
and error code “1024” (2).
The “hitch disabled” warning light signifies that the
position control setting does not correspond to the
position of the lower links with the result that the
lower links cannot be raised or lowered using the
in-cab controls. The “hitch disabled” warning will
display if:
z The position control lever has been moved

while the engine is stopped.
z One of the external power lift switches has

been operated to raise or lower the the three- 236
point hitch. See “External Hydraulic Power Lift
Controls” on page 3 - 66.
To put the Position Control lever back into phase

with the lower links, place the raise/lower switch in
the central position and, with the engine running,
move the Position Control lever (1) slowly forward
or rearward, as required, until the position of the
lever matches the hitch height. The “hitch disabled” 1
warning light will go out and the hitch error symbol
will disappear from the Dot Matrix Display.
The 3-point hitch will now raise or lower normally.
237
3 - 59
PRE-OPERATION SETTINGS
Attach the implement to the 3-point hitch.
Turn the draft loading wheel (2) fully forward to
position 10 - this is the Position Control setting.
1
Start the engine and, using the position control
knob (1), raise the implement in stages, ensuring
that there is at least 100 mm (4 in.) clearance
between the implement and any part of the tractor.
Note the digital display reading on the instrument
panel. If the reading is less than “99” it means that
the implement is not fully raised.
238
Adjust the height limit control knob (3) to prevent
the hitch being raised further and so avoid the
possibility of the implement damaging the tractor
when fullyraised.
When the raise/lower switch or the Position Control
knob is used to raise the implement, it will only
raise to the height set by the height limit control, as
determined in the previous step.
Adjust the rate of drop, to suit the size and weight
of the attached implement, by rotating the drop rate
control knob (4). Turn the knob clockwise to speed
up the drop rate or anti-clockwise to slow down the
drop rate. 2 3 4
IMPORTANT: When first setting the implement up
for work, keep the drop rate control knob in the slow 239
drop position (“tortoise” symbol).
When the raise/lower switch is used to lower the
implement, it will lower at a controlled rate as
determined in the previous step.
3 - 60
DRAFT CONTROL OPERATION

To operate in Draft Control adjustment of several
controls is necessary to suit the implement and field
conditions.
The draft loading wheel (1), determines implement
depth by setting a required force on the draft
sensing pins. Set the wheel to the mid-position prior
to commencing work.
240
The position of the draft sensitivity knob (2),
determines the sensitivity of the system. Set the
knob to the mid-position before entering the field.
241
Drive the tractor into the field and lower the
implement into work by rotating the Position 4
Control knob (4), anti-clockwise. Use the Position
Control to set the maximum depth and so prevent
“diving” when areas of light soil are encountered.
Set the required implement working depth by 3
rotating the draft loading wheel (1).
Without moving the Position Control, rotate the
adjustable stop (3) until it “clicks” and the pointer
aligns with the index mark on the Position Control
knob. If the Position Control is now moved, it can
be quickly returned to the original position by
rotating until it is felt to “click” and the pointer re-
aligns with the adjustable stop.
242
3 - 61
Observe the implement as it pulls through the soil

and adjust the draft sensitivity knob (1), until the
tendency to raise or lower, due to variations in soil
resistance, is satisfactory. Once set, the tractor
hydraulic system will automatically adjust
implement depth to maintain an even pull (draft
load) on the tractor.
The optimum setting will be achieved by observing
the movement indicator lights (2) and (3).
The upper light (2) will illuminate every time the
system raises the implement as normal draft
corrections occur. The lower light (3) will illuminate
as the implement lowers.
5 1
243
Turn the draft sensitivity knob (1) slowly clockwise.
The system will respond with smaller, quicker
movements as will be seen by both the indicator
lights flickering. At this point, turn the knob slightly
anti-clockwise until either of the indicator lights
flashes once every 2 or 3 seconds or, as required,
to suit the soil conditions.
Once the required working conditions have been
established there is no need to move the position
control knob again until the work in hand is
completed.
244
Upon reaching the headland, momentarily depress
the top of the raise/lower switch (4), to quickly lift 4
the implement to the position set by the height limit
control knob. When re-entering the work area,
momentarily depress the lower part of the switch.
and the implement will descend at the rate set by
the drop rate control knob and stop when it reaches
the depth set by the draft loading wheel (5).
During the raise cycle, momentarily depressing the
top of the raise/lower switch will pause implement
lift. Depress the top of the switch again to resume
the cycle.
Depressing the lower part of the switch during the
lowering cycle will pause implement drop.
245
3 - 62
Faster implement penetration may be required, for

example, after turning at a narrow headland Also,
some implements are reluctant to penetrate,
particularly if the ground is heavy. Press and hold
the bottom of the raise/lower switch (4) and the
implement will lower at the rate set by the drop rate
control knob, until it contacts the ground. The drop
rate and the Position Control settings will then be
overridden and the implement will quickly penetrate
the ground, rising to the preset working depth when
the switch is released.
4
246
Alternatively, the adjustable stop (1) may be used to
set the implement depth. When the required 2
implement depth has been established, rotate the
adjustable stop until a “click” is felt and the pointer
aligns with the index mark on the Position Control
knob (2). Whenever the implement is raised, using 1
the Position Control, it will always return to the
same working depth when the control knob is
rotated and “clicked” into alignment with the
adjustable stop.
247
The slip limit control knob (1), available only on
tractors with the optional radar sensor unit enables
the operator to select a wheel slip threshold, above
which the implement will raise until wheel slip
returns to the set level. The system overrides the
normal Draft and Position Control sensing signals
of the hydraulics so care must be taken not to
select too low or too high a slip limit. Setting the slip
limit to a very low level, unobtainable in wet
conditions, may have a detrimental effect on the
work rate/depth.
248
The slip limit “on” indicator (2) will illuminate when
slip control is activated and the implement is raising
to restore the selected slip rate. The knob is
detented at the “off” position (knob fully clockwise).
249
3 - 63
POSITION CONTROL OPERATION

To operate in Position Control, the draft loading
wheel (3) should, ideally, be rotated fully forward to
position 10.
250
Use the Position Control knob (2) to raise and lower
the 3-point hitch. The implement will raise and stop 2
at the height set by the height limit control knob.
NOTE: The rate of lift will be adjusted automatically
If a large movement of the position control knob is
made then the lower links will respond by moving 1
rapidly. As the links approach the position set by
the Position Control knob, implement movement
will be slower.
When the implement is set at the required working
height, rotate the adjustable stop (1) until a “click” is
felt and the pointer aligns with the index mark on
the Position Control knob (2). Whenever the
implement height is changed, using the Position
Control knob, it can be quickly returned to the same 251
setting by rotating the Position Control knob until it
is felt to “click” into alignment with the adjustable
stop.
If it is required to raise the implement at the
headland, momentarily depress the top of the raise/ 4
lower switch (4), to lift the implement to the position
set by the height limit control knob. When re-
entering the work area, depress the lower part of the
switch and the implement will return to the height
originally set by the Position Control knob (2).
252
3 - 64
Transport lock
When transporting equipment on the 3-point hitch,
turn the drop rate control knob (2) fully anti-
clockwise to the transport lock position (padlock
symbol). This will prevent the implement from
accidentally lowering and damaging the road
surface.
RIDE CONTROL
When transporting equipment on the 3-point hitch,
implement bounce can lead to lack of steering
control at transport speeds. With Ride Control
selected, when the front wheels hit a bump,
causing the front of the tractor to rise, the hydraulic
system will immediately react to counter the
movement and minimise implement bounce to
provide a smoother ride.
To engage Ride Control, turn the draft sensitivity
knob (1) fully anti-clockwise. Using the raise/lower
switch (4), raise the implement to the height set by
the height limit control (3). 3 2 1
253
Turn the drop rate control knob (2) fully anti-
clockwise to the transport lock position (padlock 4
symbol).
Ride Control will only operate at speeds above
8 km/h (5 MPH). When tractor speed exceeds
8 km/h (5 MPH), the implement will drop by
4 - 5 points (as displayed on the instrument panel)
as the hydraulic system makes corrections to
counteract implement bounce. When tractor speed
falls below 8 Km/h (5 MPH) the implement will raise
again to the height set by the height limit control
and Ride Control will become inoperative.
254
3 - 65
EXTERNAL 3-POINT HITCH Controls

(where fitted)
Two external switches (1) are provided on each
rear fender assembly. Depress the upper switch to
raise the 3-point hitch, depressing the lower switch
will cause the hitch to drop.
! WARNING !
Do not stand on or near the implement or between
the implement and tractor when operating the
external hydraulic power lift controls.
Before leaving the tractor to operate the external 255

controls:
z Move all transmission controls to neutral.

! WARNING !
Before using the external 3-point hitch controls,
ensure that no person or object is in the area of the
implement or 3-point hitch.
z directly behind the tractor or tyres

or
z Between the lower links or
z on or near the implement.
! WARNING !
Never extend arms, legs, any part of the body or
any object into the area near the 3-point hitch or 256
implement while operating the external switch.
3 - 66
Never have an assistant working the opposite set of

controls. When moving to the opposite set of
controls, move around the tractor or implement.
Do not cross between the implement and tractor.
The operator must only activate the external
switches while standing to the side of the tractor
(outboard of the rear tyres).
Pressing the upper switch (1) will cause the hitch to

raise slowly. Pressing the lower part will cause the
linkage to lower. When the lower links align with the
implement, release the switch and attach the
implement to the 3-point hitch in the normal way.
To transfer control of the hydraulic power lift back to
the lift control lever, move the lift control lever fully
rearwards and push forward again, more slowly.
The “hitch enabled” symbol will display in the
instrument panel, indicating that the 3-point hitch is
in phase with the lift control lever (see page 3 - 59).
IMPORTANT: When control of the 3-point hitch is

transferred back to the lift control, an attached
implement may raise fully and damage the rear of
the cab. Operator’s should be aware of this and take 257
appropriate action to stop raising before full lift
height is reached. Adjust the height limit control
knob as described under Position Control Operation.
3 - 67
ELECTRO HYDRAULIC REMOTES

A maximum of 8 proportional remote valves (4 rear
and 4 mid-mount remote valves) may be fitted on
the tractor, all of them with float position and
continuously flow-controlled. Setting of the 4 rear
remote valves can be time-limited. All remote
valves are dual action. The rear remote valves are
fitted with a non-return valve at connection B
(bottom).
The electronic remote valves have a number of
additional automated features which are supported
by visual displays in the Dot Matrix screen
Transport lock
The remote valves cannot be operated unless the
system is energised using the transport lock
switch (1).
Switch positions:
top = remote valves enabled
central= EDC and remote valves

disabled
bottom = EDC and remote valves
enabled 1
When the transport lock is engaged (power off), the
amber warning light on the remote valve lever 258
console will illuminate and the valve(s) will be
disabled. To prevent inadvertent movement of the
implement when travelling between fields or on the
highway, it is recommended that EHR functions are
disabled.
IMPORTANT: The transport switch may also be

used to quickly stop operation of the rear remote
valves. Place the transport switch in the central
position to isolate remote valve operation, this has
no effect on three-point hitch operation.
3 - 68
Keypad for setting times for the rear remote

valves
1 Remote valve R1
2 Remote valve R2 1
3 Remote valve R3 2
4 Remote valve R4 3
4
259
Keypad for setting the flow rate for the mid and
rear remote valves
1 Remote valve R1 0-100%
1
2
3
5 Remote valve F1 0-100%
4
6 Remote valve F2 0-100%
7 Remote valve F3 0-100% 5
8 Remote valve F4 0-100% 8 6
7
260
3 - 69
USE AND OPERATION

Regulating the oil flow
The amount of hydraulic oil being supplied to

the remote services can be set continuously from
0-90 l/min.
The remote valves can be actuated indendently

from each other such that several remote services 1
can be supplied with various oil flows at various
pressures simultaneously.
The flow of oil to the remote valves is regulated as

follows:
Actuate the desired remote valve on the keypad (1).

Display for RAISE remote valve
Actuate a second time the desired remote valve on

the keypad (1).
Display for LOWER remote valve. 261
Visual Displays
Depress the remote valve key on the keypad and
the following information will be displayed in the
DMD for each valve:
1. Momentary oil flow from the valve. The shaded

area represents the percentage of oil flow, this
will change as the flow increases or decreases.
2. Maximum flow rate (%) as set by the operator.
The extend/retract directional arrows represent
the maximum flow setting.
3. Number of the remote valve in operation.
4. Direction of cylinder movement: extend (Raise)
or retract (Lower). 262
The direction of cylinder travel is identified by
the arrow.
Set the desired value using the scroller (1).
The flow that has been set can be read from the
ICU screen (as % of max.flow) and is automatically
shown approx. 5 seconds after the setting has been
made.
1
After approx. 10 seconds the screen will disappear
again.
263
3 - 70
Operating the remote valves
The electrical remote valves are operated using

keys on the AutoController and keys or levers on
the armrest.
If a remote valve is used by mistake, the pressure
which builds up between the non-return valve and
the coupling joint must be released again by
immediately switching to LOWER or FLOAT
POSITION.
NOTE: The hydraulics master on the right control
panel must be activated when operating all
electrical remote valves.
The remote valves F2 and R3 can be used for oil

motor operations.
CROSSGATE LEVER
Joystick function
Using the joystick the rear or mid-mount electronic
auxiliary valves can be energized as desired.
A selector switch on the armrest allows the
operator to switch joystick control between the
rear (2) and mid-mount remote valve pack (1). 2
NOTE: Switching the joystick from mid-mount to
rear valve operation will automatically suspend
lever operation of the rear remote valves. 1
IMPORTANT: Before switching joystick operation
between mid and rear valve packs or vice versa,
ensure both remote valve levers and joystick are in
the neutral position.
264
3 - 71
Operating 2 rear-mounted auxiliary valves

2 mid-mounted auxiliary valves: 3
Switch for the rear-mounted valves:
4
Moving the joystick (4) in a longitudinal direction for
remote control valve R1 and locking it in the float
position.
Moving the joystick (4) in a lateral direction for
remote control valve R2.
265
By pressing the shift button (2) located on the multi-
controller and simultaneously completely moving to 1
Lower the remote control valves are switched into
the Float position.
Exit the float position by moving the RAISE or
LOWER joystick (4) out of Neutral.
Remote control valve F1: Depress and hold the
black button (3) and move the joystick (4) forwards
or backwards to operate Raise, Neutral, Lower and 2
Float.
Remote valve F2: Depress and hold the black
button (3) and move the joystick (4) left or right to
operate Raise, Neutral and Lower. By pressing the
shift button (2) located on the multi-controller and 266
pressing the black button (3) while simultaneously
completely moving to Lower the remote control
valves are switched into the Float position.
Exit the float position by moving the black button (3)
and simultaneously moving the joystick out of
Neutral.
3 - 72
ACTUATOR LEVER
5
Actuator lever (6) for remote control valve R3 with

lock in the float position and lock in the RAISE
position. 6
2 buttons (5) (if equipped with these) on the joystick

for actuating front loader.
TOGGLE SWITCH located on the multi-

controller 267
The toggle switch (1) located on the multi-controller

belongs to remote valve R4 and R2 on 3 remote 1
valves.
If the toggle switch is moved to the right, the valve

cylinder comes out.
If the toggle switch is moved to the left, the valve
cylinder goes in.
By simultaneously moving the toggle switch (1),
LOWER position, and Shift button (2) (on the 2
reverse side of the multi-controller) the remote
valve R4 and R2 in can be brought into the float
position.
268
Exit the Float position by moving the RAISE or
LOWER toggle switch (1), the Float position will be
deactivated and the remote valve moves into the
Neutral setting.
NOTE: All remote valves (max. 6) which are able to
be operated via the switch for the rear can also be
transferred to the Headland Management Control.
3 - 73
Operating 4 mid-mounted remote valves

(if present):
Switch for the mid-mounted valves:
Remote valves F1: Move the joystick (4) forwards
or backwards to operate Raise, Neutral, Lower and
Float.
Remote valves F2: Move the joystick (4) forwards
or backwards to operate Raise, Neutral and Lower.
By pressing the shift button (2) located on the multi-
controller and simultaneously completely moving to
Lower the remote control valves are switched into
the Float position. 2
269
If remote valves no. 3 and no. 4 are mid-mounted
the joystick functions as follows.
Remote valves F3: Depress and hold the black 7
button (7) and move the joystick forwards or
backwards to operate Raise, Neutral, Lower and
Float.
4
Remote valves F4: Depress and hold the black
button (7) and move the joystick (4) left or right to
operate Raise, Neutral and Lower. By pressing the
shift button (2) located on the multi-controller and
pressing the black button (7) while simultaneously
completely moving to Lower the remote control
valves are switched into the Float position.
Exit the float position by moving the black button (7)
and simultaneously moving the joystick out of 270
Neutral.
3 - 74
Additional Displays
As each of the electronic remote valve functions
are selected, a corresponding visual display will
appear in the Dot Matrix Screen.
NOTE: The following illustrations relate to remote
valve no. 1, see page 3-79 for details on remote
valve numbering.
Number 1 remote valve lever in NEUTRAL position.
Number 1 remote valve operating at maximum flow set by the operator.

Illustration shows cylinder operating in RETRACT mode.
Number 1 remote valve lever in FLOAT position.
Motor mode selected on remote valve number 1.

LOWER and FLOAT positions only available.
Electro-hydraulic remote valve system switched OFF.

All remote valve functions deactivated.
Timer function blocked
Timer function unblocked
3 - 75
Carrying out a Time-controlled program

Timed programme operation is provided primarily
for operation of hydraulic cylinders. This feature
allows the operator to programme a time delay
between when the control levers are activated and
when the oil flow to the implement is stopped. 2
271
To operate the remote electro-hydraulic valves in
programed mode, depress the relevant section of
the timer button (2) as shown. When the button is
depressed, the green light (1) will start to flash. The
system is now in standby mode ready to accept a
programme sequence. The light will continue to
flash for ten seconds allowing the operator
sufficient time to begin the programming sequence. 1
If a programme is not started within this period, the
system will automatically de-activate. In such case
depress the timer control switch again to re-start
the sequence.
272
Programming a Double Acting Service
To programme the remote valves, first ensure the
cylinder hydraulic hoses are properly connected to
the appropriate rear remote valve. Start the tractor
engine and set at the normal operating speed in
which the cylinder is to be operated. This is
important as the programming of the control levers
is based on a time interval corresponding to the
time it takes the cylinder rod to extend and retract.
Any change in engine rpm will have an effect on
hydraulic flow and therefore the time taken for the
cylinder to extend and retract.
The timed period for control lever operation F
remains the same regardless of oil flow, therefore L
consistent operation is required for the system to
function correctly. Using the corresponding timer N
button (2) depress the switch so the light begins to
flash. While the light is flashing move control R
lever (3) to extend the cylinder (R). At this point the
light stops flashing and will remain lit.
Hold the lever until the cylinder is extended to the
1 3
desired position and then return the lever to the
neutral position. When the lever is returned to the
neutral position the programming light will begin to
flash again indicating the retract phase of the cycle
should now be programmed.
273
3 - 76
Move the joystick (3), to retract the cylinder (L); the F

programming light will cease to flash and remains L
on. Hold the lever until the cylinder has completed
the retract cycle and then return to the neutral N
position. After the second phase has been
programmed the light will remain on. R
After the second phase has been completed and
the lever has been returned to neutral, the 1 3
programme will be automatically stored.
Repeat the above sequence to programme the
remaining control levers if required.
Programming of the control lever can be performed
in either sequence, extend/retract, retract/extend or
for one movement only, extend or retract.
The maximum allowable time span for any timed
operation is 30 seconds. 274
NOTE: Turning the keystart switch OFF will erase

the programme.
Programming a Single Acting Service
To programme a single acting service carry out the
same set-up procedure as previously described for
N
a double acting service.
With the programme light flashing, move the R
remote valve lever from neutral to the extend
position (R). When the cylinder has extended to the 3
desired position, manually return the lever to the 1
neutral position. To store the setting, depress the
timer switch. In single acting mode the sequence
will NOT be automatically stored.
A single acting service can be programmed to
operate in either extend or retract modes.
NOTE: When using a timed sequence for a single
acting service i.e. programmed in extend mode 275
only, the retract mode will not function until the
programme sequence has been deleted.
If the control lever is moved to the float position no
timed programme is possible and the control lever
must be returned to neutral manually.
3 - 77
Setting Remote Valve Priority

A remote valve with oil flow priority will always take
precedence over other remote valves for hydraulic
oil flow. Irrespective of flow demand by the other
valves, the priority valve will always maintain a
constant output.
For implements requiring multiple remote valve
services, there may be a need for one of the valves
to have oil flow priority, i. as to provide oil flow for a
hydraulic motor.
With electronic remote valves, the operator can
select one remote valve as the priority valve.
276
z Turn the key-start to the ON position. Depress
and hold the Menu/Enter key (4, Figure 276)
until the central LCD display reads Ehrx (where
“x” is the current priority valve number).
NOTE: If a dash (-) appears in the display, the
remote valves are not prioritised.
z After a few seconds the LCD display will

change to read PEhr.
z Momentarily depress the EHR remote valve key

(1, Figure 277), to select the valve required for
prioritisation. Depressing the key repeatedly will
scroll through the valve numbers. 277
z When the desired valve number is shown in

the display, depress the Exit/Cancel key
(2, Figure 276), to exit set-up and return to the
previous display. The valve priority setting is
now memorised.
3 - 78
Replaying a Timed Programme Relieving System Pressure

The timed sequence begins as soon as the lever is
placed in the extend or retract detent position.
On reaching the end of the timed period, oil flowing ! WARNING !
through the remote valve will be halted. The remote
valve lever should now be returned to the neutral Before connecting or disconnecting hydraulic
hoses at the remote cylinders, relieve the pressure
position ready for the next operation. Throughout in the circuit by first starting the engine and then
the replay sequence, the green warning light will
remain illuminated. move the control levers fully forward to the “float”
position. Then stop the engine. Make sure no one
Deleting Programmes will be injured by moving equipment when relieving
To delete a programme, depress the programme pressure in the system. Before disconnecting
cylinders or equipment, make sure the equipment
switch to deactivate timer operation. The light will or implement is supported securely.
extinguish and the memorised sequence will be
cleared from the programme in the memory. Never work under equipment supported by a
Recalling a Stored Programme hydraulic device because it may drop if the control
is actuated (even with the engine stopped) or in the
With the key-start on and all remote valve levers in event of hose failure, etc. Always use a secure
neutral, hold down the timer switch for the EHR support for equipment which must be serviced
required. Keep the timer switch depressed until the while in the raised position. Make sure that oil
light ceases to flash. The previously stored timer contained within the remote cylinders is clean and
sequence is now re-activated. is of the correct grade.

Operating with Headland Management Control
programme settings made during tractor operation (where fitted)
main memory. To provide sufficient time for the data IMPORTANT: When including electro hydraulic
to transfer, allow a minimum of five seconds delay remote valve operation in a Headland Turn
before turning the key on again. Sequence, it is important to allow sufficient time for
the movement of the control lever to be recorded as
it passes through each position (R, N, L, F or vice
versa). Pausing the lever in each position for
approximately 1/2 second will provide sufficient
time for the step to be recorded accurately. Moving
the lever too quickly may confuse data transfer.
This can cause the implement to respond
incorrectly on play-back.
3 - 79
Connecting Single-Acting Cylinders F

Connect the hose from a single-acting cylinder to L
the lower coupler on the remote control valve, as
N
previously described.
R
To extend a single-acting cylinder, pull the control
lever back to the extend position (R).
Manually return the lever to the neutral position to

stop the cylinder when it has reached the desired
position.
To retract a single-acting cylinder, move the lever

fully forward to the float (F) position. 278
NOTE: In single acting timer mode the remote lever

will lock in the extend position and will not
automatically return to the neutral position.
IMPORTANT: Always use the “float” position to

retract (lower) a single-acting cylinder. The “lower”
position is for double-acting cylinders only.
Connecting double- Acting cylinders

Connect the feed hose (1) from a double-acting
cylinder to the lower coupler (3) on the remote
control valve. Connect the return hose (2) to the
upper coupler (4) on the same valve.
To extend a single-acting cylinder, pull the control

lever rearwards, to the “raise” position
To retract a double-acting cylinder, push the control
lever forward, past neutral to the “lower” position.
Further forward movement of the lever will select
“float” (F) which will allow the cylinder to extend or
retract freely. This feature is of material assistance
when carrying out work with equipment such as
scraper blades and loaders. 279
3 - 80
Operating hydraulic Continuous Flow Hydraulic

Equipment
Continuous flow hydraulic equipment (e. as
hydraulic motors) should be connected to the
remote control valve coupler with the feed hose (1)
connected to the upper coupler (4) and the return
hose (2) connected to the lower coupler (3) of the
same valve. Alternatively, the return hose may
connected to the low pressure return circuit (see
page 3-91, “Return Oil Line”).
The oil flow should be adjusted to regulate the
motor speed. If the flow is too high, the 3-point hitch
and other remote valves may slow down or stop.
Controlling the flow in this way will ensure that the
hydraulic system will only supply the oil required by
the motor. 280
Operating using remote valve R3
Latch into RAISE
Deactivate by switching through to the float position
or Controlled deceleration of the appliance down to
neutral. F
L
Operating using remote valve F2 N
R
Move to RAISE or LOWER. Depress the hydraulic
motor switch simultaneously.
Deactivate by switching through to the float
position. By pressing the shift button (2) located on
the multi-controller and simultaneously completely
moving to Lower the remote control valves are
switched into the Float position.
281
IMPORTANT: When operating continuous flow
equipment, the remote control valve lever must not
be moved to the neutral (N) or Raise (R) positions
as damage to the equipment may result. Switching
off the hydraulic motor switch when the appliance is
running will immediately bring the remote valves to
Neutral (N).
Observe the following to further protect the tractor
and equipment.
z Do not open any bypass valve in the equipment

or motor. Adjust the oil flow through the valve to
regulate the rate of flow or speed of the motor.
z To ensure optimum hydraulic oil cooling,

operate continuous flow equipment at the
highest flow setting and lowest engine speed
that will give the required machine performance
and speed.
3 - 81
Simultaneous Operating Several Remote Valves

or Remote Valves and Hydraulic Lift
If operating two or more remote control valves
simultaneously or more remote control valves
simultaneously or remote valves and the hydraulic
lift, the flow through the valves should be adjusted
using the enhanced keypad to provide a partial
flow, as previously described. If not so adjusted, all
the available flow may be directed to the full flow
circuit when the pressure in that circuit is less than
that of the other circuits in use.
NOTE: For equipment using more than one remote
valve, the hydraulic service with the highest priority
should be connected to the valve that has been set
to provide oil flow priority (see page 3 - 78). 282
Bleeding Remote Cylinders

When connecting a cylinder with trapped air, i.e., a
new cylinder, one that has been out of service or
one that has had the hoses disconnected, it will be
necessary to bleed the cylinder to remove the air.
With the hoses connected to the remote control
valve couplers at the rear of the tractor, position the
cylinder with the hose end uppermost and extend
and retract the cylinder seven or eight times using
the remote control valve operating lever.
Check the rear axle oil level before and after
operating a remote cylinder.
3 - 82
CONTINUOUS OIL SUPPLY for REMOTE

SERVICES (where fitted)
For implements or attachments requiring
continuous or high oil flow from the tractor hydraulic
system, provision is made to connect directly into
the main hydraulic circuit at the rear of the tractor.
To operate correctly the implement must be fitted
with a closed centre hydraulic valve system that
will, through a sensing line, control oil flow from the
main tractor hydraulic pump.
IMPORTANT: To ensure correct operation of the

system, the implement control valve, when in
neutral, must be capable of directing the pressure
from the sensing line back to sump through the
return line to the tractor.
IMPORTANT: Before attempting to remove any

blanking plugs or attach pipework, ensure the
areas around the plugs and pipe connections are
thoroughly clean to prevent contamination of the
tractor hydraulic system.
NOTE: Ensure the hoses have a suitable capacity
to accommodate the required oil flow. Ensure also
that both the sensing line and hoses are sufficiently
long enough to allow for implement movement or
articulation when in work.
Power Beyond Ports

P - Pressure Line (1)
To connect the implement pressure line, remove
the plug (1) from the external services “power
beyond” port on top of the remote valve manifold.
Using a suitable connector, M22 x 1.5/15.5
(ISO 6149), attach the implement supply line to this
port. With the implement control valve in neutral, a
low standby pressure of 21 to 24 bar (305 to
348 lbf. in.) will be maintained in the pressure line
connected to this port.
283
3 - 83
LS - Load Sensing Line (2)

Connect the sensing line from the M12 x 1.5/11.5
(ISO 6149) port (2), to the implement control valve.
It is the sensing line which generates and controls
the oil pressure and flow from the tractor hydraulic
pump. When an implement control valve is
operated, the low standby pressure from port “P”, is
diverted down the sensing line to “switch on” the
tractor hydraulic pump. In operation, the load
sensing line constantly monitors pressure and flow
to ensure supply never exceeds demand.
NOTE: Tractors with solenoid operated hydraulic
top link and right hand lift rod will have a “T” piece
in port (2). Remove the cap from the “T” piece and
connect the sensing line in place of the cap. Use a 284
9/16 -18, “O” ring face seal fitting which complies to
standards ISO 8434-3 or SAE J1453. Do not
overtighten the connector.
R - Return Oil Line (3)
The return oil line from the implement control
valves should be connected to the M27 x 2/19
(ISO 6149) port (3). This will permit the oil to return
directly back into the tractor hydraulic system.
ISO Power Beyond Couplings
The ISO coupling consists of three ports.
1. Return oil line. Coupling size: 25 port size:
M30 x 2/19
2. Oil supply (pressure) port. Coupling size:
19 port size: M27 x 2/19
3. Load sensing port. Coupling size: 6.3 port size:
M14 x 1.5/11.5
The maximum flow available through the ISO

pressure port will depend on the output from the
tractor hydraulic pump. Full flow will be available
from a 120 litre pump assuming there are no other 285
hydraulic demands on the system.
With the high capacity pump, up to 140 litre/min is
available.
IMPORTANT: Always relieve hydraulic pressure in

remote cylinders before connecting or disconnect-
ing hydraulic hoses.
3 - 84
Rear Axle/Hydraulics Oil Level when using

Remote Hydraulic Equipment
When checking the rear axle oil level, it is good
! WARNING !
practice to ensure that the oil is up to the full mark Hydraulic fluid or diesel oil escaping under
on the dipstick with the tractor parked on level pressure can penetrate the skin causing serious
ground and the three-point linkage in the fully injury.
raised position. However, when connecting
auxiliary equipment to the remote control valves it z Do not use your hands to search for leaks.
should be remembered that the equipment utilises Use a piece of cardboard or paper to search for
oil from the rear axle and could seriously lower the leaks.
oil level. Operating the tractor with a low oil level
may result in damage to the rear axle and
transmission components. z Stop the engine and relieve pressure before
connecting or disconnecting lines by moving
NOTE: Before connecting remote cylinders, stop
the remote control valve lever(s) fully forward to
the engine and thoroughly clean the connections to
the “float” position then back to neutral.
prevent oil contamination.
With the rear axle oil level up to the full mark on the z Tighten all connections before starting the
dipstick, the following maximum oil volumes may engine or pressurising lines.
be taken from the rear axle to power auxiliary
equipment without the need to top up the system: If any fluid is injected into the skin, obtain medical
Operating stationary equipment 21 litres attention immediately or gangrene may result.
on level ground 22.1 U.S. qts
Operating while driving
in normal 15 litres
conditions (flat fields) for ! WARNING !
15.8 U.S. qts and for short periods only Never work under or allow anyone near raised
Operating in other 9 litres equipment as it will drop when relieving pressure in
conditions, including 9.5 U.S. qts the system or in the event of hose failure, etc.
longer periods of use Before disconnecting cylinders or equipment
ensure the equipment or implement is supported
Conversely, the maximum amount of oil that may securely. Always use a secure support for
be added to the rear axle above the normal FULL equipment which must be serviced while in the
level is 7 litres (7.3 U.S. qts). With this quantity raised position.
added to the rear axle, the quantities stated above
may be increased by the same amount, 7 litres
(7.3 U.S qts).
3 - 85
THREE-POINT HITCH
NOTE: Before attaching equipment read the
following text carefully.
Description
The 3-point hitch enables semi-mounted and fully
mounted implements to be connected to the tractor,
operated and controlled by the tractor hydraulic
system. Flexible or Quick Hitch link ends (3) are
available to aid implement connection.
The lower links are raised and lowered by means of
the lift rods (2) connected to the lift arms. The lift
rods may be readily adjusted to aid proper
alignment of the implement to the tractor.
The top link (1) is connected to a bracket on the
rear axle centre housing. The rear of the top link
should be connected to the upper hitch pin of a 286
mounted implement. The top link is also adjustable
to aid implement alignment.
ATTACHING 3-POINT EQUIPMENT
NOTE: Before attaching equipment, adjust lift rods
and select the correct top link hole for the
implement and work to be carried out.
Ensure that the telescopic stabilisers or sway
blocks are installed and correctly adjusted. Remove
the swinging drawbar if close-mounted equipment
is being attached.
IMPORTANT: Always select Position Control or set

the draft loading wheel to position 10 when
attaching equipment, transporting equipment, when
no equipment is attached or at any time when not
operating in Draft Control.
NOTE: See also “External Power Lift Control” on
page 3 - 66 for more details.
3 - 86
Most equipment can be attached to your tractor as IMPLEMENT TO CAB CLEARANCE

follows:
1. Position the tractor so that the lower link hitch ! CAUTION !

points are level with and slightly ahead of the
implement hitch pins. Some mounted and semi-mounted equipment may
interfere with or damage the cab. You may be
2. Attach the implement to the lower links, as injured by broken glass or the cab ROPS may be
described in “Flexible Link Ends” on page 3 - 91 damaged if equipment interferes with the cab.
or “Quick Hitch” on page 3 - 92.
To prevent cab damage, proceed as follows:
! CAUTION ! z Attach the equipment as outlined previously.

Engage the parking brake before leaving the tractor
to make the connections. It is essential to have the z Check for adequate clearance by slowly raising
engine running to operate the external fender- the equipment with the lift control lever. If any
mounted switches when making lower link part of the equipment comes closer than 100
connections. If your tractor does not have these
switches or when making other connections, stop mm (4 in.) to the cab, adjust the 3-point hitch
the engine. height limit control knob (page 3 - 60) to limit
upward movement.
When removing equipment, the procedure is the
IMPORTANT: Before transporting or operating reverse of attaching. The following information will
equipment, ensure that the flexible link ends (where make disconnection easier and safer.
fitted) are locked in the operating position.
3. With the engine stopped and parking brake z Always park the equipment on a firm, level
engaged, adjust the top link until the implement surface.
mast pin can be inserted through the mast and
top link. Ensure sufficient thread remains in the z Support equipment so that it will not tip or fall
adjuster tube to prevent the threaded ends from when detached from the tractor.
pulling out under load.
z Always relieve all hydraulic pressure in remote
4. Connect remote equipment, where applicable.
cylinders by selecting the float position before
5. After attaching implement and before actual disconnecting.
operation check that:
When attaching mounted equipment to the three-
point hitch, the following adjustments may be made
z no interference occurs with tractor components.
to ensure satisfactory operation:
z the top link does not contact the PTO guard
with the implement at its lowest position.
IMPORTANT: Before operating PTO driven
equipment, check to make sure that the PTO
driveline will not over-extend so as to become
disengaged, bottom out or be at an excessive
angle. Ensure that the driveline shield does not
contact the PTO guard or drawbar. See section
“Attaching PTO Driven Equipment” on pages 3-28.
IMPORTANT: When attaching mounted or semi-

mounted equipment to the 3-point hitch or when
attaching trailed equipment to the drawbar or hitch,
ensure that there is adequate clearance between
the implement and the tractor. Semi-mounted or
trailed equipment may interfere with the tractor rear
tyres. Adjust the steering stops (four wheel drive
only), sway blocks or stabilisers.
3 - 87
LIFT RODS, LOWER LINKS AND TOP LINK

(mechanical adjust)
! CAUTION !
Before attempting to disconnect or adjust the lift
rods or top link, lower attached equipment to the
ground and stop the engine. Before removing any
securing pins, ensure that attached equipment is
correctly supported and that no residual pressure
remains in the hydraulic system.
Electronic Draft Control
Before stopping the engine, move the Position
Control lever fully down in order to remove residual
pressure.
When adjusting lift rods, ensure that at least 40 mm
(1.6 in.) of thread remains engaged in the lower
end of the lift rod assembly.
Top Link Adjustment

The top link has a threaded centre section (1),
which, when rotated, will shorten or lengthen the
top link, as required. Lift up the spring retainer (2) to
allow the centre section to rotate. To ease
adjustment, lift the handle (3) and use it as a lever.
Alternatively, rotating the link end (4) will permit
limited adjustment of top link length.
To lock the sleeve after adjustment, push the spring
retainer down so that it holds the handle (3) flush
against the sleeve.
287
When not in use, the top link can be removed and
stored in the tractor or left in an upright position and
retained by hooking the ball end of the handle (2)
into the bracket (1) on the rear axle housing
288
3 - 88
Lift rod adjustment

The lift rods are adjusted by rotating the upper part
of the lift rod by means of the handle (1) on the
turnbuckle.
Before the turnbuckle can be rotated, it is
necessary to lift the turnbuckle (1) to disengage it
from the lock (2) (Figure 290) on the lower section
of the lift rod. Rotate the turnbuckle to lengthen or
shorten the lift rod assembly.
289
When adjustment is satisfactory, allow the
turnbuckle to lower into position. Ensure that the
turnbuckle is fully down and engaged with the lock
to prevent unintentional rotation.
Each lower link has two holes for attaching the lift
rods. Attach the lift rods to the front hole (nearest
the tractor) for maximum lift height. Use the rear
hole for maximum lift capacity.
290
Hitch Float
Remove the lower link retaining clip and lock
plate (1). Withdraw the pin (2) from the lift rod to
permit the outer lock plate to be rotated into the
vertical position. Replace the pin, inner lock plate
and retaining clip as shown. The hitch is now in the
float position.

coupling trailed equipment to the drawbar or
automatic pick-up hitch, ensure that there is
adequate clearance between the implement and
the cab or rear window in any open position.
291
3 - 89
TOP LINK AND RIGHT-HAND LIFT ROD

(hydraulic adjust)
The hydraulic adjust top link (1) is available for your
tractor. This may be fitted in conjunction with a
hydraulic adjust right-hand lift rod (2). Both the top
link and the lift rod incorporate a double-acting ram
cylinder connected into the tractor hydraulic
system.
292
Electronic Operation
Two switches located on the cab “C” pillar operate
the hydraulic top link and right-hand lift rod. Both
switches are spring centered and will return to the
neutral position when released.
Depress and hold the top of the left-hand switch (1)
to retract the top link, depress the bottom of the
switch to extend the link. 1 2
Depressing the top of the right-hand switch (2) will
retract the hydraulic cylinder and raise the link arm,
depress the bottom of the switch to extend the
cylinder and lower the link arm.
Automatic check valves on the top link and lift rod
cylinders will prevent them from “creeping”.
293
3 - 90
HYDRAULIC LIFT ROCKER

(All models)
Two holes are provided in the bracket for
attachment of the top link.
Insert the pin (2) through the upper hole, as shown,
for maximum lift capacity and the greatest
implement to cab clearance. Use the lower hole (3)
for the best ground penetration and greatest
implement to ground clearance (when the
implement is raised).
To relocate the top link, pull out the “R” clip (1) and
extract the securing pin. Relocate the top link and
pin, as required, ensuring that the tang on the end
of the securing pin handle locates in the other hole.
NOTE: If your tractor is equipped with an automatic 294
pick-up hitch, the pin may foul the hitch lift rods
during removal. If necessary, use hydraulic power
to move the hitch lift rods to permit removal of the
top link securing pin.
FLEXIBLE LINK ENDS (where fitted)
A release ring (1) is provided on the upper surface
of each link end. Pull up the ring to release the latch
and slide the link end rearwards. With the link ends
released, connection to the implement will be
easier. The link end (4) is shown in the extended
position. The link end (2) is shown in the closed
(operating) position.
With both link ends extended, as at (4), connect the
link ends to the equipment and secure with lynch
pins. Start the engine and carefully inch the tractor
rearwards until the latches lock in the detent (3) on
each link arm. Stop the engine and engage the
parking brake.
Attach the top link and adjust accordingly.
295
IMPORTANT: Before transporting or operating the
equipment, make sure the flexible link ends are
locked in the operating position. Remove the
drawbar if it interferes with close-mounted
equipment.
3 - 91
QUICK HITCH
The The Quick Hitch consists of an alternative pair
of lower links (2) and an adjustable top link (1).
The lower links and the top link have open claw
ends that permit rapid coupling and uncoupling of
implements without leaving the cab. The claws are
equipped with self-locking latches to ensure
positive retention of the tractor hitch to the
implement. Cables are provided for attachment to
the latches.
296
Three ball-bushings are supplied for installation on
the implement, if required. The ball-bushing with
projecting lips (1) should be installed on the
implement upper hitch pin. The two plain ball-
bushings (3) with their detachable guides (2) should
be installed on the implement lower hitch pins.
297
Coupling Implement to Tractor
Adjust the stabilisers to maintain the tractor lower
links at the correct distance apart so they align with
the ball-bushings installed on the implement lower
hitch pins.
Fully raise the top link. With the lower links fully
lowered, the self-locking latches (pos. 1) in the
operating position, as shown, reverse the tractor
until the lower link claw couplers are beneath the
implement hitch pins. The combination of large
claw openings and the guides on the implement
ball-bushes make accurate alignment of tractor to
implement unnecessary.
298
3 - 92
Raise the lower links until the claw couplers engage

the ball-bushes. An audible click will be heard as
the self-locking latches engage the implement ball-
bushes. Lower the top link claw onto the upper
implement ball-bush and press down until the latch
is heard to engage. Increase or decrease top link
length, as necessary.
The implement supports, where fitted, may now be
removed or retracted and the implement supported
on the 3-point hitch.
Uncoupling Implement from Tractor

Using the hydraulic lift control lever, fully lower the
implement to the ground ensuring that it cannot fall
when disconnected from the tractor. Use the
implement supports (where fitted).
Pull the release cable on the top link to release the
claw from the implement hitch.
Pull the release cable (2) on both lower links.
The lever will lock in position with the latch
retracted (1). This will allow the links to clear the
ball-bushings on the implement lower hitch pins
when the links are lowered fully. Fully lower the
lower links and drive the tractor forward, clear of the
implement.
NOTE: Ensure the release cables do not foul 299
wheels, or moving parts of the 3-point hitch or
implement. When not in use, secure the cables to
the rubber strap on the rear right-hand side of the
cab frame.
3 - 93
LINKAGE STABILISERS
! CAUTION !
Never operate steerable equipment unless the
telescopic stabilisers are installed and correctly
adjusted to prevent excessive lateral movement.
ROUND SECTION SCREW TYPE

Telescopic stabilisers control the side to side
movement (sway) of the lower links and attached
equipment when in work or when being
transported. This is especially important when
operating on slopes or near fences, walls or ditches
and with certain implements. Check your
Implement Operator’s Manual.
Each stabiliser consists of a fabricated tube (2) with

a coupling at each end. The end with the pin (4) is
attached to the 3-point hitch. The screw thread (3)
screws into the rear end of the tube to provide
adjustment. The ball end (6) is attached to a
mounting bracket (1) bolted to the outer end of the
rear axle housing. This ball end is a loose, sliding fit
within the tube. The pin (5) may be passed through
drillings in the tube and rod, as shown, to lock the
assembly as a unit.
300
In practice, the locating pin (5) should be removed
from both stabilisers and the implement attached to
the 3-point hitch. To remove the pin, pull back the
securing clip. When the implement is satisfactorily
aligned, the tube should be rotated until the holes in
the front end of the tube and the sliding ball end are
aligned. The locating pin should then be passed
through the holes and the securing clip replaced.
With the pins inserted in this manner, both
stabilisers will be locked as a rigid unit and the
implement will be prevented from swaying both in
work or in the transport position.
3 - 94
Under certain conditions or when using equipment

such as ploughs etc., it may be desirable to allow
the 3-point hitch (and implement) to sway from side
to side.
If the pin is removed from the front hole, a limited
degree of sway will be permitted. The pin should be
re-inserted through the rear hole, as shown at (1).
The pin will act as a stop to limit the degree of
sway.
IMPORTANT: When setting the stabiliser length,

particularly if using the sway facility, ensure that
there is no possibility of the rear tyres fouling the
stabilisers or lower links.
NOTE: When using an Automatic Pick-Up Hitch, 301
ensure the stabilisers are adjusted to provide
adequate clearance between the lower links and
the hitch.
3 - 95
Automatic Stabilisers
Automatic telescopic stabilisers may be fitted in
place of the standard telescopic stabilisers,
described previously.
! WARNING !
stabilisers are installed and correctly adjusted to
prevent excessive lateral movement.
Each stabiliser consists of a telescopic tube

assembly internally threaded at the rear end. The
tube assembly is attached to a mounting bracket
bolted to the outer ends of the rear axle housing.
An externally threaded rod (3) is attached to the
lower links. The threaded rod engages with the
screwed thread in the tube assembly and the
overall length of the assembly is determined by
screwing the rod in or out, as required.
An adjustable chain (4) is attached, at one end, to
the rear fender and at the other end, via a spring, to
a hinged cover (1) on the telescopic part of the
stabiliser. A lug (2) on the telescopic part of the
stabiliser engages a notch in the cover.
When the chain is correctly adjusted it will be slack
when the lower links are raised from the operating 302
position, so allowing the cover to drop down over
the lug on the stabiliser. When the cover is down,
as shown, the stabiliser is locked at the preset
length. The lower links are, therefore, retained at a
set distance apart, preventing them (and attached
equipment) from moving from side to side
(swaying).
However, when the 3-point hitch is lowered into the
work position, the chain becomes taut and lifts the
cover from the stabiliser allowing it to telescope
freely. The stabilisers (and implement) will then
sway when engaged in the ground. This feature is
useful as it provides greater implement control
when turning on the headlands of a field.
3 - 96
Adjusting the Stabilisers

In practice, the implement should be attached to
the three-point linkage with the cover (4) on both
stabilisers raised, so as to allow the stabilisers to
telescope freely.
Lift the locking/ adjusting lever (2) up over the
peg (1) so that the lever is at right-angles to the
stabiliser. Turn the telescopic section, by means of
the lever, so that the threaded section (3) screws
into or out of the stabiliser. When the length is
satisfactory, i.e., the notch in the cover aligns with
the lug on the stabiliser, lower the lever back down
over the peg and close the cover.
The chain should then be adjusted, by placing the
appropriate link over the attaching hook, so that the
cover on the stabiliser is lifted when the implement 303
is lowered into work.
IMPORTANT: When setting the stabiliser length to

provide sway, ensure that there is no possibility of
the rear tyres fouling the stabilisers or lower links.
NOTE: When using an Automatic Pick-Up Hitch,
the hitch.
Sway Block Stabilisers
Sway block stabilisers may be installed as an
alternative to telescopic stabilisers and will control
the sway of the lower links and attached equipment
when in work or when being transported. This is
especially important when operating on slopes or
near fences, walls or ditches and with certain
implements. Check your Implement Operator’s
Manual.
! WARNING !
stabilisers are installed and correctly adjusted to
prevent excessive lateral movement.
304
Sway blocks consist of reversible blocks (1) bolted

to either side of the drawbar hanger. A steel wear
pad (2) bolted to the inner surface of each lower
link, contacts the sway block to prevent excessive
sway (lateral movement) of the lower links.
The thickness of the pad (and therefore the degree
of sway) is controlled by two spacer shims of 8 mm
and 10 mm thickness, respectively.
3 - 97
The positioning of the shims relative to the pad

depends upon the required width setting of the
lower links (to suit the attached implement) or the
degree of sway required.
Shim/ Wear Pad Position

The left-hand side of the Figure shows both spacer
shims (3) and (4) installed between the wear
pad (2) and the lower link (1). This will increase the
distance between the lower links to suit a wider
implement.
The picture on the right shows the 8 mm shim (4)
on the outer surface of the lower link with the
10 mm shim (3) installed between the pad and the
lower link. Alternatively, the shims may be omitted
altogether to reduce the distance between the
lower links when operating with a narrower
implement.
305
Sway Block Position
To allow lateral movement of the lower links (and
attached equipment) in both the operating and
transport positions, attach both sway blocks (1) so
that the flat surface faces the wear pad (2) as
shown in the picture on the right.
When it is desirable to have sideways movement of
the equipment in the operating position, but remain
rigid in the transport position, remove the bolts
securing the sway blocks to the drawbar hanger
and relocate the sway blocks (1) so that the curved
surface faces the wear pad (2) as shown in the
picture on the left.
This will allow the implement to sway when the
lower links are lowered into the working position but
become rigid when raised. 306
IMPORTANT: When setting the sway blocks to

provide lateral movement, ensure that there is no
possibility of the lower links or implement
contacting the rear tyres. Ensure that there is
sufficient clearance between the wear pads and the
sway blocks to allow the 3-point hitch to raise and
lower without the possibility of the lower links
binding or becoming bent.
NOTE: When using an Automatic Pick-Up Hitch,
the hitch.
3 - 98
DRAWBARS AND TOWING ATTACHMENTS

NOTE: Before attaching trailed equipment to the z Do not tow equipment weighing more than
tractor, read the following text carefully. twice the tractor weight.
ATTACHING/DETACHING TRAILED EQUIPMENT
z Do not exceed 10 MPH (16 km/h) if towed
IMPORTANT: Regulations in some areas require equipment weighs more than the tractor.
brakes on towed equipment when operating on the
public highway. Before travelling on public roads, z Do not exceed 20 MPH (32 km/h) while towing
make sure you comply with legal requirements. equipment that weighs less than the tractor.
To attach the tractor to trailed equipment and All Drawbars

implements:
1. Ensure that the implement is at draw bar height. ! WARNING !

2. Slowly inch rearwards to allow the drawbar and Do not pull from the lower links with the links above
implement hitch to align. the horizontal position. Always use the drawbar,
3. Stop the engine and engage the parking brake. pick-up hitch or lower links in the lowered position
for pull-type work, otherwise the tractor may
4. Insert the hitch pin and ensure that the retainer overturn rearwards.
is in the latched position.
NOTE: When supporting equipment on the drawbar
ensure that the total weight on the rear axle does
not exceed the maximum static downward load or
attaching trailed equipment to the drawbar or hitch,
the rear tyre load capacity, whichever is the lower
ensure that there is adequate clearance between
(see Tyre Pressures and Permissible Loads at the
the implement and the tractor. Semi-mounted or
end of Section 3).
trailed equipment may interfere with the tractor rear
tyres. Adjust the steering stops (four wheel drive
IMPORTANT: When transporting equipment on the
only), sway blocks or stabilisers.
highway it is recommended that a safety chain
NOTE: For implements that require hitch having a tensile strength equal to the gross weight
extensions or interfere with the tractor clevis, of the implement be installed between the
remove and store the clevis and hitch pin. tractor and implement hitch. See Safety Chain on
page 3 - 103.
Always use a safety chain installed between the
tractor and implement hitch when transporting Swinging drawbars
equipment on the highway. See page 3 - 103.
Two types of swinging drawbar are available.
Observe the following precautions for towing The sliding type is illustrated in Figure307.
equipment not equipped with brakes: This drawbar may be installed as part of a tow hitch
or as an independent unit.
The roller type shown in Figure 311 is
recommended when heavy draft, trailed equipment
is used for extended periods. This drawbar is
mounted on rollers and offers additional turning
ease when compared with the sliding type.
3 - 99
Sliding Type Swinging Drawbar

The drawbar (2) pivots about a single pin at the
front end so as to allow the rear of the drawbar to
swing the full width of the hanger. By inserting the
swing limiter pins (1) in the appropriate holes,
restricted movement of the drawbar is permitted.
Alternatively, the drawbar can be pinned in any one
of three positions by insertion of the pins in the
appropriate holes. In Figure 167 the drawbar is
shown pinned in the central position to prevent
swinging.
Pin the drawbar to prevent swinging when pulling
equipment which requires accurate positioning and
when transporting equipment.
Allow the drawbar to swing when pulling ground
engaging equipment which does not require 307
accurate positioning. This will make steering and
turning easier.
! WARNING !
When transporting equipment or when operating
ground engaging equipment, always secure the
drawbar to prevent swinging.
The drawbar is adjustable for height and projection

relative to the end of the PTO stub shaft. To vary
the height of the drawbar/implement hitch point,
remove the drawbar and invert it.
All Countries Except North America
The front securing pin may be inserted in one of
three holes in the drawbar to vary the PTO stub
shaft to hitch point distance. See Figure 168 and
the following table:
PTO Shaft to
Hole (see Maximum Static
Drawbar Hitch
Fig. 168) Downward Load
Point
Drawbar clevis uppermost

1 406 mm (16 in.) 1440 kg (3175 lb.)
2 356 mm (14 in.) 1680 kg (3700 lb.) 308
3 243 mm (9.6 in.) 2575 kg (5675 lb.)
Drawbar clevis underneath

1 406 mm (16 in.) 1045 kg (2300 lb.)
2 356 mm (14 in.) 1225 kg (2700 lb.)
3 243 mm (9.6 in.) 1305 kg (2875 lb.)
3 - 100
Use of hole 1 is required for 1000 rev/min PTO

operations and hole 2 for 540 rev/min PTO
operations.
When towing equipment exerting high static
downward forces, such as When towing equipment
exerting high static downward forces, such as two-
wheeled trailers, etc., use hole 2 with the clevis in
the uppermost position.
North America only
four holes in the drawbar to vary the PTO stub shaft
to hitch point distance. See Figure 169 and the
following table:
PTO Shaft to
Hole (see Maximum Static
Drawbar Hitch
Fig. 169) Downward Load
Point
1 600 mm (23.6 in.) 1000 kg (2204 lb.)
2 500 mm (19.6 in.) 1215 kg (2678 lb.) 309
3 400 mm (15.7 in.) 1620 kg (3571 lb.)
4 350 mm (13.7 in.) 1900 kg (4188 lb.)
1 600 mm (23.6 in.) 780 kg (1719 lb.)
2 500 mm (19.6 in.) 885 kg (1951 lb.)
3 400 mm (15.7 in.) 1045 kg (2303 lb.)
4 350 mm (13.7 in.) 1225 kg (2700 lb.)

downward forces, such as two-wheeled trailers,
etc., use the close-coupled positions - holes 3 or 4
with the clevis in the uppermost position.
3 - 101
Roller Type Swinging Drawbar

The drawbar (pos. 2, Figure 170) pivots about a
single pin at the front end so as to allow the rear of
the drawbar to swing the full width of the hanger.
By inserting the swing limiter pin (1) in the
appropriate hole and through the drawbar, the
drawbar can be pinned in any one of seven
positions. Alternatively, the drawbar may be
allowed to swing the full width of the hanger (3).
Pin the drawbar to prevent swinging when pulling
equipment which requires accurate positioning and
when transporting equipment. Allow the drawbar to
swing when pulling ground engaging equipment
which does not require accurate positioning.
This will make steering and turning easier.
310
! WARNING !
When transporting equipment or when operating
ground engaging equipment, always secure the
drawbar to prevent swinging.
The drawbar is adjustable for height and projection

relative to the end of the PTO stub shaft. To vary
the height of the drawbar/implement hitch point,
remove the drawbar and invert it.
three holes in the drawbar to vary the PTO shaft to
hitch point distance. See the Figure and the
following table:
PTO Shaft Maximum

Hole (see
to Drawbar Hitch StaticDownward
Fig. 311)
Point Load
1 406 mm (16 in.) 1360 kg (2995 lb.)
2 356 mm (14 in.) 1630 kg (3590 lb.) 311
1 356 mm (14 in.) 1045 kg (2303 lb.)
2 406 mm (16 in.) 1225 kg (2700 lb.)
Use of hole 1 is required for 1000 rev/min PTO

operations and hole 2 for 540 rev/min PTO
operations.
3 - 102

downward forces, such as two-wheeled trailers,
etc., use hole 2 with the clevis in the uppermost
position.
! WARNING !
Do not pull from the lower links with the links above
the horizontal position. Always use the drawbar,
pick-up hitch or lower links in the lowered position
for pull-type work, otherwise the tractor may
overturn rearwards.
NOTE: When supporting equipment on the drawbar

ensure that the total weight on the rear axle does
not exceed the maximum static downward load or
the rear tyre load capacity, whichever is the lower
(see Tyre Pressures and Permissible Loads at the
end of Section 3).
IMPORTANT: When transporting equipment on the

highway it is recommended that a safety chain
having a tensile strength equal to the gross weight
of the implement be installed between the tractor
and implement hitch. See following text and Figure.
SAFETY CHAIN
When towing implements on public roads, use a
safety chain (2) with a tensile strength equal to or
greater than the gross weight of the implement to
be towed. This will control the implement (1) in case
the drawbar (3) and implement become
disconnected.
After attaching the safety chain, make a trial run by
driving the tractor to the right and to the left for a
short distance to check the safety chain
adjustment. If necessary, re-adjust to eliminate a
tight or loose chain.
Check the implement operator’s manual for
implement weight and attaching hardware
specifications.
312
Safety chains, attaching hardware and chain guide
are available from your authorised dealer.
3 - 103
REAR TOW HITCH

Description
Various rear tow hitch options are available.
All versions consist of a fabricated steel frame
bolted to the rear axle centre housing. A tow pin or
ball is provided, adjustable for height.
The slider type frame is is equipped with rotating
pins that engage in notches in the frame to secure
the hitch at the required height.
With this type of frame, a second, fixed tow pin
(piton) is available as an option. The piton is
installed at the bottom of the assembly.
Four types of hitch assembly are available:
z Heavy duty non-swivelling tow pin.

See Figure 313.
z Swivelling Tow Pin - Manual Engagement.

See Figure 315.
z Swivelling Tow Pin - Auto Engagement.

See Figure 317.
z K 80 ball. See Figure 321.

A swinging drawbar may also be provided as part
of the assembly. See “Sliding Type Swinging
Drawbar” on page 3 - 100 for details of drawbar
operation.
NOTE: The tow hitch is designed primarily for use
with four wheel trailers which do not place a heavy
downward load on the tow pin. Observe the
maximum static downward loads quoted in the text.
3 - 104
Vertically adjustable hitch with non-swivelling

Tow hitch (where fitted)
The tow hitches shown are equipped with a height
adjustable, non-swivelling, tow pin assembly.
Remove the securing clip (1) and lift the handle (5)
to the vertical position. Lifting the handle will rotate
the pins and disengage them from the notches in
the frame. Using both hands on the handle (5) lift or
lower the tow pin assembly (4), as required. When
at the required height, support the tow ball with one
hand and lower the handle to the horizontal
position. The pins will rotate and re-engage the
notches in the frame. Lower the PTO guard (6).
To attach a trailer drawbar to the tow pin, remove
the “R” clip (3) from the tow pin and lift out using the
handle (2). Re-insert the tow pin so that it passes 313
through the eye of the trailer drawbar and reattach
the R clip.
NOTE: The static downward load on the tow pin
must not exceed the rear tyre load capacity or the
following values, whichever is lower. (See Tyre
Pressures and Permissible Loads at the end of
Section 3).
Category D3 tow pin 2500 kg (5500 lb.)

NOTE: A Category D3 tow pin is standard
equipment on your tractor. A Category D2 pin and
housing is available as a dealer installed accessory.
3 - 105
Vertically adjustable hitch with swivelling Tow

hitch (where fitted)
The tow hitches shown are equipped with a height
adjustable, swivelling tow pin assembly with
manual or auto operation.
With reference to Figure 314, adjust the height of
the tow pin assembly, as follows:
Grasp the handle (2) with the right hand. Press and
hold in the button (1) to release the locking
mechanism. Pull the handle (3) down to the
horizontal position with the left hand and release
the push button to lock the handle (3) in the
horizontal position. Lowering the handle will rotate
the pins and disengage them from the frame.
Using both handles, lift or lower the complete tow
pin assembly. When at the required height, hold in 314
the push button and lift the left-hand handle up to
the vertical position, as shown in Figure. 174).
The pins will rotate and re-engage the notches in
the frame. Lower the PTO guard (4).
! WARNING !
Before attaching a trailer, ensure that the pins are
fully engaged in the notches, i.e. the handle (3)
(Figure 314) is in the vertical position. The tow pin
assembly must not rest on the PTO guard or on the
bolt heads at the end of the slider guides.
315
3 - 106
Attaching a trailer
Swivelling Tow Pin - Manual Engagement
To attach a trailer drawbar to the tow pin, remove
the “R” clip (1) (Figure 315) from the tow pin and lift
out using the handle (2). Re-insert the tow pin so
that it passes through the eye of the trailer drawbar
and reattach the R clip.
The tow pin may be allowed to swivel after
loosening the socket-headed screw (1)
(Figure 316) on the underside of the tow pin
assembly. This feature will permit a trailer with a
non-swivelling drawbar to articulate relative to the
towing tractor.
IMPORTANT: Do not allow the tractor tow pin to 316

swivel if the trailed equipment is equipped with a
swivelling tow pin connector.
must not exceed 2000 kg (4400 lb.) or the rear tyre
load capacity, whichever is lower. (See Tyre
Section 3).
Swivelling Trailer Hitch
The tow pin (2) (Figure317), is spring-loaded in the
engaged (down) position, as shown. To attach a
trailer to the tow pin, lift the release lever (1) to the
vertical position to retract the tow pin up into its
housing.
The release lever is connected by the cable (4) to a
handle in the cab. This will permit trailer attachment
without leaving the cab. Pull up the handle (1)
(Figure 318) to actuate the cable release and
retract the tow pin up into its housing.
317
The pin will stay in the raised position until the
trailer drawbar is located beneath it. The eye of the
drawbar will contact the trip lever (3) (Figure 317)
and cause the pin to drop down into the engaged
position. Alternatively, the tow pin will drop down
into the engaged position if the lever (1) is pulled
down.
! WARNING !
Do not attempt to trip the lever by hand as the
fingers may be trapped by the action of the spring-
loaded tow pin.
318
3 - 107
Fixed Tow Pin (Piton Fix)

An optional fixed tow pin (piton) may be provided at
the bottom of the assembly.
To attach a trailer to the piton, remove the lynch pin
(2) and withdraw the retaining pin (4). Lift the
security latch (1) and lower the eye of the trailer
drawbar over the piton (3). Drop the security latch
down, re-insert the retaining pin and secure with
the linch pin. The security latch will ensure that the
trailer cannot become accidentally detached from
the piton.
NOTE: The static downward load on the piton must
not exceed 3000 kg (6600 lb.) or the rear tyre load
capacity, whichever is lower. (See Tyre Pressures
and Permissible Loads at the end of Section 3). 319
320
3 - 108
Ball hitch K 80 Ball

The tow hitch shown is equipped with a height
adjustable, 80 mm ball assembly.
Remove the securing clip (1) and lift the handle (2)
to the vertical position. Lifting the handle will rotate
the pins and disengage them from the notches in
the frame. Using both hands on the handle, lift or
lower the tow ball assembly (3) as required. When
at the required height, support the tow ball with one
hand and lower the handle to the horizontal
position. The pins will rotate and re-engage the
notches in the frame. Lower the PTO guard.
NOTE: When setting the height of the tow ball, it
should be adjusted to the lowest position relative to
the correct operating height of the implement 321
drawbar.
To attach a trailer, remove the “R” clip (5) and pull
out the locking pin (4). This will allow the security
latch to pivot forwards toward the tractor. When the
implement drawbar has been securely attached,
replace the locking pin so it passes through the
security latch and re-insert the “R” clip.
must not exceed 3000 kg (6600 lb.) or the rear tyre
load capacity, whichever is lower. (See Tyre
Section 3).
3 - 109
EXTENDIBLE PICK-UP HITCH AND DRAWBAR

(where fitted)
The extendible pick-up hitch is raised and lowered
by means of the tractor hydraulic system and can
be extended to aid visibility when attaching towed
equipment.
Operated through one of the rear remote valves,
the hitch is extended or retracted using the remote E
valve lever. The hoses should be connected in such
a way that moving the remote valve lever to E N
(Extend) will extend the hitch, moving the lever to R

(Retract) will retract the hitch. R
NOTE: The illustration shows hitch operation

through remote valve number I. However, it may be
operated using an alternative valve where required.
322
To connect an implement to the pick-up hitch, move
both position and draft control levers fully rearwards
until the 3-point lift is supporting the weight of the
hitch.
To free the hitch, pull up the release handle (1).
Lower the hitch until it is clear of the locking
latches. Then extend the hook or clevis rearwards
by moving the remote valve lever to (E). With the
drawbar extended continue to lower the hitch until it
is just above the ground.
323
3 - 110
Position the tractor so that the hitch hook (2) is

beneath the eye of the implement drawbar eye.
Using the position control lever, raise the hitch until
the implement drawbar is just clear of the ground.
Fully retract the pick-up hitch by moving the remote
valve lever to (R). To assist in retracting the hitch
release the tractor brakes to allow movement of the
tractor towards the trailer. Re-apply the handbrake
before leaving the tractor seat.
With the hitch in the fully retracted position raise it
slowly until an audible click indicates the locking
latches (1) have engaged the cross tubes (3).
NOTE: The maximum static downward load on the
hitch hook must not exceed 3000 kg (6610 lb.)
324
To change from the hook to drawbar, lower the
pick-up hitch, extract the two securing pins (1) and
withdraw the hook assembly. Install the clevis
drawbar assembly and secure with the two pins.
Maximum Permissible Clevis Load
PTO Shaft to Drawbar Maximum Static

Hitch Point Downward Load
406 mm (16 in.) 1500 kg (3300 lb.)
325
When not in use, the hook or clevis drawbar may
be stored in the bracket (1), attached to the rear
axle. Ensure the clamp screw (2) is fully tightened
to retain the drawbar in the bracket.
IMPORTANT: When supporting equipment on the

drawbar or pick-up hitch ensure that the total
weight on the rear axle does not exceed the
maximum static downward load or the rear tyre
load capacity, whichever is the lower (See Rear
Tyre Pressures and Loads at the end of Section 3).
326
3 - 111
TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEMS (where fitted)

HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM
(except Italy)
Hydraulic trailer brakes may be connected into the
hydraulic system via a quick-release coupling (1) at
the rear of the tractor.
NOTE: The position of the trailer brake coupling
may vary slightly from that shown, dependent upon
the type of remote control valves installed.
If the trailer brake hose is connected into the
coupling the trailer brakes will be automatically
applied when the footbrakes are used to stop the
tractor.
IMPORTANT: It is essential that the brake pedals

327
are locked together to ensure correct operation of
trailer brakes, balanced operation of the tractor
brakes and four wheel braking (four wheel drive
tractors only).
! WARNING !
With the tractor engine off, hydraulic pressure
cannot be applied to the trailer braking system.
When parking the tractor/trailer combination apply
the tractor and trailer parking brakes while the
engine is still running. With the footbrakes locked
together apply the parking brake, stop the engine
and immediately block the wheels. Always lock the
brake pedals together when a hydraulically braked
trailer is attached to the tractor.
NOTE: Always keep the dust-cap in place when the

trailer brake coupling is not in use. It is a legal
requirement in most countries that trailer brakes
may only be connected to the tractor coupling by
means of a compatible female coupling.
3 - 112
HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM

(Italy only)
The hydraulic trailer braking system on tractors for
the Italian market function in a slightly different way
to the universal system previously described.
If the trailer brake hose is connected into the
coupling the trailer brakes will be automatically
applied when the footbrakes are used to stop the
tractor or when the tractor parking brake is applied
when the engine is running. When the engine is
switched off, the trailer brakes will remain applied.
IMPORTANT: It is essential that the brake pedals

are locked together to ensure correct operation of
trailer brakes, balanced operation of the tractor 328
brakes and four wheel braking (four wheel drive
tractors only).
To release hydraulic pressure and free the trailer
brakes, start the engine, depress both brake pedals
and release the tractor parking brake.
NOTE: The light (1), on the instrument panel will
flash, accompanied by critical alarm, to indicate that
hydraulic oil pressure to the trailer brake circuit is
low. Stop the engine and investigate the cause.
ATTENTION: Should the trailer brake warning light

commence to flash, the trailer brakes will apply
automatically.
NOTE: Always keep the dust-cap in place when the
trailer brake coupling is not in use. It is a legal
requirement in most countries that trailer brakes
may only be connected to the tractor coupling by
means of a compatible female coupling.
329
3 - 113
PNEUMATIC TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM

(except Italy)
! WARNING !
With the tractor engine off, hydraulic pressure
cannot be applied to the trailer braking system.
When parking the tractor/trailer combination apply
the tractor and trailer parking brakes while the
engine is still running. Single line pneumatic trailer
braking systems are designed for use up to a
maximum speed of 25 km/h (15 MPH). Tractor/
trailer combinations with dual line braking systems
may be used at a higher speed but must at all times
comply with local legal requirements. Gross train
weight, i. i., tractor plus trailer(s) and/or individual
trailer weight must not exceed that laid down in
local regulations governing the use of trailers.
The following text covers operation of the air-

operated trailer braking systems that may be
installed as an alternative, or in addition to,
hydraulically-actuated trailer brakes.
The system consists of an engine-driven air
compressor, one or two air reservoirs, dependent
upon type of system installed, a pressure gauge,
control valves, two or three couplers and related
pipework.
The couplers installed at the back of the tractor
may be connected to single or dual line trailer
braking systems. Either or both types may be
installed. The air lines connected to the couplers
are colour-coded black, red and yellow. The black
line is used for a single line system, the red and
yellow lines are used for dual line systems.
IMPORTANT: The trailer brakes will only operate

when both tractor brake pedals are applied.
Therefore, always lock the brake pedals together
when a trailer is attached to the tractor.
NOTE: The tractor parking brake is connected to
the main control valve. Whenever the parking brake
is applied, the trailer brakes are activated.
3 - 114
Operation
When starting the engine with a trailer connected
into the tractor air brake system, chock the wheels
and release the parking brake and footbrakes.
The warning light (1) Figure 190, will illuminate until
air pressure builds up to 4.5 - 5.5 bar.
The pressure will continue to rise, as indicated by
the air pressure bargraph in the Dot Matrix Display
(see Figure 331). To select the air pressure
bargraph, use the standard keypad or, where fitted,
the Enhanced keypad.
330
The air tank(s) should reach operating pressure
within 3 minutes of start-up but may take longer,
dependent upon the size of the trailer brake
reservoir(s).
Once required pressure has been reached a loud
pop. will be heard. This signifies that the unload
valve has opened to allow excess pressure to
escape to the atmosphere.
IMPORTANT: Apply the footbrakes several times,

ensuring that the pressure, as indicated by the
gauge, drops as the brakes are applied and rises
again when they are released. Never drive the
tractor with the trailer brake warning light on.
331
IMPORTANT: When the footbrakes are applied,
with the parking brake off, ensure that the front
wheel drive indicator light (9) illuminates and that all
stop lights are functional.
IMPORTANT: Various types of trailer braking
systems are available. Check the trailer
manufacturers’ instruction manual before making
connections to the tractor air brake system.
Clean the trailer and tractor connectors before
coupling up the hose(s). Ensure that connections
are secure. Check the trailer brakes regularly to
ensure that they are functioning correctly.
332
! CAUTION !
Do not over use the brakes on steep down hill
gradients. Use the same gear going down hill as
you would use for going up the same hill.
3 - 115
Dual Line System

For a trailer with a dual line braking system,
connect the supply line hose to the red coupler (1)
and the control line hose to the yellow coupler (2).
IMPORTANT: The dual line system will only

operate if both the red and yellow lines are
connected.
Red line (brake supply line) - (1): Air is supplied
to the red coupler at full system pressure. This is
the brake supply line and charges the reservoir(s)
on the trailer. If the trailer braking system is
disconnected from the tractor for any reason, the
air pressure will fall to zero and the trailer brakes
will be applied. 333
Yellow line (control line) - (2): As the tractor
brakes are applied, increasing air pressure is
supplied, via the yellow coupler, to the control valve
on the trailer until full system pressure is generated.
Application of the trailer brakes is proportional to
the pressure applied to the tractor brake pedals.
334
Single Line System
If the trailer has a single line system an additional
coupler is supplied. Connect the hose to the black
coupler (1).
A pressure of 5.5 bar is available at the coupler at
all times when the tractor brake pedals and parking
brake are released. Application of the tractor
brakes causes the pressure to drop to zero allowing
the trailer brakes to be applied.
335
3 - 116
AIR OPERATED TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM

(Italy only)
This system operates in a similar manner to the
dual line system, previously described, except that
a combined dual coupler is utilised. Please read all
the previous text relating to pneumatic trailer
brakes plus the following:
The coupler is protected by a metal cover.
To remove the cover, press the handle (2) down.
The handle is held in position by a stiff spring and
some pressure is required to move it down to
release the cover (1).
336
Couplers
The lines to the couplers are colour-coded for ease
of use. The supply line to the left-hand coupler (1)
is red and the control line to the right-hand
coupler (2) is yellow. The trailer hoses will have a
male dual coupler. Press down the handle (3) and
insert the trailer coupler. When the handle is
released, it will lock the trailer and tractor couplers
together.
337
3 - 117
TRACTOR/TRAILER BRAKE BIAS CONTROL

When the tractor leaves the factory, this control is
set to allow maximum available braking effort to the
trailer. Under most conditions, the control will
remain in this position and will give well balanced
braking.
Occasionally, with some trailers this setting may
provide a greater braking bias to the trailer than is
ideal. In this case the braking force to the trailer
may be reduced slightly by turning the adjuster (1)
in an anti-clockwise direction.
To turn the valve, it is first necessary to pull the
knob out. After adjustment, push the knob in to lock
the setting. The adjuster must be reset to the fully
clockwise position when a different trailer is used.
338
! WARNING !
The trailer brake bias adjustment is extremely
sensitive and should not be rotated more than one
half turn before testing with the attached trailer fully
loaded. If further adjustments are required, they
should be carried out following the same
procedure. Failure to do this may result in an
imbalance between tractor and trailer braking
forces if the valve is rotated too far in the anti-
clockwise direction.
Auxiliary Air Supply Connector (where fitted)

An auxiliary air supply is available for the purpose
of inflating tyres, etc. The air supply operates at full
system pressure - 7 or 8 bar (100 or 115 lbf. in2) -
dependent upon system installed. When not in use,
ensure protective dust cap is fitted.
Always use a proprietary inflating gun, with gauge,
when inflating tyres. Connect the air hose to the air
outlet (1) located on the left-hand side of the rear
axle.
339
3 - 118
WHEEL TRACKS
Front Wheel Track Adjustment
! CAUTION !
Your tractor is produced with lights that meet
lighting regulations when operating or travelling on
the public highway. If the wheel track setting is
adjusted beyond the initial factory position then you
may be required to reposition the lights or fit
auxiliary lighting to comply with legal requirements.
Additionally, before travelling on the highway,
ensure that the overall tractor width does not
exceed the maximum permitted in your country.
340
Front wheel track adjustment is effected by
changing the wheel rim relative to the centre disc,
the rim disc relative to the axle hub or by inter-
changing the wheels.
! CAUTION !
Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care
and ensure, when stored, that they cannot topple
and cause injury.
There are three different designs of centre disc

dependent upon tyre size and tractor model.
The centre discs shown are as follows:
341
Square centre disc - variable track (Type 1)
Round centre disc - variable track (Type 2)
Round centre disc - fixed track (Type 3)
The type of centre disc installed will affect the track
setting. Identify the type of centre disc fitted to your
tractor wheels, then refer to the following table and
Figure 353 to see the wheel rim and disc positions
necessary to achieve the required track setting.
NOTE: Variable track wheels (type 1 and 2), are
not available on tractors with 50 Km/h transmission.
342
3 - 119
! WARNING !
With a front wheel on a four wheel drive tractor
supported on a stand, never attempt to rotate the
wheel or start the engine. This may cause the rear
wheels to move resulting in the tractor falling from
the stand. Wheels should always be supported
such that the tyres are only just clear of the ground.
NOTE: When interchanging left and right-hand

wheel assemblies, ensure the “V” at the top of the
tyre tread remains pointing in the direction of
forward travel.
Front wheel drive tractors have fixed axle
assemblies. However the track width is fully
adjustable by changing the wheel rim relative to the
centre disc, the rim and/or disc relative to the axle
hub or by inter-changing both front wheels.
(The track width is the distance between the centre
of each tyre at ground level).
The sectioned drawings shown illustrate the wheel
rim and disc positions relative to the hub at various
track settings. The track widths available are as
follows:
Track Adjustment
Adjustable Rim (Types 1 and 2)
Position Track Adjustment

A 1552 mm (61.1 in.)
B 1664 mm (65.5 in.)
C 1758 mm (69.2 in.)
D 1869 mm (73.6 in.)
E 1952 mm (76.9 in.)
F 2064 mm (81.3 in.)
G 2158 mm (85.0 in.)
H 2269 mm (89.3 in.)
NOTE: The track widths in Figure 209, are nominal

and may vary by up to 25 mm (1 in.) dependent
upon tyre size.
! CAUTION !
Never operate the tractor with a loose wheel rim or
disc. Always tighten nuts to the specified torque
and at the recommended intervals. Owners should
ensure that all steering components are maintained
in a reliable and satisfactory condition to ensure
safe operation and comply with legal requirements.
343
3 - 120
Track setting - 50 Km/h Models

Tractors equipped with a 50 km/h (31 MPH)
transmission will have fixed front wheels offering a
choice of two track settings. To alter the track width,
interchange both front wheels to provide a narrow
(A) or wide (B) track setting as required.
NOTE: When interchanging left and right-hand
wheel assemblies, ensure the “V” at the top of the
tyre tread remains pointing in the direction of
forward travel.
344
Track Adjustment
4WD Front axle type Position All models
Standard - min/max. width A/B 1854 mm (73.0 in.) / 2057 mm (81.0 in.)
Suspended - min/max. width A/B 1854 mm (73.0 in.) / 2057 mm (81.0 in.)
Refitting the Front Wheels

When refitting or adjusting a wheel, tighten
the bolts to the following torques. Re-check after
driving the tractor for 200 m (200 yards), after
1 hour and again after 8 hours operation and
thereafter at the 50 hour service intervals:
Disc
to hub nuts 184 Nm (250 lbf. ft)
Disc
to hub nuts 155 Nm (210 lbf. ft)
NOTE: If your tractor is equipped with front fenders,
ensure there is adequate clearance under all
operating conditions. Adjust the steering stops and
or fender position, as necessary.
IMPORTANT: With the smaller track settings a foul

condition may occur between the tyre or fender and
the tractor when the wheels are turned to the full
lock position particularly when the axle is fully
articulated. To avoid this condition, adjust the
fenders and/or steering stops.
3 - 121
Steering Stops
Two steering stops are incorporated in the axle,
one at each end. The stops are adjustable and
should be set to provide a minimum clearance of 20
mm (0.75 in.) between the tyres and any part of the
tractor on full left and right lock with the axle fully
articulated.
To adjust, slacken the locknut (1) and turn the stop
bolt (2) anti-clockwise to reduce the steering angle
of the wheels or clockwise to increase the steering
angle. Tighten the locknut to 150 Nm (110 lbf. ft.).
NOTE: After adjusting both steering stops, ensure
that there is adequate clearance between the tyres
and any part of the tractor with the axle fully
articulated. 345
FRONT AXLE OSCILLATION STOPS

Axle oscillation stops are installed, one each side of
the axle. Each stop consists of a plate (1) secured
to the underside of the front axle support by two
flush fitting, socket head screws. Oscillation of
the axle causes the stop plate to contact the
projection (2) on the axle casing, so preventing
further movement. With the stop plates in position,
as shown, axle oscillation is 8°.
Extract the screws and remove the stop plates to
increase axle oscillation to 12°.
NOTE: If the oscillation stops are removed, ensure
that there is adequate clearance between the front
tyres and any part of the tractor with the axle fully
articulated. 346
3 - 122
Front wheel alignment

After resetting the track width, the front wheel
alignment may require adjustment. For correct
operation, the front wheels should be parallel.
Measure the distance (1) between the wheel rims
at hub height at the front of the wheels. Rotate
both front wheels 180° and check the
measurements again, this time at the rear of the
wheels (2). This will eliminate wheel rim run-out
errors.
The correct setting is 0 +/- 3.0 mm (0+/- 0.12 in.),
i. i. the measurement taken at the front of the rims
should be the same as the rear or not differ by more
than 3.0 mm (0.12 in.)
Should it be necessary to adjust the front wheel
alignment, proceed as follows:
347
Remove and discard the self-locking nut (2) on the
left-hand end of the track control rod and extract the
track rod end (1).
Loosen the lock nut (3) and screw the track rod end
into or out of the track rod to shorten or lengthen
the assembly, as required.
Re-insert the track rod end and, when the
alignment is correct, secure with a new self-locking
nut.
Tighten the nuts to the following torques:
Model Self-locking Locknut
Nut (2) (3)
All 118 Nm 196 Nm
(87 lbf. ft.) (145 lbf. ft) 348
3 - 123
ADJUSTING THE REAR WHEEL TRACKS

Your tractor may be fitted with a fixed flange type or
bar type rear axle. With a fixed flange type axle rear
wheel track adjustment is effected by changing the
wheel rim relative to the centre disc, the rim and/or
the disc relative to the axle hub or by inter-changing
the rear wheels.
With bar axles, the same method of adjustment
applies but with the added advantage of being able
to move the wheel hub on the axle shaft. This
provides an infinite range of adjustment between
the narrowest and widest settings.
349
! CAUTION !
350
! CAUTION !
and cause injury.
NOTE: There are four different designs of centre

disc dependent upon tyre size and tractor model.
The centre discs shown are as follows:
Square centre disc - variable track (Type 1)
Round centre disc - variable track (Type 2)
Cast centre disc - variable track (Type 3)
Round centre disc - fixed track (Type 4)
NOTE: Variable track wheels (type 1, 2 and 3), are
not available on tractors with 50 Km/h transmission. 351
The type of centre disc installed will affect the track
setting. Identify the type of centre disc fitted to your
tractor wheels, then refer to the following table and
Figure 219 to see the wheel rim and disc positions
necessary to achieve the required track setting.
! WARNING !
and at the recommended intervals.
352
3 - 124
The sectioned drawings shown illustrate the wheel

rim and disc positions relative to the hub at various
track settings.
IMPORTANT: When interchanging left and right-

hand wheel assemblies, ensure the “V” at the top of
the tyre tread remains pointing in the direction of
forward travel.
When refitting or adjusting a wheel, tighten the
bolts to the following torques. Re-check after
driving the tractor for 200 m (200 yards), after 1
hour and again after 8 hours operation and
thereafter at the 50 hour service intervals:
FLANGE AXLE
Disc to Hub Fixings
8 Stud/nuts x M18 250 Nm (184 lbf. ft)
Disc to rim fixings
Rim nuts x M16
250 Nm (184 lbf. ft)
Track Adjustment
Adjustable Rim (Types 1, 2 and 3)
Track
Disc types 1, 2 and 3
setting
Figure 349, 350 and 352
Figure. 353
A 1530 mm (60.2 in.)
B 1632 mm (64.2 in.)
C 1712 mm (67.4 in.)
D 1834 mm (72.2 in.)
E 1930 mm (75.9 in.)
F 2032 mm (80.0 in.)
G 2130 mm (83.8 in.)
H 2232 mm (87.8 in.)
NOTE: The track widths in Figure 353 are nominal

and may vary from that shown dependent on wheel
and tyre size.
NOTE: With the larger tyre sizes, the narrower
track settings may not be attainable due to minimal
clearance between tyres and fenders or equipment.
The dimensions shown in the chart relating to
Figure 353 219 are nominal and should be used as
a guide only. Track settings may vary dependent
upon wheel type and tyre size.
Fixed Rim (Type 4)
A minimal track adjustment of approximately
102 mm (4.0 in.) each side may be achieved by
interchanging wheel assemblies.
353
3 - 125
BAR AXLE (where fitted)
! CAUTION !
Introduction
Tractors equipped with a bar axle may have a steel
or cast centre disc (pos. 2, Figure 220) mounted on
a cast iron hub (3). The hub is clamped to the bar
axle (1). With a cast centre disc, the hub is an
integral part of the disc.
NOTE: Variable track wheels (type 1, 2 or 3), are
not available on tractors with 50 Km/h transmission.
Three bar axle lengths are available - 2490 mm
(98 in.), 2845 mm (112 in.) and 3022 mm (119 in.).
The wheel may be moved along the bar to provide
a range of track widths. Depending on tyre size, a
range of 190 mm (7.5 in.) per wheel or 380 mm
(15 in.) overall is available with the 98 inch axle.
If the 112 inch axle is installed, the range is 354
increased to 735 mm (29 in.) and with the 119 inch
axle, 914 mm (36 in.) overall.
Track width adjustment is effected by moving the
complete wheel/hub assemblies in or out on the
axle shaft. Additionally, repositioning the wheel rim
on the centre disc and/or the rim on the axle hub or
by inter-changing the rear wheels provides a
greater range of adjustment.
Tractor wheels are very heavy. Therefore it is
recommended that you do not remove them to
reposition the rims on the disc unless the track
setting required is outside the slide range of the bar
axle.
3 - 126
MOVING A WHEEL ON THE AXLE SHAFT

Block the front wheels and jack up and support the
rear axle.
Adjustment of the track setting is achieved by
sliding the complete wheel/hub assembly on the
axle shaft.
Loosen the two centre wedge bolts (1) Figure 221,
approximately 12 mm (0.5 in.). Remove the four
outer wedge bolts (2).
Clean the threads on the four bolts and the
threaded holes in the wedges before lubricating
and installing the removed bolts at (pos. 1,
Fig. 356). These bolts are used to push against the
wheel or hub to withdraw or “jack” the wedges from
the hub. Tighten these bolts evenly until the
wedges loosen in the hub and the wheel assembly
can be moved on the axle shaft.
! WARNING !
disc. Always tighten nuts to the specified torque 355
IMPORTANT: Do not use a torque greater than

407Nm (300 lbf. ft.). The use of penetrating oil
between the wedge, hub and axle shaft will be of
benefit. If difficulty is experienced, place a shaft
protector over the end of the axle shaft and strike
with a hammer to “shock” the wedge free.
! WARNING !
Take suitable precautions. This includes using
safety glasses against the possibility of possibility
of flying metal particles.
Set the wheel to the desired position on the shaft. 356

Remove the jack bolts and replace them in the
original holes (2, Figure 355).
3 - 127
Tighten all six wedge retaining bolts in increments

of 68 Nm (50 ft. lbs.) until the final torque setting is
achieved.
6 x M20 Bolts
(Cast centre) 300Nm (221 ft. lbs.) 6 x M22 Bolts
(Steel centre) 500Nm (369 ft. lbs)
IMPORTANT: The wedge bolts must be tightened

evenly.
Repeat the procedure on the other rear wheel,
making sure that both rear wheels are the same
distance from the ends of the axle shafts.
NOTE: Check the torque of all wedge retaining
bolts on each wheel hub after driving the tractor for
200m (200 yards), after 1 hour and 10 hours
operation and thereafter at the 50-hour service
intervals.
3 - 128
WHEEL ADJUSTMENT
The sectioned drawings shown in Figures 223, 224 and 225 illustrate the wheel rim and disc positions at
various track settings. In each table, two track width settings are quoted for each axle type. These are the
minimum and maximum achievable with both wheel assemblies moved fully in (toward the tractor) and fully
out (away from the tractor).
Track Adjustment Rim and Disc Position
2490 mm axle (98 in.)

1524-1828 mm (60-72 in.)
2845 mm axle (112 in.)

1524 - 2184 mm (60 - 86 in.)
3022 mm axle (119 in.)

1524 - 2388 mm (60 - 94 in.)
2490 mm axle (98 in.)

1727 - 2032 mm (68 - 80 in.)
2845 mm axle (112 in.)

1727 - 2388 mm (68 - 94 in.)
3022 mm axle (119 in.)

1727 - 2590 mm (68 - 102 in.)
2490 mm axle (98 in.)

1930 - 2235 mm (76 - 88 in.)
2845 mm axle (112 in.)

1930 - 2540 mm (76 - 100 in.)
3022 mm axle (119 in.)

1930 - 2744 mm (76 - 108 in.)
2490 mm axle (98 in.)

2133 - 2438 mm (84 - 96 in.)
2845 mm axle (112 in.)

2133 - 2794 mm (84 - 110 in.)
3022 mm axle (119 in.)

2133 - 2998 mm (84 - 118 in.)
357
Wheels with steel centre disc bolted to flange on the rim
NOTE: With the larger width tyres, it may not be NOTE: The track widths in Figure 357 are nominal
possible tomove the wheels to the narrower and may vary from that shown dependent on wheel
settings due to limited clearance between the tyre and tyre size.
and fender.
3 - 129
2490 mm axle (98 in.)

1524 - 1880 mm (60 - 74 in.)
2845 mm axle (112 in.)

1524 - 2235 mm (60 - 88 in.)
3022 mm axle (119 in.)

1524 - 2438 mm (60 - 96 in.)
2490 mm axle (98 in.)

1930 - 2286 mm (76 - 90 in.)
2845 mm axle (112 in.)

1930 - 2641 mm (76 - 104 in.)
3022 mm axle (119 in.)

1930 - 2844 mm (76 - 112 in.)
358
Wheels with steel centre disc welded to flange on the rim
NOTE: With the larger width tyres, it may not be
possible tomove the wheels to the narrower
settings due to limited clearance between the tyre
and fender.
NOTE: The track widths in Figure 357 are nominal
and may vary from that shown dependent on wheel
and tyre size.
Rear Wheel Hardware Torque Values (with Steel
Centre disc)
Disc to Hub Fixings
10 x M22 Bolt 500 Nm (369 lbf. ft)
Disc to Rim Nuts

All wheels (M16)2 50 Nm (184 lbf. ft)
Split Wedge Bolts
6 x M22 Bolt 500 Nm (369 lbf. ft)
3 - 130
2490 mm axle (98 in.)

1524 - 1880 mm (60 - 74 in.)
2845 mm axle (112 in.)

1524 - 2235 mm (60 - 88 in.)
3022 mm axle (119 in.)

1524 - 2438 mm (60 - 96 in.)
2490 mm axle (98 in.)

1930 - 2286 mm (76 - 90 in.)
2845 mm axle (112 in.)

1930 - 2641 mm (76 - 104 in.)
3022 mm axle (119 in.)

1930 - 2844 mm (76 - 112 in.)
359
Wheels with cast centre disc
NOTE: The track widths in Figure 359 are nominal When refitting or adjusting a wheel, tighten the
and may vary from that shown dependent on wheel bolts to the following torques. Re-check after
and tyre size. driving the tractor for 200 m (200 yards), after
1 hour and 8 hours operation and thereafter at the
NOTE: With the larger width tyres, it may not be 50 hour service intervals.
possible tomove the wheels to the narrower Wheel Hardware Torque Values (with Cast
settings due to limited clearance between the tyre Centre disc)
and fender. Disc to rim nuts
IMPORTANT: When interchanging left and right- (All wheels) (M16 nuts) 250 Nm (184 lbf. ft)
hand wheel assemblies, ensure the “V” at the top of Split Wedge Bolts
the tyre tread remains pointing in the direction of
6 x M20 Bolt 300 Nm (221 lbf. ft)
forward travel.
! CAUTION !
and cause injury.
! WARNING !
3 - 131
360
DUAL REAR WHEELS (where fitted)
Dual rear wheels are available as a factory installed The Figure shows a typical wheel installation.
option or dealer installed accessory, in conjunction The inner (cast) wheel (4) is clamped onto the bar
with the 2845 mm (112 in.) and 3022 mm (119 in.) axle (5). The outer (steel) wheel (1) is attached to
bar axles equipped with cast iron or steel wheels. the hub by eight bolts (3). The hub is clamped to
The dual wheel kit consists of an additional pair of the bar axle by the four bolts (2) in a similar manner
steel wheels, hubs and wheel-to-hub attaching to the cast, inner wheel.
hardware.
When mounting wheels, the clearance between the
Customers may wish to mount their existing wheels tyres on the inner wheels and the closest part of the
to make a dual wheel installation. In this instance, tractor must be no less than 100 mm (4 in.).
provided that the existing wheels have the same Additionally, a minimum clearance of 100 mm
mounting dimensions, they will only need to obtain
the hub assembly. (4 in.) must be maintained between the closest
points of the tyre walls. The clearance should be
checked with the tractor correctly ballasted and the
IMPORTANT: Dual wheels are intended for attached implement in the raised position.
flotation. Use of dual wheels under heavy traction
conditions could cause severe transmission
overload and is not approved.
Before the outer wheels can be installed, the inner
wheels must be adjusted to the minimum attainable
track width, as described in the previous text.
3 - 132
Moving the Outer Wheel on the Axle Shaft

Each wedge is retained in the hub by two M22 bolts
which pass through the hub and screw into the
wedge on the inside of the wheel. To loosen the
wedges, remove the bolts from their clamp
position (1) and replace in the threaded holes (2).
Tighten the bolts evenly until the wedges are
loosened enough to allow the wheel to be moved
on the axle shaft. After moving the wheel, replace
the bolts in their original positions (1) and re-tighten
to clamp the wheel to the axle shaft.
Tighten all wedge retaining bolts in increments
of 68Nm (50 ft. lbs.) until a final torque of 500Nm
(369 lbf. ft.) is achieved.
Repeat the procedure on the other rear wheel,
making sure that both rear wheels are the same 361
distance from the ends of the axle shafts.
NOTE: Check the torque of all wedge retaining

bolts on each wheel hub after driving the tractor for
200m (200 yards), after 1 hour and 10 hours
operation and thereafter at the 50-hour service
intervals.
(112 and 119 in. Axle)
Disc to Hub Fixings
10 x M22 Bolt 500 Nm (369 lbf. ft)
Split Wedge Bolts
4 x M22 Bolt 500 Nm (369 lbf. ft)
Disc to Rim Bolts
All wheels (M16 nuts) 250 Nm (184 lbf. ft)
IMPORTANT: Do not use a torque greater than 407

Nm (300 ft. lbs.) on the jack bolts. The use of
penetrating oil between the wedge, hub and axle
shaft will be of benefit. If difficulty is experienced,
place a shaft protector over the end of the axle
shaft and strike with a hammer to “shock” the
wedge free.
! WARNING !
Take suitable precautions. This includes using
safety glasses against the possibility of flying metal
particles.
3 - 133
BALLASTING AND TYRES

GENERAL The amount of ballast required is affected by:
Maximum tractor performance is dependent upon
proper ballasting and tyre selection. Maximum z Weight of tractor
efficiency will be achieved when tractor weight is
correct for the application. z Soil and traction conditions
The tyres selected for your tractor must be able to
support the weight of the tractor and equipment z Type of implement: fully-mounted, semi-
and must also be able to provide adequate traction mounted or trailed
to utilize the tractor horsepower and turn it into
useful drawbar horsepower.
z Working speed
Always maintain the correct air pressure in the tyre
to carry the load. Do not over inflate tyres.
z Tractor horsepower load
NOTE: Radial tyres will work with lower air
pressures. They will show up to 20% sidewall z Type and size of tyres
deflection or bulge when correctly inflated.
FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION SYSTEM z Tyre Pressure
Do not use more ballast than needed. Excess
IMPORTANT: On tractors fitted with front axle ballast should be removed when it is not required.
suspension, correct ballasting is essential to
optimise suspension operation, particularly when
using heavy rear mounted equipment. For this
application, sufficient front ballast must be added
by the use of water weights in preference to liquid
ballast in the tyres.
In certain conditions, with insufficient front weight
added, suspension operation may become
disabled and error code L7 displayed. Stop the
tractor, switch off the engine and restart again to
clear the error code and enable the suspension. If
the error code re-occurs, then further front weight
should be added. Ensure that maximum axle and
vehicle weights are not exceeded.
Factors Affecting Tyre Performance
z Correct air pressure for the load
z Correct wheel slip
z Correct tyre size for expected load
z Correct fill of liquid ballast
z Maintaining equal tyre pressure in both tyres on

a given axle.
Selecting Ballast
When tractor horsepower loads vary, the optimum
weight of the tractor will change. This means that
ballast may have to be added or removed to
maintain the best tractor performance.
Proper ballast will greatly improve tractor operation
and ride.
3 - 134
Too little ballast: For optimum performance and efficiency, two wheel
drive tractors should be ballasted so that
z Rough ride approximately one third of the total tractor weight
(less implement) is on the front wheels. Four wheel
drive tractors should be ballasted so the weight on
z Excessive wheel slip the front wheels is approximately 40 - 45% of the
total tractor weight.
z Power loss
Add additional front end ballast, as required, for
stability during operation and transport. Ballasting
z Tyre wear of the front end may not always provide adequate
stability if the tractor is operated at high speed on
z Excessive fuel consumption rough terrain. Reduce tractor speed and exercise
caution under these conditions.
z Lower productivity When using front mounted implements it may be
necessary to add weight to the rear wheels to
maintain traction and stability.
Too much ballast: Ballast Limitations
Ballast should be limited by the tyre capacity or
z Higher maintenance costs tractor capacity. Each tyre has a recommended
carrying capacity which should not be exceeded,
z Increased driveline wear (see page 3 - 142).
If a greater amount of weight is needed for traction,
z Power loss larger tyres should be used.
Ballast can be added by bolting on cast iron
z Increased soil compaction weights or by adding liquid calcium chloride in the
tyres. Bolt-on cast iron weights are recommended
z Excessive fuel consumption because they can easily be removed when not
needed.
z Lower productivity
IMPORTANT: Do not exceed the tractor gross
vehicle weight shown on the following page.
For maximum performance in heavy draft This can cause an overload condition that may
conditions weight should be added to the tractor in invalidate the warranty and may exceed the load
the form of liquid ballast, cast iron weights or a rating of the tyres. The maximum recommended
combination of both. gross vehicle weight is the weight of the tractor plus
Front end ballast may be required for stability and ballast plus any mounted equipment such as
steering control when weight is transferred from the sprayers, tanks etc. in the raised position. See the
front to the rear wheels as rear mounted implement following tables:
is raised by the tractor 3-point hitch.
When a rear mounted implement is raised to the
transport position, the weight on the front wheels
should be at least 20% of total tractor weight.
! CAUTION !
Additional front ballast may be needed when
transporting large 3-point mounted equipment.
Always drive slowly over rough terrain, no matter
how much front ballast is used.
3 - 135
Maximum Vehicle Weights and Axle Loads IMPORTANT: For four wheel drive vehicles, the
figures shown in the foregoing table are for
continuous operation. For intermittent operation, the
front axle loading (including loaded loader bucket)
Maximum Gross Vehicle may be increased to the following levels, provided
Weight that ground speed does not exceed 8 km/h (5 MPH)
All models and the track width settings are maintained within
kg lb.
the limits shown:
12000 26455
IMPORTANT: Braking regulations in some Maximum Front Axle Loading - 4WD

countries may impose lower gross vehicle weight (Restricted Operation)*
limits for road transport than the figures quoted in
the above table. All models Track Adjustment
Individual axles (front and rear) are also subject to kg lb. mm In.
weight limitations, as follows:
8000 17636 1727-2032 68-80
*Maximum track width 1829 mm (72.0 in.).

Maximum Front Axle
Loading -
Two wheel drive#
All models Maximum Rear Axle Loading
kg lb.
All models kg lb.
4170 9193
9500 20943
NOTE: Total rear axle weight is measured with only

the rear wheels on the scales inclusive of liquid and
Maximum Front Axle cast iron ballast and with mounted equipment in the
Loading - 4WD# raised position.
(Continuous Operation)
All models
kg lb.
5200 11463
# Includes a front end loader in the raised position

but with no load in the bucket.
3 - 136
CAST IRON WEIGHTS

(where fitted)
Rear Wheel Weights
Up to three cast iron weights (1) may be added to
each rear wheel, as follows:
Max. Weight per Total Weight

Wheel per Axle
All models 1 x 227 kg (500 lb.) 454 kg (1000 lb.)
IMPORTANT: It is not recommended to fit rear

wheel weights on tractors operating at speeds in 362
excess of 40 k/mh (25 MPH).
FRONT WEIGHTS
45 kg (99 lb.) wafer weights are available as a set
of 6 or 8, mounted on a substantial cast iron carrier.
The maximum recommended front ballast weight is
as follows:
Weight Hook Carrier Total

Pack Weight
6 x 45 kg 114 kg 200 kg 584 kg

6 x 99 lb. 251 lb. 441 lb. 1287 lb.
8 x 45 kg - 200 kg 560 kg
8 x 99 lb. - 441 lb. 1234 lb.
363
1 x 500 kg integral 200 kg 700 kg
1 x 1102 lb. integral 441 lb. 1543 lb.
*2 x 250 kg 1 x 500 kg 200 kg 1200 kg
2 x 551 lb. 1 x 1102 kg 441 lb. 2645 lb.
*Not available for 2WD models.

In addition to the wafer weights, a 450 kg (992 lb.)
chassis weight may be fitted below the front of the
tractor behind the wafer weights. The chassis
weight is not compatible with 2WD models.
IMPORTANT: Before adding front weight see

reference to front axle suspension on page 3 - 134.
364
3 - 137
Installing Wafer Weights

To install the weights, hook the upper part of the
weight over the lip on the carrier and then slide to
the centre of the carrier. A recess in the lower part
of the weight will interlock with a locating pad
beneath the carrier. Add more weights as
necessary and clamp together using the long bolts
and retaining plates supplied. Use the correct
length of bolt to clamp the weights together and
tighten the retaining nut to a torque of 169 Nm
(125 lbf. ft.).
! CAUTION !
The tractor must not be operated unless all bolts
and clamps are in position with the bolts tightened 365
to 169 Nm (125 lbf.ft.). Recheck the bolt torques
after 50 hours of operation if the bolts have been
disturbed for any reason.
To remove the weights, reverse the above

procedure.
When the front towhook is installed, the weight
pack is secured by a pin passing through the rear of
the towhook segment into the weight carrier. Do not
operate the tractor without this pin installed and the
retaining “R” clip (1) inserted to prevent the pin from
becoming dislodged.
366
If the front weights and weight carrier are not

installed, a tow pin is available for bolting directly to
the front axle support.
367
3 - 138
Liquid Tyre Ballasting

Filling the front and rear tyres with liquid ballast is a
convenient method of adding weight. A solution of
calcium chloride and water is recommended. This
gives a low freezing point and provides a higher
density than plain water.
IMPORTANT: In some countries it is illegal to use

calcium chloride as a ballast solution for tyres.
Ensure that you comply with the legal requirements
of your country. Use cast iron weights as an
alternative to liquid ballast.
NOTE: When filling a tyre with calcium chloride/
water solution the valve should be at the highest
point on the wheel. The valve should be at the
lowest point when checking or adjusting air
pressure if the tyre contains liquid ballast. Special
equipment is required to water ballast tyres.
See your authorised dealer or tyre supplier for
details.
The following tables show the quantity of calcium
chloride and water required for each tyre size
option and is based on 0.6 kg of calcium chloride
per litre of water. The figures in the table will give a
75% fill of the tyre. This calcium chloride/water
solution will give protection from freezing down to
an ambient temperature of -50°C (-58°F).
! WARNING !
When mixing the ballast solution it is imperative the
calcium chloride flakes are added to the water and
the solution stirred until the calcium chloride is
dissolved.
Never add water to calcium chloride as
considerable heat is generated. If the flakes should
contact the eyes, wash the eyes immediately with
clean, cold water for at least 5 minutes. Consult a
doctor as soon as possible.
NOTE: Liquid ballasting of front tyres on a 2WD

installation is not recommended.
3 - 139
Front tyre Ballast
Tyre Size Water Calcium- Total Water Calcium- Total

chloride Weight U.S. Chloride Weight of
Of solution solution
per tyre per tyre
Litres kg kg gallons lb. lb.
16.9R - 28 219 131 350 58 290 774
480/70R - 28 222 133 355 59 294 785
540/65R - 28 257 154 411 68 340 907
600/65R - 28 344 206 550 91 454 1213
14.9R - 30 174 104 278 46 231 616
16.9R - 30 230 138 368 61 304 812
480/70R - 30 234 140 374 62 309 825
540/65R - 30 273 163 436 72 361 965
600/60R - 30 309 185 494 82 409 1092
14.9 - 34 193 115 308 51 255 680
320/85R - 34 136 81 217 36 180 481
380/85R - 34 188 112 300 50 248 663
420/85R - 34 270 162 432 71 357 952
320/85R - 38 116 69 185 31 154 411
Rear Tyre Ballast
Tyre Size Water Calcium- Total Water Calcium- Total

chloride Weight of U.S. Chloride Weight of
solution solution
Litres kg per tyre kg gallons lb. per tyre
lb.
20.8R - 38 429 257 686 113 567 1513
580/70R - 38 467 280 747 124 617 1648
650/65R - 38 510 306 816 135 674 1800
650/75R - 38 591 354 945 156 781 2285
710/70R - 38 648 388 1036 171 856 2174
18.4R - 42 352 211 563 93 465 1241
20.8R - 42 453 271 724 120 599 1599
580/70R - 42 420 252 672 111 555 1481
620/70R - 42 496 297 793 131 655 1749
650/65R - 42 526 315 841 139 694 1853
710/60R - 42 577 346 923 153 763 2036
14.9R - 46 245 147 392 65 324 865
420/80R - 46 244 146 390 65 323 862
480/80R - 46 359 215 574 95 474 1265
520/85R - 46 439 263 702 116 580 1548
18.4R - 46 395 237 632 104 522 1393
320/90R - 50 153 91 244 40 202 539
320/90R - 54 162 97 259 43 214 571
3 - 140
TYRE INFLATION z Ensure the rim is clean and free of rust or

damage. Do not weld, braze, otherwise repair
or use a damaged rim.
Upon receiving your tractor, check the air pressure
in the tyres and re-check every 50 hours or weekly.
The tyres fitted to your tractor may be of the tubed z Do not inflate a tyre unless the rimis mounted
or tubeless type. on the tractor or is secured so that it will not
When checking tyre pressures, inspect the tyres for move if the tyre or rim should suddenly fail.
damaged tread and side walls. Neglected damage
will lead to early tyre failure. z When fitting a new or repaired tyre, use a clip-
Inflation pressure affects the amount of weight that on valve adaptor with a remote gauge that
a tyre may carry. allows the operator to stand clear of the tyre
Do not exceed the recommended load for the tyre while inflating it. Use a safety cage, if available.
pressures in use, see the following page for details.
Do not over or under inflate the tyres.
! DANGER !
Inflating or servicing tyres can be dangerous.
Whenever possible, trained personnel should be
called in to service or install tyres. In any event, to
avoid the possibility of serious or fatal injury, follow
the safety precautions below:
z Never attempt tyre repairs on a public road or

highway.
z Do not inflate steering tyres above the

manufacturer’s maximum pressure shown on
the tyre or beyond the maximum shown in the
Tyre Pressure and Load tables if the tyre is not
marked with the maximum pressure.
z Do not re-inflate a tyre that has been run flat or

seriously under-inflated until it has been
inspected for damage by a qualified person.
z Torque wheel to axle nuts to specification after

re-installing the wheel. Check nut tightness
daily until torque stabilises.
z Refer to tractor weighting section before adding

ballast to the tyres.
z Ensure the jack is placed on a firm, level

surface.
z Ensure the jack has adequate capacity to lift

your tractor.
z Use jack stands or other suitable blocking to

support the tractor while repairing tyres.
z Do not put any part of your body under the

tractor or start the engine while the tractor is on
the jack.
z Never hit a tyre or rim with a hammer.
3 - 141
TYRE PRESSURES AND PERMISSIBLE LOADS

(Radial tyres)
Radial tyre performance is denoted by a Load
Index and Speed Symbol replacing the Ply Rating
commonly found on cross ply tyres. Figure 368
shows typical markings to be found on the side wall
of radial ply tyres.
NOTE: Radial tyres will have a speed symbol of
.A8. and/or .B. which identifies the maximum speed
rating for that tyre. Tyres marked with the A8
symbol are suitable for speeds up to 40km/h
(25 MPH), those marked with a “B” symbol may be
operated at speeds of 50km/h (31 MPH).
The maximum load that may be carried by the tyre
is dependent upon the Load Index shown on the 368
side wall. In the following charts the loads given are
for individual tyres operated at speeds up to 40 or
50 km/h (25 or 31 MPH). The two right-hand
columns indicate the maximum permissible load
per tyre at speeds of 40 or 50 km/h (25 or 31 MPH).
1. Load Index
2. Speed Symbol for 40 km/h (25 MPH)
! WARNING ! 3. Speed Symbol for 50 km/h (31 MPH)
When operating at high road speeds, tyre pres- 4. Maximum load/inflation pressure at 40 km/h
sures and maximum load capacities advised by the (25 MPH)
tyre manufacturer should be strictly adhered to.
Consult your authorised dealer or tyre supplier for 5. Old ply rating mark
the correct pressures and loads for the tyres fitted
to your tractor.
Inflation Pressure - bar 40 50

km/h km/h
Tyre Size Load
Index 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8
Load Capacity per TYRE (kg) - 30km/h
20.8R x 38 153A8 - - - - 2210 2410 2460 2865 3140 3350 3350 -
(150B) - - - - 2430 2650 2900 3150 3450 3650 3650
580/70R38 155A8 3095 3355 3615 3875 3875
(155B) 3095 3355 3615 3875 I- 3875
650/75R38 169A8 3800 - 4250 - 4800 5200 5800 6200 - - 6200
(169B) 3800 - 4250 - 4800 5200 5800 6200 - - 6200
710/70R38 171A8 4190 4560 4930 5300 5515 5725 5940 6150 - - 6150
171B) 4190 4560 4930 5300 5515 5725 5940 6150 - - 6150
20.8R x 42 155A8 - - 2275 2550 2800 3050 3320 3550 3550
(152B) - - - - 2500 2800 3075 3350 3650 3875 3875
18.4R x 46 158A8 2750 - 3470 - 4000 4120 4400 4500 - - 4250
(158B) 2750 - 3470 - 4000 4120 4400 4500 - - 4250
IMPORTANT: The above table provides an example of the maximum load limitations that occur at various tyre
pressures on a representative range of rear tyre sizes available for your tractor. These figures are per tyre
and should be used for guidance only. For exact information regarding inflation pressures and loads for your
particular tyres, consult your authorised dealer.
3 - 142
Inflation Pressure - lbf/in2 25 31

MPH MPH
Tyre Size Load- 15 17 20 23 26 29 31 35 37 40
index
Load Capacity per TYRE (lbs.) - 18.6 MPH
20.8R x 38 153A8 4872 5313 5423 6316 6922 7385 7385
(150B) 5357 5842 6393 6944 7605 8046 8046
580/70R38 155A8 6823 7396 7969 8542 8542
(155B) 6823 7396 7969 8542 8542
650/75R38 169A8 8377 9369 10582 11463 12786 13668 13668 -
(169B) 8377 - 9369 - 10582 11463 12786 13668 13668
710/70R38 171A8 9237 10251 10868 11684 12158 12621 13095 13558 13558 -
(171B) 9237 10251 10868 11684 12158 12621 13095 13558 13558
20.8R x 42 155A8 - - - 5015 5621 6172 6723 7319 7826 7826
(152B) - - - 5511 6172 6779 7385 8046 8542 8542
18.4R x 46 158A8 6062 7649 - 8818 9082 9700 9920 - - 9369
(158B) 6062 - 7649 - 8818 9082 9700 9920 - - 9369
IMPORTANT: The above table provides an

example of the maximum load limitations that occur
at various tyre pressures on a representative range
of rear tyre sizes available for your tractor.
These figures are per tyre and should be used for
guidance only. For exact information regarding
inflation pressures and loads for your particular
tyres, consult your authorised dealer.
SYMBOL MARKED RADIAL TYRES
(North America Only)
Conventional sized radial agricultural tractor drive
tyres are marked with *, ** or *** symbols.
The maximum load rating for tyres marked with a *
is calculated at 18 psi inflation pressure. Tyres
marked with ** or *** have maximum load carrying
capacities at pressures of 24 psi and 30 psi
respectively.
For information regarding specific inflation

pressures and load carrying capacities for the tyres
fitted to your tractor, consult your authorised dealer.
1. Load symbol
369
2. Maximum recommended load at marked
pressure
3. Maximum load at 20 MPH
4. Previous ply ratings
3 - 143
NOTES:
3 - 144
SECTION 4
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE
GENERAL INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION WARNING SYMBOLS
This section gives full details of the service A number of maintenance items are represented by
procedures necessary to maintain your tractor at symbols that may appear in the Dot Matrix Display.
peak efficiency. The lubrication and maintenance For more information see page 2 - 71.
chart on page 4 - 10 provides a ready reference to
these requirements, each operation being CONTENTS
numbered for easy reference.
The subjects covered in this section are as listed
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS below. A full index is provided at the back of this
book.
Read and observe all safety precautions listed in
“Servicing the Tractor” in the Introduction section at Page Subject
the front of this Manual. Fuelling ............................................................ 4 - 2
NOTE: Dispose of used filters and fluids properly.
Guard removal ................................................. 4 - 5
Lubrication and maintenance chart ................. 4 - 9
! CAUTION ! Lubricants and coolants ................................. 4 - 10
Do not check, lubricate, service or make
adjustments to the tractor with the engine running. When the warning symbol appears ............... 4 - 11
10-hour/daily service ..................................... 4 - 14
DURING THE FIRST 50 HOURS OPERATION 50-hour service .............................................. 4 - 17
In addition to the regular maintenance operations 100-hour service ............................................4 - 28
listed, check the following items every 10 hours or
daily during the first 50 hours of operation: 300-hour service ............................................4 - 29
z Check transmission/rear axle/hydraulics oil 600-hour service ............................................4 - 33

level 1200-hour/12 month service .......................... 4 - 40
z Wheel nuts for tightness 1200-hour/24 month service .......................... 4 - 46

Every 3 years ................................................. 4 - 54
z Front axle hub oil levels
General maintenance - as required ............... 4 - 55
IMPORTANT: Park the tractor on level ground and, Cleaning the tractor ....................................... 4 - 71
where applicable, extend all cylinders before
checking oil levels. With some wheel equipment Protecting Electronic Systems ....................... 4 - 72
fitted, it may be necessary to raise the front or rear Storing the tractor .......................................... 4 - 73
of the tractor to ensure it is level before checking
the oil.
4-1
SECTION 4 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE
THE FIRST 50-HOUR SERVICE LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHART

At the first 50-hour service, ensure that the service The chart on page 4 - 10 lists the intervals when
operations are carried out by your authorised routine checks, lubrication, service and/or
dealer. The items are listed in the “First 50-Hour adjustments should be performed. Use the chart as
Service” checklist in Section 8. a quick reference guide when servicing the tractor.
The operations follow the chart.
Both 50 Hour Service sheets should be signed by
yourself and your dealer and one copy retained by
the dealer for their records (Dealer’s copy). FUELLING THE TRACTOR
IMPORTANT: Items listed in the first 50-hour check ! CAUTION !

are important. If not performed, early component
When handling diesel fuel, observe the following:
failure and reduced tractor life may result.
Do not smoke around diesel fuel. Under no
PREVENTING SYSTEM CONTAMINATION circumstances should gasoline, alcohol, gasohol or
To prevent contamination when changing oils, dieselhol (a mixture of diesel fuel and alcohol) be
added to diesel fuel because of increased fire or
filters, etc., always clean the area around filler explosion risks. In a closed container such as a fuel
caps, level and drain plugs, dipsticks and filters
prior to removal. Before connecting remote tank they are more explosive than pure gasoline.
Do not use these blends. Additionally, dieselhol is
cylinders, ensure that oil contained within them is not approved due to possible inadequate
clean, has not degenerated due to long storage
and is of the correct grade. lubrication of the fuel injection system.
To prevent dirt entry during greasing, wipe dirt from z Clean the filler cap area and keep it free of
the grease fittings before greasing. Wipe excess debris.
grease from the fitting after greasing.
FLEXIBILITY OF MAINTENANCE INTERVALS z Fill the tank at the end of each day to reduce
overnight condensation.
The intervals listed in the lubrication and
maintenance chart are guidelines to be used when
operating in normal working conditions. z Never take the cap off or refuel with the engine
running.
Adjust the intervals for environmental and working
conditions. Intervals should be shortened under
adverse (wet, muddy, sandy, extremely dusty) z Keep control of the fuel nozzle while filling the
working conditions. fuel tank.
ENGINE FUEL INJECTOR MAINTENANCE z Don’t fill the tank to capacity. Allow room for
expansion. If the original fuel tank cap is lost,
IMPORTANT: The fuel injectors on your tractor are replace it with a genuine original equipment cap
electronically controlled and do not require periodic and tighten securely.
servicing or adjustment.
z Wipe up spilled fuel immediately.
4-2
FUEL REQUIREMENTS Do not use Number 2-D fuel at temperatures below

-7 °C (20 °F). The cold temperatures will cause the
The quality of fuel used is an important factor for fuel to thicken, which may prevent the engine from
dependable performance and satisfactory engine running. (If this happens, contact your dealer.)
life. Fuels must be clean, well-refined, and non-
corrosive to fuel system parts. Be sure to use fuel To be sure that a fuel meets the required
of a known quality from a reputable supplier. properties, enlist the aid of a reputable fuel oil
supplier. The responsibility for clean fuel lies with
Use Number 2-D in temperatures above -7 °C the fuel supplier as well as the fuel user.
(20 °F).
Use Number 1-D in temperatures below -7 °C FUEL STORAGE
(20 °F). Take the following precautions to ensure that stored
To obtain optimum combustion and minimum fuel is kept free of dirt, water and other
engine wear, the fuel selected for use should contaminants.
conform to the application and property
requirements outlined in the following “Diesel Fuel z Store fuel in black iron tanks, not galvanized
Selection Chart”. tanks, as the zinc coating will react with the fuel
DIESEL FUEL SELECTION CHART and form compounds that will contaminate the
injection pump and injectors.
General Final Cetane Sulphur z Install bulk storage tanks away from direct
Fuel Boiling Rating Content sunlight and angle them slightly so sediment in
Classification Point (max) (min) (max) the tanks will settle away from the outlet pipe.
Nr. 1-D 288 °C 40* 0.3%
(550 °F) z To facilitate moisture and sediment removal,
provide a drain plug at the lowest point at the
Nr. 2-D 357 °C 40 0.5% end opposite the outlet pipe.
(675 °F)
z If fuel is not filtered from the storage tank, put a
NOTE: When long periods of idling or cold weather funnel with a fine mesh screen in the fuel tank
conditions below 0 °C (32 °F) are encountered or filler neck when refuelling.
when continuously operating at an altitude above
5.000 ft. (1500 m) use Number 1-D fuel. z Arrange fuel purchases so summer grade fuels
are not held over and used in winter.
*When continually operating at low temperatures or
high altitude, a minimum cetane rating of 45 is
required.
Using diesel fuel with sulphur content above 0.5%
requires more frequent oil changes as noted in the
maintenance schedule.
The use of diesel fuel with a sulphur content above
1.3% is not recommended.
For the best fuel economy, use Number 2-D fuel
whenever temperatures allow.
4-3
FILLING THE FUEL TANK
1. Clean the area around the fuel cap (1) to

prevent dirt from entering tank and
contaminating the fuel.
2. Remove the cap and place in a clean area
during refuelling. The cap is attached to the fuel
tank by a chain to prevent loss.
3. After filling the tank, replace and tighten the fuel
cap.
NOTE: The right-hand tank is filled via the filler on
the left-hand tank.
370
Fuel filler cap
The fuel filler cap on your tractor is of the vented
type, should it become lost or damaged always
replace it with one of the same type. Consult your
authorised dealer.
Fuel Capacity
Left tank 330 litres (87.1 U.S. galls)
Right tank 110 litres (29.0 U.S. galls)
4-4
PROTECTIVE GUARDS
! CAUTION !
Guards are fitted for your protection, if they are
removed for access to service items, they must be
replaced before operating the tractor.
ENGINE HOOD
For safety the hood must be closed and correctly
latched before operating the tractor.
The hood is hinged at the rear to provide easy
access to the engine area for routine maintenance.
Two gas struts (located under the hood) assist in
raising the hood to either of two positions. A safety
stay holds the hood in the selected position.
To open the hood, depress the release button (2),
and raise the hood using the grab handle (1).
The gas struts will take over and raise the hood to
the first position secured by the nylon retaining
strap located at the front of the hood. All routine
maintenance operations may be performed with the
hood raised to this position. 371
Additional guards are provided to prevent the

fingers being trapped by the fan/air conditioner
drive belt when the hood is lowered to the operating
position.
Should it become necessary to raise the hood to its
full extent, unclip the retaining strap (1) from its
anchor bracket and, holding firmly onto the strap,
allow the hood to raise fully on the gas struts.
NOTE: Raising the hood to full height is only

necessary for service requirements that are best
left to your dealer.
To close the hood, pull it fully down ensuring the
retaining strap has been re-fitted to the anchor
bracket. An audible click will signal engagement of
the locking catch. Check that the hood is properly
closed.
372
4-5
Engine Side Panels

The engine side panels are secured by two turn
lock screws (1). Using a screwdriver with a broad
blade, turn the screws 1/4 turn anti-clockwise to
release. Hold the panel at the centre, pull outwards
and slide towards the front of the tractor until it
clears the front and rear support pins.
To refit the side panels, reverse the above
procedure ensuring both screws are locked before
operating the tractor.
373
RIGHT-HAND FOOTSTEPS
The right-hand footsteps on your tractor are
mounted on a hinged support bracket.
For improved access to the hydraulic oil filter(s),
battery, etc., the footsteps can be quickly lowered
by releasing the two locking catches (1).
To release the catches, lift and rotate to the
horizontal position.
Pull the steps outward from the top and allow to
drop downwards until fully lowered.
When raising the steps to the working position,
ensure both catches are securely locked.
374
4-6
RELAY AND FUSE PANEL COVER

The moulded panel on the right hand side of the
cab may be easily removed for service.
Remove the four screws (1) and remove the panel
to gain access to the relays and connectors.
375
Fuse Box Cover
To gain access to the fuses, undo the two retaining
screws (1) from the panel on the right-hand side of
the cab.
376
Maxi Fuse Box
The maxi fuses are mounted on the battery support
frame. To access the fuses, lower the right-hand
footsteps and release the battery cover by turning
the locking catch (1) anti-clockwise. Lift the cover
from the two guide pins which retain and support
the rear of the cover.
When replacing the battery cover ensure the two
slots at the rear engage with the support lugs on
the carrier frame.
377
4-7
LUBRICANTS AND COOLANTS

Lubricants
The correct engine oil viscosity grade is dependent upon ambient temperature. Refer to the chart on the right
when selecting oil for your tractor engine.
NOTE: In areas where prolonged periods of extreme temperatures are encountered, local lubricant practices
are acceptable; such as the use of SAE 5W30 in extreme low temperatures or SAE 50 in extreme high
temperatures.
Sulphur in Fuel
The engine oil and filter change period are shown in section 4. However, locally available fuel may have a
high sulphur content, in which case the engine oil and filter change period should be adjusted as follows:
Sulphur Content Oil Change Period
Below 0.5 Normal
From 0.5-1.0 Half the normal
Above 1.0 One quarter normal
NOTE: The use of fuel with a sulphur content
above 1.3% is not recommended.
Coolants
To reduce the amount of deposits and corrosion,
the water used in the cooling system must comply
with the following values.
Total Hardness: Chloride: Sulphate:
300 ppm 100 ppm 100 ppm
IMPORTANT: See Operation 30 page 4 - 46,

regarding use of coolant inhibitor where the above
mentioned antifreeze is not available. In those hot
countries where antifreeze is not available, use
clean water only.
NOTE: See Operation 30, page 4 - 46, for further
details before topping up or changing the engine
coolant.
4-8
LUBRICANT AND COOLANT SPECIFICATION
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND Akcela International Approximate

APPLICATIONS Specification Specification Quantities
Engine Oil No. 1 Engine Oil ACEA E7/E5 15 Litres
SAE 15W-40 MS 1121 API CI-4/CH-4 (3.96 U.S. galls)
SAE 10W-30 CUMMINS
CES 20078/77/76/72
Transmission, Rear Axle and Nexplore MAT 3525 100 Litres

Hydraulic System Oil (26.4 U.S. galls)
SAE 10W30
- Full Powershift (All models)
Front Wheel Drive Oil Nexplore MAT 3525 14 Litres
SAE 10W30 (14.8 U.S. qts)
- Axle (All models) 2.15 Litres
- Hubs (less brakes, per hub) (2.3 U.S. qts)
- Hubs (with brakes, per hub)
Front PTO Gearbox Oil Nexplore MAT 3525 As Required

SAE 10W30
Engine Radiator Coolant Premium Ethylene glycol 26 Litres

System Capacity Antifreeze (6.9 U.S. galls)
*Water MS1710 50 %
*Coolant* 50 %
Air Conditioning Compressor Oil N/A PAG-E13, ISO100 As Required

Low Viscosity Oil SP10 Viscosity
Brake Oil LHM Fluid ISO 7308 As Required
Grease Fittings and Bearings Multi-Purpose NLG1 2-251 EP-M As Required

Grease 251 HEP
NOTE: Use antifreeze (50%) plus clean, soft water (50%). In order to reduce deposits and corrosion, water
used in the cooling system should not exceed the following limits:
4-9
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHART
Change
Adjust
Check
Clean
Service Operation Page
Drain
Lube
Interval No. Maintenance Requirement No.
When a warning symbol 1 Engine air cleaner outer element X X 4-11
appears 2 Fuel filter/water separator X X 4-13
Every 10 hours or daily 3 Engine coolant level X X 4-14
4 Engine oil level X X 4-15
5 Windscreen washer reservoir fluid level (where fitted) X X 4-16
6 Air reservoir(s) (air operated trailer brakes) X 4-16
Every 50 hours 7 Radiator, intercooler, oil cooler and air conditioner X X 4-17
condenser
8 Cab air filters X 4-18
9 All grease fittings X 4-20
10 Front and rear wheel nut torque X X 4-26
11 Tyre pressures and condition X X 4-27
Every 100 hours 12 Air brake compressor drive belts (where fitted) X 4-28
Every 300 hours 13 Battery electrolyte level (tropical climates) X X X 4-29
14 Poly V-belt X 4-30
15 Transmission/rear axle/hydraulics oil level X X 4-31
16 Parking brake X X 4-32
17 Front PTO gearbox oil level X X 4-32
Every 600 hours #18 Engine oil and filter X 4-33
19 Hydraulic and transmission oil filters X 4-35
20 Engine air cleaner outer element X 4-36
21 Engine air intake connections X 4-37
22 Pre-fuel and secondary fuel filter elements X 4-38
23 Four wheel drive front axle and hubs oil level X X 4-39
Every 1200 hours or 24 Cab air filters X 4-40
annually 25 Transmission/rear axle/hydraulic oil and filter X 4-41
26 FWD axle differential oil X 4-42
27 FWD axle hub oil X 4-43
28 Front PTO gearbox oil X 4-43
29 Battery electrolyte level (temperate climates) X X X 4-44
Every 1200 hours or two 30 Engine coolant X 4-46
years 31 Engine air cleaner inner element X 4-50
32 Engine valve tappet clearances X X 4-51
33 Engine breather filter X 4-52
34 Air brake dryer reservoir X 4-53
Every 3 years 35 Air conditioning system x X X 4-54
General maintenance 36 Bleeding the fuel system X X 4-55
37 Transmission calibration X X 4-56
38 Footbrakes X X 4-58
39 Automatic pick-up hitch X X 4-59
40 Remote control valve drain bottle(s) X 4-59
41 Cab suspension adjustment X 4-60
42 Headlight and worklamp adjustment X X 4-61
43 Bulb replacement X 4-62
44 Fuse replacement X 4-65
- Cleaning the tractor X X 4-71
- Storing the tractor X X X 4-73
Oil change interval will be reduced if fuel has a high sulphur content or if the tractor is operated in extremely
cold temperatures.
4 - 10
WHEN THE WARNING SYMBOL APPEARS

OPERATION 1
SERVICE THE ENGINE AIR CLEANER OUTER
ELEMENT
Service the outer element when the restriction
indicator symbol appears in the Dot Matrix Display
or every 600 hours, whichever comes first. If the
symbol appears, perform the service within one
hour of operation.
IMPORTANT: Service the outer element only when

the restriction indicator symbol appears or at the
recommended service intervals. Cleaning the filter
too frequently will decrease the service life of the
filter.
378
The dry air cleaner, which is located under the left-
hand side of the hood, consists of an inner and
outer paper element contained within an easily
accessible housing. See Figure 378.
1. Unlatch the three retaining clips (1, fig. 378)

and lift off the air cleaner assembly cover.
2. Remove the outer element (1, fig. 379) from the
air cleaner assembly by gently twisting the end
of the filter clockwise to disengage the seal.
Then pull the filter straight out of the housing,
not at an angle, ensuring the inner element
remains in place.
379
IMPORTANT: Do not disturb or remove the inner
element.
3. Examine the inside of the outer element. If dust
is present, the outer element is defective and
must be replaced. The inner element (1) should
also be replaced at this time.
4. Clean the outer element using either method A
or B, depending on the element’s condition.
380
4 - 11
Method A
Lightly tap the ends of the element against the palm
of the hand. See Figure 381.
IMPORTANT: not tap the element against a hard

surface as this will damage the element.
381
Method B
Use compressed air, not exceeding 2 bar (30 lbf/in2).
Insert the air line nozzle inside the element. Hold the
nozzle 150 mm (6 in.) from the element and blow the
dust from the inside through the element to the
outside. See Figure 382.
! WARNING !
Wear eye protection and a face mask when
carrying out this operation.
382
5. Examine the element for damage by placing a
light inside the element. See Figure 383.
Discard the element if pin pricks of light can be
seen or if there are areas where the paper
appears thin.
6. Check the element material for bunching; the
metal casing for distortion and the rubber
gasket for damage. Discard the filter element if
it is damaged.
7. Clean the inside of the air cleaner housing
using a damp, lint-free cloth on a probe. Do not
damage the inner filter element. Ensure that the
inner end of the housing is clean and smooth, 383
to ensure a good seating for the rubber seal on
the element.
4 - 12
8. Ensure the inner element (1) is located

correctly in the air cleaner assembly before
installing the outer element. Refit the end cover
and securely latch the three retaining clips.
If the restriction indicator light continues to
illuminate after cleaning the element, the outer or
inner element may need replacing. See operations
20 and 31.
384
OPERATION 2
DRAIN FUEL SYSTEM WATER SEPARATOR
IMPORTANT: Before loosening or disconnecting

any part of the fuel injection system, thoroughly
clean the area to be worked on to prevent
contamination.
If the symbol appears in the Dot Matrix Display, this
signals the presence of water in the fuel
sedimenter, drain the fuel filter and sedimenter
assembly, as follows:
1. Open the drain tap on the sedimenter/filter

assembly by rotating the collar (1)
approximately 180° on the water sensor switch.
Contaminated fuel will drain from the tube (2).
NOTE: To loosen the drain tap (1) it may be 385
necessary to remove the sensor wire from the
terminal to allow the knob to rotate.
2. Allow contaminated fuel to drain until only clean
fuel runs out. Catch the fuel in a suitable
container and dispose of properly. Close the
drain tap.
The fuel system is self bleeding and should not
require priming after draining the sedimenter. If
priming is required, turn to page 4 - 55 for details on
priming the fuel system.
4 - 13
EVERY 10 HOURS OF OPERATION OR DAILY

(whichever occurs first)
OPERATION 3
CHECK ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the recovery tank (2)
when the engine is cold. The coolant level should
be above the bottom line (3) on the recovery tank. If
coolant is required, remove the cap (1) and add a
50/50 water and antifreeze mixture as specified on
page 4 - 9 of this Manual.
! WARNING !
The cooling system operates under pressure which
is controlled by the pressure cap on the coolant
expansion tank. It is dangerous to remove the cap
while the system is hot. When the system has
cooled, use a thick cloth and turn the pressure cap
slowly to the first stop and allow the pressure to
escape before fully removing the cap. 386
Never remove the cap from the top of the radiator
unless the expansion tank pressure cap has first
been removed.
! CAUTION !
Coolant should be kept off the skin. Adhere to the
precautions outlined on the coolant filter and
antifreeze container.
NOTE: If no coolant is visible in the recovery tank,

the coolant level must be checked in the radiator.
Check the system for leaks and repair as required.
Remove the radiator filler cap when the system is
cold. Add coolant as required to bring the level to
just below the top of the filler neck. Install the cap
and add coolant to the recovery tank, as described
above.
4 - 14
OPERATION 4
CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL
Check the oil level when the tractor is parked on a
level surface and after the engine has been
stopped for a minimum of five minutes.
1. Remove the dipstick from the left-hand side of

the engine, wipe clean and re-insert fully.
2. Pull the dipstick out again and check the oil
level. The oil level should fall between the high
and low level notches on the dipstick.
3. If more oil is required, remove the filler cap and
add fresh oil until the level is between the two
notches on the dipstick. The quantity of oil
represented by the upper and lower notches is
approximately 4.0 litres (4.2 U.S.qts). 387
NOTE: Do not fill above the upper notch on the

dipstick. Excess oil will burn off, creating smoke
and give a false impression of oil consumption.
Do not operate the engine with the oil level below
the lower notch.
4. Re-install the filler cap.
See page 4 - 9 for the correct oil specification and
viscosity.
4 - 15
OPERATION 5
CHECK WINDSCREEN WASHER RESERVOIR

(where fitted)
The reservoir for the windscreen washers is located
beneath the rear of the cab on the left-hand side.
The same reservoir is utilised for both front and rear
windscreen washers.
Lift off the cap (1) and fill with washer solvent
solution up to the bend in the filler neck. In cold
weather, use a solvent with anti-freeze properties.
388
OPERATION 6
DRAIN THE AIR RESERVOIR(S) (Air operated

trailer brakes - where fitted)
Every 10 hours or daily, whichever occurs first,
drain both air reservoirs. The reservoirs are
mounted each side of the tractor in front of the rear
axle. (Rear wheel has been removed for clarity)
Firmly apply the tractor parking brake, block all

wheels and switch off the engine.
There is a plunger on the base of each reservoir.

To drain a reservoir, move the plunger (1) laterally,
in any direction, and allow air pressure and any
accumulated water to escape. The reservoirs will
recharge with air when the engine is restarted.
389
4 - 16
EVERY 50 HOURS
Complete the preceding operations plus the
following:
OPERATION 7
CLEAN THE RADIATOR, INTERCOOLER,
OIL COOLERS AND AIR CONDITIONER
CONDENSER CORES
Check all cores for chaff accumulation or blockage.
If any is noted, clean as follows:
! CAUTION !
Wear eye protection and protective clothing during
the cleaning process. Clear the area of bystanders
so they are not struck by flying particles.
NOTE: Tractors with front PTO will have a small

additional oil cooler fitted.
1. For cleaning, use compressed air or a pressure

washer not exceeding 7 bar (100 lbf/in2).
2. 2.The air conditioner condenser (1, fig. 390), is
located in front of the engine intercooler and 390
transmission oil cooler. To gain access to the
rear of the condenser first release the fasteners
(2) by pulling forwards as shown, then swing
the condenser outwards.
3. Access to the rear of the intercooler and oil
cooler is gained by releasing the spring clip (3)
and, using the grab handle (4), pulling both
coolers upwards and outwards. The coolers will
“lock” in the raised position.
4. Direct the air or water through each core from
the back to the front. Clean the radiator first,
then the air conditioner condenser and, finally,
the driveline oil cooler. Carefully straighten any
bent fins.
5. To lower the intercooler and oil cooler grasp the
handle (3) and pull upwards, simultaneously
pushing in the top of the intercooler. As the 391
coolers begin to lower allow the grab handle to
drop. Re-attach the spring clip to the hook and
clamp securely.
NOTE: If the cores are blocked with any oily
substances, apply a detergent solution and remove
it with a pressure washer.
4 - 17
OPERATION 8
CLEAN THE CAB AIR FILTERS

Air drawn into the cab by the blower fan passes
through three filters, two externally mounted, and
one recirculation filter located inside the cab.
Before servicing the filters, switch off the blower
and close the roof hatch, all windows and one door.
Forcibly close the other door. The resulting back
pressure will dislodge most of the loose dirt from
the underside of the external filters.
NOTE: In humid conditions, do not switch on the
blower prior to servicing the filter. Damp particles
drawn into the filter may be difficult to remove
without washing.
392
External Filters
To remove the external filter, unscrew the securing
clip (1) Figure 392, from the front end of the filter
cover (2).
Remove the cover (2) Figure 393, and the filter
element (3).
NOTE: The filters are made of specially treated
media with a rubber sealing strip bonded to the
upper surface. Take care not to damage the
element during removal.
Clean the elements by blowing with compressed air
not exceeding 30 lbf. in2 (2 bar). Blow the dust from
the upper surface through the element to the
underside. Hold the nozzle at least 12 in. (300 mm) 393
from the element to prevent damage to the filter
media.
Clean all filter chambers with a damp, lint-free
cloth. Re-install the filter elements with the clean
side uppermost and re-install the covers.
4 - 18
Internal Filter
To remove an internal filter, loosen the retaining
screws (1) anti clockwise and remove the filter
cover.
394
Remove the cover (1) and extract the filter from the
housing.
NOTE: The filter (2) is made of specially treated
media with a rubber sealing strip bonded to the
upper surface. Take care not to damage the
element during removal.
Clean the elements by blowing with compressed air
not exceeding 30 lbf. in2 (2 bar). Blow the dust from
the clean surface through the element to the dirty
side. Hold the nozzle at least 12 in. (300 mm) from
the element to prevent damage to the filter media.
395
4 - 19
OPERATION 9
ALL GREASE FITTINGS

Oil all pivots and apply a grease gun to the
lubrication fittings, as shown in Figures 396 to 413
inclusive.
See page 4 - 9 for the correct grease specification.
Right and Left-hand Lift Arm
Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings, as
shown.
396
Right and Left-hand Lift Rod
Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fitting, as
shown.
NOTE: Tractors equipped with a hydraulically
adjusted lift rod on the right-hand side will not have
this lubrication fitting.
397
Top Link
shown.
398
4 - 20
2WD Axle, Outer Steering Components and

Front Hubs
shown. (Wheel removed for clarity).
NOTE: The illustration identifies the right side
lubrication fitting, this is repeated on the right side
of the axle.
399
2WD Axle, Centre Steering Components
shown.
400
Front Trunnion Pin (standard 4WD axle)
shown.
401
Rear Trunnion Pin (standard 4WD axle)
shown.
402
4 - 21
Front Trunnion Pin, Suspension Upper and

Lower Damper Pivot (suspended 4WD axle)
shown.
403
Panhard Rod Pivot (suspended 4WD axle)
shown.
404
Suspension Arm (suspended 4WD axle)
Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fitting at the
rear of the suspension arm, located beneath the
tractor, in front of the transmission.
405
Drive Shaft Universal Joint (suspended axles
only)
shown.
NOTE: The grease fittings shown is at the rear of
the drive shaft. On some models, the shield
completely covers the drive shaft and a hole is
provided for access.
406
4 - 22
4WD Steering Cylinders and Track Rods

shown.
NOTE: The left-hand end of the axle is shown.
There are similar grease fittings on the right-hand
steering cylinder and fender mount.
407
4WD Hub Steering and Swivel Bearings
shown.
NOTE: The right-hand end of the axle is shown.
There are similar grease fittings on the left-hand
steering cylinder and track control rod.
IMPORTANT: Tractors with steering angle sensor

have a sealed bearing on the right-hand upper
swivel and therefore do not have a grease fitting.
408
Rear Tow Hitch (auto engagement type)
shown.
409
Rear Tow Hitch (with slider frame)
shown.
410
4 - 23
Rear Tow Hitch (with slider frame and swivel

coupling)
shown.
411
Rear Tow Hitch (with slider frame and K 80 mm
ball)
shown.
412
Heavy Duty Roller Drawbar
shown.
413
4 - 24
Front Hitch
shown.
NOTE: The lubrication fittings shown are viewed
from the right side of the tractor, three more fittings
can be seen from the left side of the tractor.
414
Dynamic Fender Pivotl
shown.
415
4 - 25
OPERATION 10
CHECK FRONT AND REAR WHEEL NUTS

Check the front and rear wheel nuts for tightness
using a torque wrench (with a torque multiplier,
where necessary).
The specified torque figures are shown in the
accompanying table:
Four wheel drive - Adjustable front wheels

Front disc to hub nuts 210 Nm (155 lbf. ft.)
Front disc to rim nuts 250 Nm (184 lbf. ft.)
416
Manual adjust rear wheels - Flanged axle
Disc to hub nuts 260 Nm (190 lbf. ft.)

Disc to rim nuts 250 Nm (184 lbf. ft.)
Split wedge bolts with cast 300 Nm (220 lbf. ft.)

wheel centre with 10 bolt 500 Nm (369 lbf.ft.)
hub
Disc to hub nuts with 500 Nm (369 lbf.ft.)
10 bolt hub
Disc to rim nuts (all) 250 Nm (184 lbf. ft.)
417
4 - 26
OPERATION 11
CHECK TYRE PRESSURES AND TYRE

CONDITION
Check and adjust the front and rear tyre pressures.

Inspect the tread and sidewalls for damage.
Adjust the tyre pressures to suit the load being
carried. See “Tyre Pressures and Permissible
Loads” in Section 3.
NOTE: If the tyres are ballasted with a calcium
chloride/water solution, use a special tyre gauge as
the solution will corrode a standard-type gauge.
Check pressure with the valve stem at the bottom.
418
4 - 27
EVERY 100 HOURS

Carry out the following checks:
OPERATION 12
COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT TENSION
(Air operated trailer brakes - where fitted)
Inspect the belt over it’s entire length, checking for
chafing, cracking, cuts and general wear. If in
doubt, install a new belt.
419
4 - 28
EVERY 300 HOURS

Carry out the preceding checks plus the
following:
OPERATION 13
BATTERY ELECTROLITE CHECK
IMPORTANT: This operation applies to the battery

on tractors operating in tropical climates. Tractors
operating in temperate climates should have the
battery electrolyte level checked every 1200 hours
or 12 months.
To gain access to the battery, release the step
frame locking catches (1), pull outwards on the
frame and allow the steps to lower fully.
Release the battery cover by turning the locking
catch (2) anti-clockwise. Lift the cover from the two
guide pins which retain and support the rear of the
cover.
420
Unscrew and remove the six vent plugs from the
top of the top of the battery.
Check that the electrolyte level is above the top of
the separator plates in each cell.
If necessary, top up with distilled or de-mineralised
water until the level is correct. Do not overfill. Never
use tap water or water from a rain barrel or other
source.
IMPORTANT: In the event of the battery being

severely discharged, such that the terminal voltage
is below 7 volts, recovery will require a special
charging procedure. See your authorised dealer.
421
4 - 29
OPERATION 14
INSPECT POLY V-BELT
Inspect the belt over it’s entire length, checking for
chafing, cracking, cuts and general wear. If in
doubt, install a new belt. Ensure that the belt is
correctly located on the pulleys and check that the
belt tensioner is operating correctly.
422
4 - 30
OPERATION 15
CHECK TRANSMISSION/REAR AXLE AND
HYDRAULIC OIL LEVEL
Check the oil level with the tractor parked on a level
surface, with all cylinders extended and the engine
shut off for at least five minutes.
Check the oil level in the sight glass on the left hand
side of the rear axle housing. Ensure that the the oil
level is between the high and low marks (1), in the
sight glass.
423
If necessary, remove the filler cap (1) and add oil,
as required.
See page 4 - 9 for the correct oil specification.
IMPORTANT: Park the tractor on level ground and,

where applicable, extend all cylinders before
checking oil levels. With some front/rear wheel
combinations, it may be necessary to raise the front
or rear of the tractor to ensure it is level before
checking the oil.
424
4 - 31
OPERATION 16
ADJUST PARKING BRAKE
Block the front wheels, jack up the rear of the
tractor and support the rear wheels just clear of the
ground. Unlatch the brake pedals.
Apply the parking brake so that the 4th. notch of the
ratchet is engaged. Remove or ease back the
rubber boot, loosen the locknuts and turn the
adjuster nuts on the operating cables until both
wheels start to lock. Release the parking brake and
ensure that both wheels are free to rotate. Re-apply
the parking brake to ensure that the system
operates freely. Tighten the locknuts.
Road test, using the parking brake to stop the
tractor. The tractor should stop in a straight line if
the cables have been correctly adjusted.
OPERATION 17 425
CHECK FRONT PTO GEARBOX OIL LEVEL
Remove the combined level/filler plug (1) and
ensure that the oil reaches the bottom of the
opening. If necessary, top up through the opening
with clean oil and replace the plug.
426
4 - 32
EVERY 600 HOURS

Carry out the preceding checks plus the
following:
ENGINE OIL CHANGE
IMPORTANT: Operation 22 depicts the normal 600

hour engine oil and filter change period. However,
the oil change period may be affected by other
factors:
Cold Temperature Operation
Engines operating in temperatures below - 12 °C
(10 °F) or in arduous conditions should have the oil
changed every 300 hours of operation. (The oil filter
need only be changed at the normal 600 hour
service interval).
Diesel Fuel Sulphur Content
In some countries, locally available diesel may
have a high sulphur content, in which case the oil
and filter change period should be adjusted, as
follows:
z Sulphur content between 0.5 and 1.0%
z Change engine oil every 300 hours.
z Sulphur content between 1.0 and 1.3%
z Change engine oil every 150 hours.
OPERATION 18
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
Warm the engine to operating temperature.
Stop the engine, remove the drain plugs (1) and
catch the oil in a suitable container. Unscrew and
discard the oil filter (1).
! WARNING !
Be very careful to avoid contact with hot engine oil.
If the engine oil is extremely hot, allow it to cool to a
moderately warm temperature before proceeding.
To change the oil and filter:
1. Remove the engine oil drain plugs which are

located at the rear of the sump on either side of 427
the engine. Catch the oil in a suitable container
and dispose properly.
2. Replace the drain plugs after the oil has
drained.
4 - 33
3. Clean the oil filter area. Unscrew the oil filter (1)
and discard. Catch any residual oil and dispose
of properly.
4. Clean the new filter mounting surface.
5. Apply a thin coat of oil on the new filter sealing
ring and install the filter. Turn until the sealing ring
contacts the mounting surface, then tighten an
additional 3/4 to 1 full turn. Do not overtighten.
428
6. Remove Dipstick/Filler cap and fill with the
correct amount of fresh oil as indicated below.
Ensure the oil is of the correct grade and
viscosity.
7. Start the engine and run for 3 minutes at idle
speed then stop the engine.
8. Check the drain plugs and oil filter areas for
leaks.
9. Wait 5 minutes to allow the oil to drain into the
crankcase, then check the oil level on the
dipstick. The oil level should fall between the
“MIN” and “MAX” on the dipstick. Add more oil
as required. 429
NOTE: Do not fill above the “MAX” indicator on the

dipstick. Excess oil will burn off, creating smoke
and give a false impression of oil consumption.
Do not operate the engine with the oil level below
the lower notch.
10. Re-install the dipstick/filler cap.
Oil Capacity (including filter):

All models 15.0 litres (3.96 U.S gals.)
4 - 34
OPERATION 19
CHANGE HYDRAULIC AND TRANSMISSION
OIL FILTERS
The type of hydraulic filters is dependent upon
tractor specification. All the filters are installed
under the right-hand side of the cab floor.
There are two filters, the main filter (3) which has a
replaceable cartridge, and the charge filter (1)
which is a disposable type.
Before changing a disposable filter, clean the area

around the mounting plate and filter, then unscrew
and discard safely.
Clean the inlet channel and the face of the filter

mounting. Smear clean oil around the rubber seal
of the new filter and install on the tractor.
Screw up until the faces just meet, then tighten a

further 3/4 of a turn. Do not overtighten.
Both types of main filter (3) have a replaceable

cartridge.
430
In Figure 430, access to the cartridge is gained by

removing the three retaining nuts (2) on the filter
head. Ensure filter cover is clean before installing
the new cartridge, lightly oil the sealing ring before
re-assembling to the tractor. Do not overtighten the
retaining nuts.
Before changing the main filter cartridge in
Figure 431, first release the air bleed valve (2) by
unscrewing fully. This will allow air into the filter so
that most of the oil can drain back into the hydraulic
system.
Wait a few moments and then remove the 19 mm
plug (5) from the filter casing and allow the oil to
drain out. Using a 41 mm socket or ring spanner,
remove the filter support plate by turning
approximately 45° to the left. Both plate and filter
can now be removed from the tractor.
Ensure the support plate is clean before installing
the new cartridge, lightly oil the sealing ring and
refit the assembly to the tractor. Ensure the plate
locks into place and the lug (4) aligns correctly with
the arrow on the filter casing. 431
4 - 35
OPERATION 20
CHANGE THE ENGINE AIR CLEANER OUTER
ELEMENT
Remove the outer element (1) as described in

Operation 1 and discard it.
Clean the inside of the air cleaner housing using a
damp lint-free cloth on a probe, taking care not to
damage the inner element. Install a new outer
element.
432
4 - 36
OPERATION 21
CHECK ENGINE AIR INTAKE CONNECTIONS
Working from both sides of the engine, check all
intake system connection clamps for tightness.
From the left-hand side of the engine, check the air
cleaner intake connections at points (1) and (2) and
the turbocharger to intercooler connections at
points (2) and (4). Do not overtighten.
433
From the right-hand side of the engine, check
the intercooler to inlet manifold connections at
points (1) and (2). Do not overtighten.
It is essential that the clean air side of the filtration

system is sealing correctly at the connections (1)
and (3).
434
From the right-hand side of the engine, check the
exhaust aspirator connections at points (1) and (2)
for proper sealing and the clamps for tightness.
435
4 - 37
OPERATION 22
CHANGE FUEL PRE-FILTER AND FUEL FILTER
ELEMENTS
FUEL PRE-FILTER
IMPORTANT: Before loosening or disconnecting

any part of the fuel injection system, thoroughly
clean the area to be worked on to prevent
contamination.
The primary and secondary fuel filters are both of
the disposable type. The primary filter incorporates
a water drain on the base of the filter.
1. Unscrew and remove the drain tap (1) at

thebase of the primary filter/sedimenter. Allow
the fuel to drain out. Catch the fuel in a suitable
container and dispose of properly
NOTE: To allow removal of the drain tap it may be
necessary to remove the sensor wire. 436
2. Unscrew and remove the filter from the filter

head and dispose of properly.
3. Install a new filter to the head assembly.
4. Before installing the new filter lightly coat the
filter gasket with oil.
5. Rotate the filter until the filter gasket is touching
the filter head. Then give the filter a further 3/4
turn to tighten to correct torque (15Nm). Do not
overtighten.
6. Remove and replace the secondary fuel filter in
the same manner.
After replacing the fuel filters it will be necessary to
prime the fuel system before starting the engine.
See Operation 36, page 4 - 55.
4 - 38
OPERATION 23
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE LUBRICATION
Front Axle
Remove the combined level/filler plug (1) and
ensure that the oil reaches the bottom of the
opening. If necessary, top up through the opening
with clean oil and replace the plug.
437
Front Hub
Position a front wheel with the combined level/filler
plug (1) at the 3 o’clock position, as shown.
Remove the level/filler plug and ensure that the oil
reaches the bottom of the opening.
If necessary, top up through the opening with clean
oil until oil just overflows from the opening.
Re-install the plug. Repeat on the other front wheel.
438
4 - 39
EVERY 1200 HOURS OR 12 MONTHS

(whichever occurs first) carry out the preceding
checks plus the following:
OPERATION 24
CHANGE CAB AIR FILTERS
External Filters
To remove an external filter, turn the quick release
fastener 1/2 a turn anti-clockwise to free the front of
the filter cover. Remove the cover and the filter
element. Dispose of the filter elements properly.
Clean both filter chambers with a damp, lint-free
cloth.
Install new filter elements. A flow direction arrow is
moulded into the side of the filter. Install the filters
with the arrow pointing upwards. Re-install the
covers.
NOTE: The filters are made of specially treated
media with a rubber sealing strip bonded around
the sides. Take care not to damage the element 439
during installation.
Internal Filter
To remove the internal filter turn captive screws (1)
until the cover is loose.
440
Remove the filter cover and the filter element.
Dispose of the filter element properly.
Clean the filter chamber with a damp lint-free cloth.
Install the new filter element making sure that the
arrow on the filter points to the rear of the tractor.
Re-install the filter cover.
441
4 - 40
OPERATION 25
CHANGE TRANSMISSION/REAR AXLE/HYD-
RAULIC OIL AND FILTERS
Prior to changing the oil, run the engine and
operate the hydraulic system until the oil is warm.
Park the tractor on level ground, lower the 3-point
hitch and stop the engine. Apply the parking brake
and block wheels on both sides.
! CAUTION !
Be very careful to avoid contact with hot oil. If oil is
extremely hot, allow it to cool to a moderately warm
temperature before proceeding.
There are two drain plugs for the oil reservoir, one
below the transmission and one below the rear
axle. Both drain plugs must be removed using a
hexagon key. 442
To change the oil:
1. Remove the drain plugs (1, fig. 442) and

completely drain all oil into a suitable container.
Dispose of the oil properly
2. Re-install both drain plugs after the oil has
drained
IMPORTANT: Perform Operation 19 (change

hydraulic and transmission filters) before refilling
with oil.
3. Remove the filler plug cap (1 fig. 443) and refill
with new oil.
443
4. Run the engine and operate the hydraulic
system. Fully raise the 3-point hitch.
5. Stop the engine and wait five minutes while
checking the system for leaks.
6. Check the oil level by means of the sight glass
(1). Add oil as required until the oil level is
between the “MIN” and “MAX” marks.
NOTE: Do not fill above the full mark.
Oil Capacity:
All models with Power Command
transmission 100 litres (26.4 U.S. gal) 444
4 - 41
OPERATION 26
CHANGE 4WD DIFFERENTIAL OIL
Park the tractor on level ground and engage the
park brake.
To change the oil:
1. Remove the drain plug (1, fig. 445) and

Dispose of the oil properly.
2. Re-install the drain plug. Remove the level/filler
plug (1, fig. 446).
445
3. Fill with new oil until it reaches the bottom of the
level/filler plug hole. Re-install level/filler plug.
Oil Capacity:
All models 14 litres (14.8 U.S. qts.)
446
4 - 42
OPERATION 27
CHANGE 4WD PLANETARY HUB OIL

park brake.
To change the oil:
1. Position the wheel so the filler/drain/level plug

(1) is at the lowest point. Remove the plug and
Dispose of the oil properly.
2. Rotate the wheel so that the combined level/
filler plug (1) is at the 3 o’clock position, as
shown.
3. Refill the hub with new oil until it reaches the
bottom of the level/filler plug hole (3). Install the
447
plug.
4. Repeat the process on the other hub.
Oil Capacity (each hub):
All models 2.15 litres (2.3 U.S. qts.)
OPERATION 28
CHANGE FRONT PTO GEARBOX OIL
park brake.
1. Place a suitable container below the gearbox

and remove the level plug (1) and drain plugs
(2). Allow the oil to completely drain into the
container and replace the drain plugs. Dispose
of oil properly.
2. Refill the gearbox through the combined level/
filler plug until the oil reaches the bottom of the
opening.

448
4 - 43
OPERATION 29
BATTERY ELECTROLITE CHECK AND
REMOVAL PROCEDURE
Checking the Electrolite
IMPORTANT: This operation applies only to

batteries on tractors operating in temperate
climates. Tractors operating in tropical climates
should have the battery electrolyte level checked
every 300 hours. See operation 13.
To gain access to the battery, release the locking
catches (1), and pull the step frame outwards, allow
to lower fully.
1. Release the battery cover by turning the

catch (2) anti-clockwise. Lift the cover from the
449
battery ensuring it clears the support pins at the
rear of the battery carrier.
2. Unscrew and remove the six vent plugs (1)
from the top of the top of the battery. Check the
electrolyte level is above the top of the
separator plates in each cell.
If necessary top up with distilled or de-mineralised
water until the level is correct. Do not overfill. Never
use tap water or water from a rain barrel or other
source.
To prevent the formation of corrosion the terminals
should be cleaned and lightly coated with
petroleum jelly (Vaseline or similar).
IMPORTANT: In the event of the battery being

severely discharged, such that the terminal voltage
is below 7 volts, recovery will require a special 450
charging procedure. See your authorised dealer.
4 - 44
Battery Removal
NOTE: If the battery is being removed, disconnect
the battery leads before proceeding further.
Always disconnect the lead from the negative
terminal (1) first, place in a safe position and then
disconnect the positive (+) lead.
1. Loosen the nuts (2) on the battery strap until

the strap can be unhooked from the carrier
base.
2. Remove the set screws (4) from the side
plate (3) and lift off, taking care not to trap or
damage the wiring on the Maxi Fuse block. 451
3. Slide the battery out of the carrier.
! CAUTION !
Tractor batteries are very heavy, ensure the battery
is safely supported during the removal process.
To refit the battery, reverse the above procedure.

Ensure battery leads and cables are positioned so
they do not become trapped or chafe on a sharp
edges.
Refit the battery cover.
4 - 45
EVERY 1200 HOURS OR 2 YEARS

(whichever occurs first) carry out the preceding
checks plus the following:
OPERATION 30
COOLING SYSTEM
During manufacture, the engine cooling system is
filled with a high quality antifreeze and water
solution. The antifreeze contains a chemical
inhibitor. This inhibitor increases and extends the
protection offered by conventional antifreezes.
The inhibitor will:
z Increase rust prevention.
z Reduce scale formation.
z Minimise cylinder wall erosion (pitting).
z Reduce foaming of the coolant.
The chemical inhibitor must be replenished, at

intervals, to maintain the optimum protection level.
This protection is provided by draining and flushing
the system and refilling with a 50% solution of
Akcela Premium Antifreeze or, where this
antifreeze is not available, with a measured dosage
of chemical inhibitor. See the following text.
Draining and Refilling the Cooling System
! WARNING !
The cooling system operates under pressure which
is controlled by the radiator pressure cap (1). It is
dangerous to remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot. When cool, use a thick cloth and turn
the cap slowly to the first stop and allow the
pressure to escape before fully removing the cap.
Coolant should be kept off the skin. Adhere to the
precautions outlined on the antifreeze and inhibitor
containers, where used.
IMPORTANT: It is essential that an approved

pressure cap is used. If the cap is mislaid or
damaged, obtain a replacement from your dealer.
452
4 - 46
1. Turn the heater control knob to the maximum

heat position (fully clockwise).
453
2. Disconnect the radiator lower hose and drain all
the coolant into a suitable container. Dispose of
the coolant properly.
NOTE: A special hose clamp is used on the engine
coolant hoses, to loosen the clamp it will be
necessary to remove the alloy cap from the head of
the screw tensioner. Using a pair of pliers, carefully
pull off the alloy cover, this will expose a
conventional screw head. Turn anti-clockwise to
loosen.
454
3. Remove the coolant drain plug (1) from the left
hand rear of the engine block. Drain all the
coolant into a suitable container. Dispose of the
coolant properly.
4. To increase the drainage rate, remove the
radiator cap and recovery tank cap.
5. Flush the system with a commercial cooling
system cleaner. Follow the instructions supplied
with the cleaner. Drain the cleaner and let the
engine cool.
IMPORTANT: Never put cold coolant in a hot

engine. The difference in temperature could cause 455
the the block or head to crack.
4 - 47
6. Re-install the radiator lower hose. Using Plain water

7. Fill the system with clean water and run the If you reside in a country where antifreeze is not
engine for 10 minutes, then drain all the water. available, use clean water premixed with 5%
Allow the engine to cool. chemical inhibitor. The inhibitor is available from
your authorised dealer.
8. Fill the system with a blend of antifreeze and
clean soft water. Add coolant slowly through the Following the instructions on the container, mix the
radiator filler neck until the coolant reaches the recommended quantity of inhibitor with 28.5 litres
(7.5 U.S. gal.) of clean water. This will provide more
bottom of the filler neck.
coolant mixture than is actually required. The
NOTE: To avoid trapping air in the system, fill the excess coolant should be kept in a specially
marked container and used for top up purposes.
radiator as slowly as possible thereby allowing any
air pockets to disperse.
The coolant to be used is dependent upon local ! CAUTION !
availability. See the following text:
Inhibitor solution is irritating to eyes and skin.
Using Akcela Premium Antifreeze (MS1710) It contains buffered potassium hydroxide.
Use a solution of 50% clean water and 50%
antifreeze. The inhibitor already in this antifreeze is z Avoid contact with eyes or prolonged or
sufficient to protect your engine for a further 1200 repeated skin contact.
hours or two years, whichever occurs first.
z Wear protective eyewear when using.
z In case of contact with eyes, flush with water for

15 minutes and obtain medical attention.
z Wash skin with soap and water after use.
z Keep out of reach of children.
4 - 48
After Refilling the System - All Coolant

Solutions
1. Inspect cooling system hoses and connections

for leaks.
2. Fill the coolant recovery tank to the cold fill
mark (1).
3. Start the engine and run it until normal
operating temperature is reached.
NOTE: The coolant level will drop as coolant is
pumped around the system.
456
4. Stop the engine and allow the coolant to cool.
5. Remove the radiator cap (1, fig. 457) and add
coolant to the radiator to bring the coolant level
to the bottom of the filler neck. Install the
radiator cap. Add coolant to the recovery tank
as required to bring the level up to the cold
mark (2).
NOTE: If the engine is not going to be operated
immediately following this coolant change, run the
engine for one hour to ensure that the antifreeze
and/or chemical inhibitor is dispersed throughout
the cooling system. Allow the engine to cool and
make a final check to ensure that the coolant level 457
is satisfactory.
Coolant Capacity
All models 26.0 litres (6.9 U.S. gal.)
Clean Water Specification:
Total Hardness 300 parts per million Antifreeze:
Chlorides 100 parts per million Akcela Premium Anti-Freeze (MS1710) is available
from your authorised dealer in the following
Sulphates 100 parts per million quantities.
Part No. 1748 1502 (4x5 litre)

1748 1900 (20 litre)
1748 1100 (200 litre)
4 - 49
OPERATION 31
CHANGE ENGINE AIR CLEANER INNER
ELEMENT
The air cleaner is accessible from the right-hand

side of the engine.
1. Unlatch the three retaining clips (1) and lift off

the air cleaner assembly cover.
458
2. Remove the outer element (1) from the air
cleaner assembly by gently twisting the end of
the filter clockwise to disengage the seal. Then
pull the filter straight out of the housing, not at
an angle, ensuring the inner element remains in
place.
NOTE: Examine the inside of the outer element. If
dust is present, the outer element is defective and
must be replaced.
459
3. Pull the inner element straight out of the
housing and dispose of properly.
4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner housing
using a damp lint-free cloth.
5. Install a new inner element and a new outer
element (if required). Ensure both elements are
correctly seated before replacing the housing
cover.
IMPORTANT: Failure to install the inner filter

element properly could result in engine damage.
Therefore it is recommended that the element be
installed by an authorised dealer. 460
4 - 50
OPERATION 32
CHECK VALVE TAPPET CLEARANCE
With the engine cold, ease the ventilation tube from

the valve rocker cover after loosening the retaining
clamp. Undo the retaining nuts and remove the
valve cover. and check the valve clearance.
The correct valve clearance for all models,
Figure 461, is:
Inlet 0.25 +/ - 0.05 mm(0.009+/ - 0.002 in.)
Exhaust 0.51 +/ -0.05 mm(0.02+/ -0.002 in.)
Check the valve clearance for all engines as

follows:
Cylinder 1 2 3 4 5 6 461
No.
Intake - - * - * *
Exhaust - * - * - *
Rotate the crankshaft and balance No. 1 cylinder

valves. Adjust the valves marked by the asterisk (*)
as shown in the table above:
Cylinder 1 2 3 4 5 6
No.
Intake * * - * - -
Exhaust * - * - * -
Rotate the crankshaft and balance No.6 cylinder

valves. Adjust the valves marked by the asterisk (*)
as shown in the table above:
4 - 51
OPERATION 33
CHANGE ENGINE BREATHER FILTER
With the engine cold, ease the ventilation tube from

the valve rocker cover after loosening the retaining
clamp.
Undo the retaining nuts and remove the valve
cover.
Remove the breather pipe elbow by turning 1/4 turn
anti-clockwise and withdrawing from the valve
cover. Loosen and remove the thumb screw (1) to
release the filter assembly from inside the valve
cover.
NOTE: Should severe oil staining appear around
the pressure regulator (2), it would indicate the
breather filter requires replacing.
462
Remove the 3 screws (2) holding the pressure
regulator (1) and extract both regulator and filter (3)
from the valve cover.
Remove the 3 screws (2) holding the pressure

regulator (1) and extract both regulator and filter (3)
from the valve cover.
Thoroughly clean the valve cover before fitting the
new regulator, filter and breather pipe. Tighten the
regulator retaining screws to 5 Nm (3.6 lbf. ft.).
Replace the valve cover on the engine using a new
gasket and tighten the retaining nuts to 25 Nm
(18.4 lbf. ft.).
463
4 - 52
OPERATION 34
CHANGE AIR BRAKE DRIER RESERVOIR
Removing the Drier Reservoir
Before attempting to change the drier reservoir (1),
thoroughly clean the area around the reservoir to
prevent debris from entering the air braking system.
1. Exhaust all air pressure in the system by

opening the drain tap on the main air tank/s.
2. Using a filter release tool, unscrew and remove
the drier reservoir. Dispose of properly
according to local regulations.
464
Installing a New Drier Reservoir
1. Clean the seal flange on the drier body and the

threaded pin, check for damage to the pin and
the seal contact surface of the flange.
2. Lightly grease the sealing ring on the reservoir
and the threaded pin on the drier body.
3. Screw the reservoir onto the drier body until the
seal touches the contact surface of the flange.
Tighten a further half-turn by hand. Tighten to a
maximum of 15 Nm (11 lbf. ft.) DO NOT
overtighten.
4. Pressurise the reservoir and check for leaks. If
further tightening is necessary, depressurise
the system before tightening.
5. Re-pressurise the air braking system and check
again for leaks.
4 - 53
EVERY 3 YEARS
carry out the following:
OPERATION 35
SERVICE THE AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
After 3 seasons, the performance of the air
conditioner (1) may to be reduced. At this time it is
recommended to have the receiver/drier changed
and the complete system checked by your
authorised dealer using specialised equipment.
! WARNING !
The refrigerant used in the air conditioner system
has a boiling point of -12 °C (10 °F).
z Never expose any part of the air conditioner

system to a direct flame or excessive heat
because of the risk of fire or explosion.
465
z Never disconnect or disassemble any part of
the air conditioner system. escaping refrigerant
will cause frostbite. Allowing refrigerant to
escape into the atmosphere is illegal in many
countries.
z If refrigerant should contact the skin, use the

same treatment as for frostbite. Warm the area
with your hand or lukewarm water at 32 - 38° C
(90 -100° F). Cover the area loosely with a
bandage to protect the affected area and to
prevent infection. Consult a doctor immediately.
z If refrigerant should contact the eyes, wash the

eyes immediately with cold water for at least
5 minutes. consult a doctor immediately.
4 - 54
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
(to be performed as and when required)
OPERATION 36
BLEEDING THE FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
To Bleed the Fuel System
It may be necessary after carrying out maintenance
work on the fuel injection system or, after running
out of fuel, to purge the system of air to allow the
engine to start.
If the engine fails to start after several turns, after
one of the above situations has occurred, bleed the
system using the following procedure:
1. Ensure the tractor has adequate fuel and the

battery is fully charged.
2. Unscrew the primer pump knob and proceed to
pump until a high resistance is felt when
pushing the pump downwards.
3. Slowly push the plunger down against the
resistance until the pump knob can be screwed
fully home into the filter head.
The fuel injectors and fuel injection pump are of the
self bleed type and therefore any air remaining in
the system will be purged as the engine is cranked
to start.
466
4 - 55
OPERATION 37
TRANSMISSION CLUTCH CALIBRATION
Full Powershift Transmission
The Full Powershift transmission has a number of
clutch packs requiring periodic calibration to
compensate for wear. Calibration of the clutches
should be performed at the 50 Hour Service and
thereafter only if a deterioration in gear shift quality
is noted.
NOTE: During the calibration procedure the
electronic management system detects precisely
the point at which the clutches start to engage. The
engagement is detected by a reduction in engine 1
speed. During calibration it is essential that no
2
action is taken to to cause the engine speed to vary.
Be sure that the air conditioner and all electrical
equipment is switched off.
Do not operate the steering wheel, footbrakes, 467
PTO or any hydraulic lever or move the hand or foot
throttle.
Preparing the Tractor for Calibration Error Codes for Full Powershift Transmission
NOTE: The clutches should be adjusted when the
transmission oil temperature is above 80°C Code Oil too cold.
(176°F). U19 Engine RPM too low.
Park the tractor on level ground, away from U21 Engine RPM too high.
obstacles (in case of unexpected tractor
movement). U22 Shuttle lever not in forward drive position.
Place the transmission shuttle lever in neutral and U23 Clutch pedal not fully released.
apply the parking brake. Switch off all electrical
equipment and air conditioning if fitted. Lower U26 Tractor wheel movement detected.
hydraulic equipment to the ground, place all remote U31 Hand brake not applied
levers in neutral and stop the engine.
With the operator in the seat, depress and hold U33 Operator seat switch not depressed.
down the clutch pedal. With key start in the off U34 Calibration high error.
position depress and hold both transmission upshift
control (1), Figure 467. Start the engine and within U36 Calibration low error.
two seconds depress and release the downshift
control (2) to enter the calibration mode. Release U37 Flywheel torque calibration too low
the clutch pedal. Ud1 Flywheel torque calibration too high
NOTE: In “automatic calibration sequence” the seat Ud2 Oil too cold.
switch is constantly monitored, if the operator
leaves the seat the sequence will be stopped.
4 - 56
Momentarily depress the upshift control to display

the transmission oil temperature. The temperature
will initially appear as a centigrade reading, this will
be replaced by one of the following codes.
If the temperature is between 10 °C and 60 °C,

“CL” will be displayed. If the temperature is too
high, above 105 °C, “CH” will be displayed.
If “U19” is displayed calibration will not be possible

and the oil will have to be warmed before
proceeding.
468
With the oil at the correct temperature, depress the
upshift control again, “A” will appear in the display.
Depress the clutch pedal and move the shuttle
lever into forward drive. Release the clutch pedal
slowly.
Increase the engine speed to 1200 rpm and

depress the auto switch. Both FIELD and
TRANSPORT auto symbols will start to flash in the
display. The clutches will now calibrate one by one
automatically.
If an error occurs while in auto mode the sequence
is stopped and the relevant code displayed. Press
the auto function push button or the upshift/
downshift control to clear the error.
469
After the reverse clutch has been calibrated, “A” will
appear in the display to confirm the calibration
sequence has been completed.
Key off the engine and wait for 10 seconds to allow
the calibration to be stored in the memory. The
tractor is now ready for normal operation.
! CAUTION !
The tractor is drivable even if calibration has not
been completed. Pay attention in this condition as
the tractor could be jerky or sluggish. Always pull
away using the clutch pedal very carefully.
470
4 - 57
OPERATION 38
CHECK BRAKE PEDAL LATCHING/UNLATCHING
! CAUTION !
Owners should be aware of local regulations
concerning the braking system. Regularly maintain
the brakes to ensure compliance with the law and
ensure your safety. If in doubt, contact your dealer.
The hydraulically actuated brakes require no

adjustment. However, if any part of the brake pedal
linkage or the master cylinder assembly is replaced
or if the pedal latch will not readily engage the hole
in the right-hand pedal shank, adjust the pedal as
follows:
471
Adjust the clevis by loosening the locknut.
The distance from the bulkhead to the centre of the
clevis hole should be 137 mm (5.4 in.). Adjust both
pedals and ensure pedal latch engages properly.
472
4 - 58
OPERATION 39
AUTOMATIC PICK-UP HITCH
Place a load on the pick-up hitch hook. a trailer or
implement is suggested. Ensure that the hitch will
latch and unlatch satisfactorily.
If adjustment is necessary, remove the load from
the hitch hook. Loosen the locknuts (1) and turn the
adjuster (2) on each lift rod equally. Ensure that
both hitch lift arms are supporting the hitch equally
at the start of raise. Check that the hitch will latch
and unlatch.
When fully raised ensure that the hydraulic system
relief valve does not blow or that the hitch lift rods
are not under tension. Both these symptoms
indicate that the hitch lift rods are too short.
Tighten the locknuts to 100 Nm (72 lbf. ft.).
With the hitch latched in the raised position, adjust
the operating cable by means of the adjuster 473
nuts (3) to remove all slack from the inner cable.
OPERATION 40
CHECK REMOTE CONTROL VALVE DRAIN
BOTTLES
Every time a hydraulic hose is connected or

disconnected, a small amount of oil is discharged
from the remote control valve coupler. Drain bottles
are located below each remote control valve to
catch the discharged oil.
Visually check the oil level in the bottles. If

necessary, unclip the bottle (2) by releasing the
spring catch (1), remove the cap and empty the oil
into a suitable container. Re-install the bottle,
ensuring it is correctly seated below the valve.
474
4 - 59
OPERATION 41
CAB SUSPENSION ADJUSTMENT (where fitted)
On tractors with a suspended cab the pre-load on
the suspension unit (1, Fig. 476), may be adjusted
to suit heavier or lighter weights carried in the cab.
NOTE: Depending on track setting, the tractor rear

wheel may need to be removed for easy access to
the cab suspension adjuster.
Suspension Setting
The pre-load adjuster is used to set the cab
suspension so it operates in the optimum comfort
zone for normal driving conditions. Position II
provides the ideal setting for a 68kg (150 lbs.)
operator plus additional equipment weighing 22kg
(48 lbs.) carried in the cab. 475
NOTE: To provide optimum suspension

performance, the weight of any heavy items carried
in the cab (tow chains, linkages, toolboxes etc.)
must always be taken into consideration when
adjusting the suspension.
The cab suspension adjustment has five pre-load
settings which can be “clicked” into position by
rotating the upper pre-load adjuster. Each setting is
identified by vertical markings (2) on the lower
collar. When adjusted correctly, the arrow on the
upper collar (1) will align with the vertical markings
on the lower collar.
Select position I for operators having a lighter body
weight than 68kg (150 lbs.), positions III and IIII are
used for operators with a heavier body weight. With
two people in the cab, positions IIII and IIIII should
be used.
IMPORTANT: For correct suspension operation it is

vital that both suspension units are adjusted to the
same setting. An imbalance in adjustment will 476
cause unnecessary wear on the suspension units.
A “C” spanner is included in the tractor tool kit for
adjusting the cab suspension. Engage the “C”
spanner in the slot of the pre-load adjuster and
rotate to the desired position.
NOTE: Use only the special tool provided to carry
out any pre-load adjustment, using alternative
equipment may damage the adjuster components.
4 - 60
OPERATION 42
HEADLIGHT AND WORKLAMP ADJUSTMENT
Headlights
To avoid blinding on coming drivers, adjust the
angle of the headlight beams.
Each headlight is adjusted by rotating the two
adjusters (1) clockwise or anti-clockwise according
to the amount of correction required.
NOTE: The hood mounted worklamps are non-

adjustable.
477
WORKLAMPS
Dependant upon model and specification,
adjustable worklamps may be installed on the front
and rear of of the cab roof, low down at the front of
the cab or on the rear fenders. Non-adjustable
worklamps are mounted on the front of the hood,
adjacent to the headlights.
Cab roof mounted worklamps are adjusted by
moving the protruding lever (1), backwards or
forwards.
478
4 - 61
OPERATION 43
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlights and Hood-mounted Worklamps
IMPORTANT: All headlights and worklamps have

halogen bulbs. Never touch a halogen bulb with the
fingers. Natural moisture in the skin may cause the
bulb to fail prematurely when switched on. Always
use a clean cloth or tissue when handling halogen
bulbs.
The headlights and two non-adjustable worklamps
are mounted in a moulded unit attached to the front
hood assembly. All bulbs are accessible from the
rear of the lamp unit inside the hood area.
479
To remove the bulb from the integral worklamp

simply rotate the bulb holder assembly (1) anti-
clockwise approximately 20 degrees. The bulb can
then be removed by pressing in the bulb and then
releasing it.
To remove bulb from front headlight assembly push
the retaining clip (2) upwards and remove the
protective cap (3) from the rear of the light unit.
Withdraw the wiring connector (5) from the rear of

the bulb and detach the retaining spring (4) by
pulling rearwards and moving to the side of the light
aperture. Carefully remove the bulb.
480
Adjustable Worklamps
Grabrail mounted worklamps
To replace the bulbs on the grabrail mounted
worklamps, remove the two retaining screws.
Pull out the lens housing from the main lamp
housing. Squeeze together the ends of the wire
retaining clip (1) and pull the bulb holder from the
assembly. Remove the bulb making sure to use a
clean cloth or tissue.
481
4 - 62
Cab roof mounted worklamps

Remove the two retaining screws (1) and lower the
lamp assembly from the roof. Rotate the bulb
holder counter-clockwise and pull from the lamp
housing. Rotate the bulb counter-clockwise and
remove from the bulb holder making sure to use a
clean cloth or a tissue.
482
Turn/Position Lights
To gain access to the lower rear turn/position bulbs
remove the two retaining screws. Remove the lens.
To remove the bulbs (1) rotate counter clockwise.
483
The front turn/position lamps are located on the
grabrails. Remove the two retaining screws.
Remove the lens. To remove the turn indicator
bulb (1) or the position bulb (3) rotate counter
clockwise. When re-fitting the lens ensure the
sealing rubber (2) is fully seated in the lamp
housing.
484
The turn position lamps (Front and Rear) are
located in the cab roof. Remove the two retaining
bolts (1) and pull the lamp assembly from the
housing. Rotate the harness connector counter-
clockwise to remove the lamp housing from the
bulb holder. To remove the bulb rotate the bulb
counter-clockwise and pull from the bulb holder.
485
4 - 63
To remove the bulb rotate the bulb counter-

clockwise and pull from the bulb holder.
486
Puddle Lights
Remove the two retaining screws. Remove the lens
housing assembly (1) from the cab roof. Disconnect
the harness connector and remove the light
assembly. To remove the bulb housing (3) rotate
the harness connector counter clockwise.
To remove the bulb (2) rotate counter clockwise.
487
Rocker Switch Bulbs

Certain of the rocker switches are internally
illuminated, the bulb being removeable from the
rear of the switch assembly.
The switch assembly is retained by a sprung tag (3)
at either end. Use a small screwdriver to pry one
end of the rocker switch from the sheet metal and
withdraw the switch assembly.
To change a bulb, press in the tag (2) using a small
screwdriver and pull the bulb retainer (1) from the
back of the assembly. The bulbs are of the capless
type, rated at 1.2w and are a push fit in the retainer.
After changing the bulb, push the retainer into the
back of the switch assembly until the tag locates in
the aperture. Re-install the switch assembly. 488
4 - 64
OPERATION 44
FUSES AND RELAYS
The fuse box is located behind a panel on the top of
the right -hand control console.
To check or change fuses, remove the two screws
securing the panel to the console. The fuses and
relays are shown diagrammatically in Figures 490
and 491. In addition to the main fuses there are
additional “maxi” fuses which are provided to
protect the main fuses and electrical circuit.
There is provision for 60 fuses although they may
not all be fitted to your tractor. In addition, certain
items of equipment may not be installed on your
tractor. However, the fuses for these features are
still fitted and may be used as spares.
IMPORTANT: Do not replace a blown fuse with

another of a different rating. 489
The fuses are numbered and colour-coded.

Their position and rating are shown in the chart on
the next page.
More relays are located behind the front of the
right-hand control console, Figure 490.
490
In addition to the fuses in the internal fuse box,
there are also extra fuses located on the battery
tray. A 250 amp `MEGA` fuse (1) which protects the
main electrical system and three 30 amp fuses (2)
which protect the front lift electrical system,
electronics supply and implement ISO BUS circuit
(where fitted).
491
4 - 65
Relay Descriptions 1-13
Relay Function
R1/R2 Front Windscreen Wiper Module and
Rear Window Wiper Module
R3 Ignition relay
R4 Side/Tail lights and lighting
R5 Starter
R6 Blower motor
R7 Dipped beam headlamps
R8 Stoplamps
R9 Main beam headlamps
R10 Hydraulic trailer brake supply
R11 Pneumatic trailer brake supply
R12 Pneumatic trailer braking system supply
R13 Engine electronics
492
4 - 66
Relay Descriptions 14-19 Maxi Fuses 1-6
Relay Function No Amps Protected Components
R14 Not used MF1 80 Engine, Ignition relay
R15 Hood worklamps MF2 30 Lighting
R16 C post worklamps MF3 80 B + KAM ICU, Engine ECU,

Transmission ECU, Fender
R17 Terminal 15 for ECUs worklamps, Roof worklamps,
R18 Electronic battery isolator Front worklamps
R19 Air Conditioner MF4 80 Implement socket rear, Hood

worklamps, Grab rail worklamps
R20 Not used
MF5 80 Lighting, Turn indicator, Beacon
MF6 80 Accessories Cab
493
4 - 67
Mini fuses 1-30
No Amps Circuit 15 20 Stoplamp switch
1 10 Interior and puddle lights + 16 15 Trailer brake

Heated mirrors 17 25 Accessory sockets
2 25 Cigar lighter + Power socket, 18 15 Blower Motor + Seat
cab
19 15 Heated mirrors
3 10 A/C Clutch
20 10 Radar socket + Radar
4 10 Power supply, screw terminals
21 15 Water in fuel sensor + Brake
5 30 Blower motor fluid level switch
6 10 Radio KAM + Worklamp ECU 22 15 Sidelamps RH
7 20 Main lights + Hazard switch 23 15 Sidelamps LH
8 20 Starter switch 24 10 Lighting
9 25 Front loader 25 15 Dip beam headlamps
10 30 Rear implement socket 26 15 Main beam headlamps
11 10 Front windscreen wiper 27 15 Front worklamps (Hood)
12 10 Rear windscreen wiper, Front 28 15 Rear worklamp ECU
and rear windscreen washer
29 30 Worklamp ECU
13 15 Stoplamps
30 15 C post rear worklamps
14 15 Main light switch + Flasher unit
494
4 - 68
Mini Fuses 31-60
31 15 Beacon ECU 46 15 Electronic engine ECU
32 30 Flasher unit 47 10 Electronic engine ECU
33 25 Diagnostic connector 48 Not used
34 10 Instrument cluster B+, Park latch 49 15 Glow plug in the air intake pipe +
Fuel filter heater + Fan
35 10 Potential 30 for electronics electronics
36 10 Instrument cluster ignition 50 Not used
37 15 Transmission ignition 51 Not used
38 10 Rear PTO switch + Rear PTO 52 Not used

lamp + HPL + SCM + Ground
speed PTO 53 Not used
39 10 HPL + EDC + Air conditioner + 54 Not used

Fast Steer 55 Not used
40 10 Radio 56 Not used
41 15 Front PTO 57 Not used
42 10 Front suspension + Front 3-point 58 Not used
hitch potentiometer
59 Not used
43 10 12 volt ignition for engine
electronics 60 10 Battery isolator control
44 25 Front implement power socket
45 25 8 Amp Socket
495
4 - 69
Power Fuses (All Models)
Fuse No. Amps Protected Supply
PF1 250 Power B + Main supply
PF2 30 Power E electronic supply

PF3 10 Power B + Front implement
socket
496
ISO BUS Power Fuses (where fitted)
Fuse No. Amps Protected Supply

PF4 30 Implement ISO BUS circuit
PF5 30 Implement ISO BUS circuit
497
4 - 70
CLEANING THE TRACTOR

Cab Interior
When the soft trim material inside the cab becomes
dirty, it should be wiped clean. Dip a cloth in a warm
water/detergent solution and squeeze out as much
of the water as possible.
The rubber floor covering is designed to allow water
to flow out through the open doors. Wash the
covering carefully and allow to dry naturally. Avoid
getting water under the mat.
NOTE: When operating with chemical sprayers,
clean the interior of the cab on a more frequent
basis to prevent a build up of chemical residue.
Cleaning the Seat and Seat Belt
498
The belt may be sponged with clean, soapy water.
Do not use solvents, bleach or dye on the belt as
these chemicals will weaken the webbing.
Replace the belt when it shows signs of fraying, Maintenance of the paintwork is normally carried
damage or general wear. out by washing, at intervals that depend on the
conditions of use and the environment. In areas
Do not use solvents to clean the seat. Use only prone to atmospheric pollution and coastal zones,
warm water with a little detergent added or a
proprietary brand of automotive upholstery cleaner. washing should be carried out more frequently,
whereas if organic or chemical substances are
Avoid wetting the seat more than is absolutely present, wash immediately after the tractor is used.
necessary.
Use a low pressure water spray, sponge down with
Cleaning the Exterior of the Tractor a solution of automotive shampoo and water,
rinsing the sponge frequently. Rinse the tractor
In the event of abrasions or deep scratches that thoroughly and dry off.
expose the metal under the paintwork, the area
concerned will need to be retouched and treated Avoid washing the tractor if it is hot or has been
immediately with specified original products as standing in the sun. This will help to protect the
follows: shine on the paintwork.
- Rub down the immediate area surrounding the Protect the paintwork by means of periodical
damage with fine abrasive paper. polishing with special products (silicone waxes)
which are available from your authorised dealer.
- Apply a coat of primer. Use wax polish should the paintwork start to dull as
- Leave to dry and then rub down with fine this has a slightly abrasive action.
abrasive paper to “key” the surface. NOTE: When carrying out operations involving
- Apply the paint. For best results apply several materials or crops which may become airborne,
light applications of paint rather than one heavy frequently check the tractor for build up of debris
coat. Paint and primer are available from your around the radiator, engine and exhaust system to
authorised dealer.
prevent overheating or the possibility of catching
- When fully dry, apply a good quality polish and fire.
buff to a shine.
4 - 71
PROTECTING THE ELECTRONIC AND 7. If welding is to be carried out in close proximity

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS DURING BATTERY to a computer module, then the module should
CHARGING OR WELDING be removed from the tractor. It is recommended
that this procedure be carried out by an
authorised dealer.
Precautions
8. Never allow welding cables to lay on, near or
To avoid damage to the electronic/electrical across any electrical wiring or electronic
systems, always observe the following:
component while welding is in progress.
1. Never make or break any of the charging circuit 9. Always disconnect the negative cable from the
connections, including the battery connections, batteries when charging the batteries in the
when the engine is running. tractor with a battery charger.
2. Never short any of the charging components to
earth.
! WARNING !
3. Do not use a slave battery of higher than 12
Batteries contain sulphuric acid. In case of contact
volts nominal voltage. with skin, flush the affected area with water for five
4. Always observe correct polarity when installing minutes. Seek medical attention immediately. Avoid
contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear eye
the batteries or using a slave battery to jump protection when working near batteries.
start the engine. Follow the instructions in the
operator’s manual when jump starting the
tractor. Connect positive to positive and IMPORTANT: Failure to disconnect the two earth
negative to negative. cable connections at the battery prior to charging
5. Always disconnect the earth cable from the the batteries or welding on the tractor or attached
batteries before carrying out arc welding on the implement will result in damage to the electronic
tractor or on any implement attached to the and electrical systems.
tractor.
6. Position the welder earth cable clamp as close
to the welding area as possible.
4 - 72
STORING THE TRACTOR

The following text is given for your information and PREPARATION FOR USE AFTER STORAGE
guidance. For further information concerning long
term storage of your tractor, please consult your After extended storage, prepare the tractor for
authorised dealer. further use, as follows:
TRACTOR STORAGE z Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure and

lower the tractor to the ground.
Before storing the tractor for an extended period,
the following precautions should be taken:
z Refill the fuel tank(s).
z Clean the tractor.
z Check the radiator coolant level.
z Drain the engine and transmission/rear axle
and refill with clean oil. z Check all oil levels.
z Drain the fuel tank(s) and pour approximately
two gallons of special calibrating fuel into the z Install fully charged batteries.
tank. Run the engine for at least 10 minutes to
ensure complete distribution of the calibrating z Remove the exhaust pipe covering.
fuel throughout the injection system. See the
next item before running the engine. z Start the engine and check that all instruments
and controls are functioning correctly. Using the
z Check the radiator coolant level. If the coolant tractor hydraulic system in Position Control,
is within 200 hours of the next change, drain, fully raise the 3-point hitch and remove the
flush and refill the system. See Operation 30 in supports.
Section 4. Run the engine for one hour to
disperse the coolant throughout the system. z Check operation of heating and air conditioning
systems (where fitted).
z Lubricate all grease fittings.
z Drive the tractor without a load to ensure that it
z Using the tractor hydraulic system in Position is operating satisfactorily.
Control, raise the 3-point hitch and support the
lift arms in the raised position.
z Lightly coat all exposed hydraulic piston rods

with petroleum jelly, e.g., power steering
cylinder rams, lift assist rams, spool valves, etc.
z Remove the batteries and store in a warm, dry

atmosphere. Recharge periodically.
z Raise the tractor and place supports under the

axles to take the weight off the tyres.
z Cover the exhaust pipe opening.
4 - 73
NOTES:
4 - 74
SECTION 5
FAULT FINDING
INTRODUCTION
The following information is intended as a guide to
assist in identifying and correcting possible tractor
malfunctions and fault conditions.
The information provided is as follows:
z ERROR CODES
z SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
ERROR CODES
Your tractor makes extensive use of electronics to
control and monitor major components within the
driveline, electrical and hydraulic systems. In the
unlikely event of a fault occurring in one of these
areas, themalfunction will be identifiedwith a
symbol and a four or five digit error code in the Dot
Matrix Display on the instrument panel. The first
digit(s) of each number provide the general location
of the fault and the subsequent numbers confirm
the exact nature of the fault.
499
The code indicates the faulty circuit or sensor and
the type of fault, e.g., open circuit, short circuit, etc.
Each error code will be supported by the relevant
symbol displayed above the number.
Should a fault occur causing the tractor to become SYSTEM TROUBLE SHOOTING
disabled, an error code will be displayed in the
instrument panel. If this should happen and you are The following information lists possible problems,
unable to rectify the fault yourself, contact your their cause and corrective action. The systems are
authorised dealer and report the error code listed as follows:
displayed.
Subject Page
Fault codes and symbols 5-2
Engine 5-4
Transmission 5-7
Hydraulics 5-8
3-point hitch 5-9
Brakes 5-10
Cab 5-10
Electrical 5-11
5-1
SECTION 5 - FAULT FINDING
FAULT CODES AND SYMBOLS
DMD LAMP FAULT CODE AREA OF FAUL ACTION

1--- Electronic hitch control
-
2--- Transmission
-
3--- Engine
-
4--- Rear electronic remote valves The system fault symbols

- relate to an operational fault in
one or more of the tractors
main components either
45--- Front electronic remote valves
electrical, mechanical or
-
hydraulic.
F
5--- Rear PTO system The appearance of a fault
- symbol may be accompanied by
a four or five digit fault code.
6--- Front wheel drive Consult your authorised dealer.

-
7--- Rear differential lock

-
8--- Front PTO system

-
9--- Front 3-point hitch

-
10--- Front suspension

-
15-- Turn Assist system

-
16--- Cab auto temperature control

-
5-2
FAULT CODES AND SYMBOLS
DMD LAMP FAULT CODE AREA OF FAUL ACTION
14-- Instrument cluster

- The system fault symbols
relate to an operational fault in
one or more of the tractors
14-- Electronic system malfunction
main components either
-
electrical, mechanical or
hydraulic.
14-- Data network system
- The appearance of a fault
symbol may be accompanied by
a four or five digit fault code.
14-- Steering sensor

Consult your authorised dealer.
-
14-- 5 volt supply voltage

-
14-- Starter motor power supply

-
14-- Fuel level sensor

-
14-- Air brake system fault

-
14-- Alternator lamp not working

-
14-- AFS 200 monitor present but not Configure to “ON LINE” status
- configured “ON LINE”
5-3
ENGINE
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION
Engine will not start or is difficult Incorrect starting procedure. Review starting procedure.
to start
Low or no fuel. Check fuel level.
Air in fuel lines. Bleed fuel system.

Low ambient temperature. Use cold starting aid.
Contaminated fuel system. Clean and bleed fuel system.
Clogged fuel filter(s). Replace fuel filter element(s).
Malfunctioning fuel pump or See your authorised dealer.

injectors.
Malfunctioning fuel solenoid or See your authorised dealer.

solenoid relay.
Incorrect engine oil viscosity. Use correct viscosity oil.

Incorrect fuel for operating. Use correct type fuel for
temperature conditions.
Slow starter speed. See slow starter speed in Electrical.
Engine runs roughly and/or Clogged fuel filter(s). Replace fuel filter element(s).
stalls
Contaminated fuel system. Clean and bleed fuel system.
Fuel solenoid incorrectly adjusted. See your authorised dealer.
Fuel cap vent blocked. Wash cap in clean fuel oil.
5-4
ENGINE (continued)
Engine lacks power Engine overloaded. Shift to lower gear, reduce draft
load or ballast carried.
Air cleaner restricted. Service air cleaner.
Low engine operating temperature. Check thermostats.

Engine overheats. See Engine overheats.
Clogged fuel filter(s). Replace fuel filter element(s).
Incorrect fuel. Use correct type fuel.
Malfunctioning fuel injectors. See your authorised dealer.
Maximum “no-load” speed set too See your authorised dealer.

low.
Leaking air intake boost pipes or Check and rectify or see your
exhaust manifold. authorised dealer.
Turbocharger malfunctioning. See your authorised dealer.
Implement incorrectly adjusted. See implement Operator’s Manual.
Engine knocks Fuel injection pump timing. See your authorised dealer.
Low engine oil level. Add oil, as required.
Low engine oil pressure. See your authorised dealer.
Low engine operating temperature. Check thermostats.

Engine overheats. See Engine overheats.
Engine overheats Low engine oil level. Add oil, as required.
Low engine coolant level. Fill coolant recovery tank.

Check cooling system for leaks.
Defective thermostat(s). Check thermostat(s).
Dirty/blocked radiator core. Clean.
Excessive engine overload. Shift to lower gear, reduce draft

5-5
ENGINE (continued)
Engine overheats Faulty radiator pressure cap. Replace cap.
Cooling system blocked. Flush cooling system.
Loose or worn fan belt. Check tension, adjust or replace

belt if worm.
Leaking hose or connection. Tighten connection and/or replace
hose.
Malfunctioning temperature gauge See your authorised dealer.

or sender.
Malfunctioning vistronic fan. See your authorised dealer.

Low engine operating Malfunctioning thermostat(s). Replace thermostat(s).
temperature
Vistronic fan locked up. See your Authorised dealer.
Low engine oil pressure Low oil level. Add oil, as required.
Wrong oil grade or viscosity. Drain and refill with oil of the correct
specification.
Excessive engine oil Engine oil level too high. Reduce oil level, as required.
consumption
Wrong oil grade or viscosity. Drain and refill with oil of the correct
specification.
Malfunctioning turbocharger. See your authorised dealer.
External oil leaks. Repair leaks.
Worn valve guides/seals. See your authorised dealer.

Excessive fuel consumption Low engine operating temperature. See Low engine operating
temperature.
Malfunctioning turbocharger. See your authorised dealer.
Engine overloaded. Shift to lower gear, reduce draft

Air cleaner restricted. Service air cleaner.
Incorrect fuel. Use correct type fuel.
Malfunctioning fuel injection pump. See your authorised dealer.

Leaking air intake or exhaust Check and rectify or see your
manifold. authorised dealer.
Implement incorrectly adjusted. See implement Operator’s Manual.
5-6
TRANSMISSION
Tractor does not drive in any Error code will indicate source of Recalibrate the transmission or see
gear malfunction. your authorised dealer.
Gear shift sequence incorrect or Error code will indicate source of Recalibrate the transmission or see
gears missing malfunction. your authorised dealer.
Jumping out of gear or holding Worn synchronisers/couplers. Recalibrate the transmission or see
in gear your authorised dealer.
Poor inching control when using Transmission clutches require Perform transmission clutch
inching pedal (clutch pedal) or calibration. calibration procedure or see your
jerky gear shifting authorised dealer.
High transmission operating Low oil level. Add oil, as required.

temperature
Incorrect oil grade/viscosity. Drain and refill with oil of the correct
specification.
Dirty or blocked transmission oil Clean.
cooler.
Low transmission oil pressure Low oil level. Add oil, as required.
specification.
Blocked transmission oil filter. Replace filter.
Noisy transmission Low oil level. Add oil, as required.
specification.
Worn bearings or failed parts. See your authorised dealer.
5-7
HYDRAULICS
Hydraulic system does not Error code will indicate source of See your authorised dealer.
operate malfunction.
Hydraulics oil level very low. Add oil, as required.
Blocked hydraulic oil filter(s). Replace oil filter(s).

Hydraulic oil overheats Hydraulics oil level too low or too Adjust oil level, as required.
high.
Hydraulics oil cooler blocked. Clean.
Blocked hydraulic oil filter(s). Replace oil filter(s).
Flow control incorrectly adjusted. Allow to cool, adjust flow control

before operating again.
Hydraulic load not matched to See your authorised dealer.

tractor.
Remote control valve detent Detent release pressure set too low. Adjust detent pressure or see your
disengages prematurely authorised dealer.
Remote equipment cylinder Flow control incorrectly set. Adjust flow control.
operates too fast or too slowly
Remote equipment does not Hoses not correctly connected. Attach hoses correctly.
operate
Load exceeds system capacity. Reduce load or use correct size

cylinder (see your authorised
dealer).
Remote control valve lever Adjust cables or see your

movement restricted. authorised dealer.
5-8
THREE-POINT HITCH
3-point hitch does not move Error code will indicate source of See your authorised dealer.
when control lever is moved malfunction.
Hitch not in phase with the control Put lift control lever back in phase
lever. with lower links.
Fast raise switch in external control Put switch in correct position.

position.
Height limit control incorrectly Adjust height limit control.

positioned.
External power lift control does Fast raise switch not in external Centralise switch (external control
not operate control position. position).
3-point hitch does not raise fully Height limit control incorrectly Adjust height limit control.
positioned.
3-point hitch drops slowly Drop rate control incorrectly Adjust drop rate control.
positioned.
3-point hitch slow to respond to Position/draft control incorrectly Adjust position/draft control.
draft loads adjusted.
Drop rate too slow. Adjust drop rate control.
Implement not functioning properly. See implement operator’s manual.
3-point hitch too responsive to Position/draft control incorrectly Adjust position/draft control.
draft loads adjusted.
3-point hitch status light flashes Position/draft control incorrectly Adjust position/draft control.
continually adjusted.
5-9
BRAKES
Pedal(s) feel spongy Air in system. System requires bleeding.

See your authorised dealer.
Excessive brake pedal travel Brake piston seal leaking. See your authorised dealer.
Brake bleed valve leaking. See your authorised dealer.
Leakage in brake valve(s) See your authorised dealer.
Worn brake discs. See your authorised dealer.
CAB
Dust enters the cab Improper seal around filter Check seal condition.
Blocked filter(s). Clean or replace filters.
Defective filter. Replace filter.
Damaged seals around doors/ Replace seal(s).

windows or roof hatch.
Low pressuriser air flow Blocked filter(s). Clean or replace filters.
Heater or evaporator core blocked. See your authorised dealer.
Air conditioner does not Heater control turned on. Turn temperature control knob fully
produce cool air anti-clockwise.
Condenser blocked. Clean radiator, condenser and oil
cooler.
Drive belt slipping, worn or Check automatic belt tensioner and

damaged. belt condition.
Low refrigerant level. See your authorised dealer.
5 - 10
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Electrical system completely Loose or corroded battery Clean and tighten connections.
inoperative connections.
Sulphated batteries. Check battery open circuit voltage

for minimum 12.6 volts.
Check electrolyte level and
specific gravity.
Starter speed slow - engine Loose or corroded battery Clean and tighten connections.
cranks slowly connections.
Low battery output. Check battery open circuit voltage
specific gravity.
Incorrect viscosity engine oil. Use correct viscosity oil for ambient
temperature.
Starter inoperative Loose or corroded battery or starter Clean and tighten connections.
motor connections.
Dead batteries. Charge or replace batteries.
Starter safety switch(es) operative. Place all gear shift levers in neutral
and fully depress clutch pedal.
Alternator light stays on with Low engine idle speed. Increase engine idle speed.
engine running
Broken/loose drive belt. Check belt and automatic belt

tensioner.
Malfunctioning batteries. Check battery open circuit voltage

specific gravity.
Malfunctioning alternator. Have alternator checked by your

authorised dealer.
Batteries will not charge Malfunctioning alternator. Have alternator checked by your
authorised dealer.
Loose or corroded terminals. Clean and tighten connections.
Loose or worn drive belt. Check belt and automatic belt

tensioner. Replace belt, if required.
Malfunctioning batteries. Check battery open circuit voltage

specific gravity.
5 - 11
NOTES:
5 - 12
SECTION 6
ACCESSORIES
This section of the Manual describes the function Subject Page

and operation of features that are available for your
tractor as dealer installed accessories. Unless
otherwise stated, these features may also be AFS 200 Monitor 6-2
available as factory fitted options.
Engine Coolant Immersion Heater 6-3
Transmission Oil Heater 6-3
Maintenance requirements for these features will
Rotating Beacon 6-4
be found in Section 4 - Lubrication and
Maintenance. Auxiliary Headlights 6-4
40 Amp Socket and Cable 6-5
This subjects covered in this section are shown on Battery Isolator Switch 6-6
the right. A comprehensive index is provided at the
Dynamic Front Fenders 6-7
end of this book.
6-1
SECTION 6 - ACCESSORIES
AFS 200 MONITOR

(where fitted)
The optional AFS 200 monitor provides a
comprehensive range of information on tractor
operating functions.
It can also be used to store, process and display
information relating to applications and work
environments.
500
USB Port
A USB port is located at the top of the left-hand cab
“C” pillar. This port is a direct link to the monitor and
provides the ability to upload and download
information between the monitor and a USB
storage device.
NOTE: Details on the operation of the monitor and
ISO electrical system can be found in the AFS 200
Operator’s Manual.
501
ISO Connector
Implements equipped with an ISO standard
electronic control unit/s can be connected to the
monitor via the multi-pin ISO connector at the rear
of the tractor.
502
6-2
COOLANT IMMERSION HEATER
! WARNING !
To avoid shocks or other injuries, never use an
unearthed or inadequate extension lead with the
coolant or oil heater. Always use an earthed, three
core extension lead, which is rated for at least a
15 amp load, in conjunction with a residual current
circuit breaker or earth leakage trip device.
This accessory consists of a heating element fitted

into one of the core plug apertures on the right-
hand side of the block. The heater is available in
115 or 230 volts A.C only. This accessory provides 503
easier starting down to -29 °C (-20 °F).
To operate the heater, connect the heater extension
cable to the socket (1) adjacent to the right-hand
cab steps. Plug the free end of the heater cable into
a suitable electrical outlet for up to four hours
before carrying out the cold weather starting
procedure.
TRANSMISSION OIL HEATER

This accessory consists of a 115 or 230 volts A.C.
heating element installed in the transmission
housing. Connect the heater extension cable to
the plug (1) on the left side of the rear axle
housing. This accessory provides for faster warm
up of the transmission/hydraulic oil when
operating in cold climates.
To operate the heater, connect the plug on the free
end of the heater cable to a suitable 115 volt outlet
(using a voltage transformer, if necessary) for up to
four hours before starting the engine.
NOTE: The coolant or transmission heaters may be
left plugged in for more than four hours without
harm. However, no noticeable increase in the 504
heater’s effectiveness will be achieved after this
period.
6-3
ROTATING BEACON
The beacon switch is located in the control panel in
the roof. Press in the button identified with the
beacon symbol to provide power to the rotating
beacon socket outlet.
NOTE: Less cab models will have the beacon
switch located on the main switch panel on the
right-hand control console.
The roof beacon kit consists of a rotating beacon,
support bracket and fitting hardware to attach to the
roof of the tractor.
505
A socket connected to the tractor electrical
circuit (1), is provided each side of the cab at the
rear of the tractor. When not in use, ensure the
socket cover is replaced to prevent water ingress.
506
AUXILIARY HEADLIGHTS
A set of additional dipping headlights are available
for use with front mounted equipment. Located on
the upper right and left-hand grab rails, the
headlight beams pass over front mounted
equipment to illuminate the road ahead.
To turn on the auxiliary headlights, depress the
switch on the lower left side of the instrument panel.
When switched on the auxiliary headlight beams
may be dipped using the multi-function switch on
the left of the steering column.
507
6-4
ADDITIONAL 40 AMP SOCKET

A second 4-pin, 40 amp socket is available as a
dealer installed accessory. The socket is mounted
on the underside of the lower, right-hand
windscreen frame.
A 4-pin to SAE 3-pin adaptor cable is available as
an accessory from your dealer. (See Figure 508).
4-PIN TO 3-PIN ADAPTOR

A 4-pin to SAE 3-pin adaptor cable is available as
an accessory from your dealer. The adaptor may be
used with the 4-pin, 40 amp implement socket.
508
6-5
BATTERY ISOLATOR SWITCH

Before disconnecting battery power with the
isolator, ensure the key-start and any other
electrical switches are turned OFF.
IMPORTANT: After turning the tractor key-start off,

wait for 60 seconds before isolating the battery
power. This will permit any unsaved information in
the tractor electronic processors to be memorised.
An inbuilt power reserve will maintain a small
amount of power to supply the electronic
processors and radio memories when the tractor
battery is isolated.
Electronic Operation
The solenoid operated battery isolator is controlled
by a switch (1) located on the left-hand cab “C”
pillar. 1
Depress the top of the switch to disconnect battery
power, an audible warning will sound for
approximately 5 seconds. Depress the bottom of
the switch to re-connect battery power.
IMPORTANT: When in the “ON” position, the

isolator switch solenoid consumes a small amount
of electrical power. If the tractor is left for an
extended period of time with the isolator on, battery
power may be reduced. Always turn the battery
isolator switch “OFF” when the tractor is not in use. 509
NOTE: The key-start switch must be in the “OFF”

or “ACCESSORIES” position to operate the battery
isolator, it will not function with the key-start in the
“ON” (run) position.
Mechanical Operation
The mechanical isolator switch is attached to the
battery carrier on the right-hand side of the tractor.
Rotate the switch 1/4 turn anti-clockwise (position
“O”, red background) to disconnect battery power.
510
6-6
DYNAMIC FRONT FENDERS

Two types of optional front fender are available,
both offering a full range of adjustment to suit
varying tyre sizes and track widths. The method of
adjustment is very similar for both, but the following
text describes the setting of the dynamic fender.
Ensure all fixing bolts are re-tightened after
adjustment.
Dynamic fenders turn with the front wheels as the

tractor is steered. As the steering angle increases,
a spring centred pivot in the fender mount restricts
the turn angle of the fenders. This prevents
interference with the tractor hood or loader frame
while allowing the wheels to continue turning
beneath the fender. As a result, tighter turns can be
achieved that would not be possible with a
conventional fender, particularly at narrower track
settings.
Lateral adjustment, fender support

A fender may be moved horizontally, towards or
away from the tractor, by relocating the metal
shims (2) either side of the fender support (1).
Vertical adjustment
The fender may be moved vertically by relocating
the bolts (3) in the appropriate holes in the fender
support. A number of the holes are elongated
allowing the fender to be tilted forward or rearward.
511
Fender turn stop

An adjustable stop bolt (3), is fitted to both fender
support brackets. When turning, the bolt contacts a
fixed stop (2) on the axle housing restricting the
angle at which the fender will turn while allowing
the wheels to continue turning beneath the fender.
The stops may require adjusting if the track width or
tyre size is changed.
Lateral adjustment, fender
The support and bracket attachment points (1)
beneath the fender, provide further lateral
adjustment allowing the fender to be centered over
the tyre.
Narrow Track Settings
With certain options and/or tyre sizes, the smaller 512
track settings may not be attainable due to minimal
clearance between tyre or rim and any part of the
fender or attaching hardware.
6-7
NOTES:
6-8
SECTION 7
SPECIFICATIONS
General Subject Page

The specification figures in this section are General Dimensions 7-2
provided for your information and guidance. For Vehicle Weights 7-5
further information concerning your tractor and
equipment, consult your Case IH dealer. Lubricant and Fluid Capacities 7-6
Case IH policy is one of continuous improvement Engine 7-7
and the right to change prices, specification or Fuel System 7-7
equipment at any time without notice is reserved.
Cooling System 7-8
All data given in this manual is subject to
production variations. Dimensions and weight are Transmission Options 7-8
approximate only. The illustrations do not Maximum Operating Angles 7-9
necessarily show tractors in standard condition or
imply that these features are available in all Rear Power Take Off 7-9
countries. For exact information about any Front Power Take Off 7-9
particular tractor, please consult your Case IH
dealer. Hydraulic System 7-10
Rear 3-Point Hitch 7-10
Remote Control Valves 7-14
Front 3-Point Hitch 7-14
Brakes 7-15
Steering 7-15
Electrical Equipment 7-16
Hardware Torque Tables 7-17
7-1
SECTION 7 - SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL DIMENSIONS ALL MODELS
NOTE: The following dimensions are based on standard tractors fitted with tyre sizes as shown. Allowance
must be made for tyres of larger or smaller dimensions:
PUMA165, PUMA180, PUMA195 and PUMA210
4WD 4WD
Standard Suspension
The following dimensions are

based on tractors with tyre sizes Front 480/70R30
shown: Rear 580/70R42
A. Width across fenders

- Standard fenders All models, 2158 mm (84.9 in)
- Extended fenders All models, 2334 mm (91.8 in)
- Extra wide fenders All models, 2682 mm (105.5 in)
7-2
GENERAL DIMENSIONS PUMA165, PUMA180, PUMA195 and PUMA210
4WD 4WD
Standard Suspension
B. Maximum ground clearance below All 4WD models, 613 mm (24.1 in)
front axle
C. Front track setting mm 1552-2269
in 61.1-89.3
D. Rear track setting

- with flange axle All models,1426-2026 mm (56.1-79.8 in)
- with 98 in. bar axle All models, 1524-2438 mm (60.0-96.0 in)
E. Height to top of exhaust All models, 3164 mm (124.5 in)
F. Height to:
- Top of cab All models, 3090 mm (121.6 in)
G. *Ground clearance below drawbar

Swinging drawbars All models, 398-523 mm (15.6-20.5 in)
Tow hooks All models, 314-392 mm (12.3-15.4 in)
H. Front hitch projection

Links horizontal 4WD models only, 756 mm (29.7 in)
Links in transport position 4WD models only, 316 mm (12.4 in)
*Ground clearance below the swinging drawbar or tow hook will be dependent on type of drawbar and tyre size.
The figures shown are for guidance only.
NOTE: If your tractor has tyres of a different size then the above dimensions will vary due to the difference in
the rolling radius and section width of the tyres fitted.
7-3
GENERAL DIMENSIONS PUMA165, PUMA180, PUMA195 and PUMA210
4WD 4WD
Standard Suspension
J. Wheelbase mm 2884 2884
in 113.5 113.5
K. Overall length to end of lower mm 5017 5017
links in 197.5 197.5
Minimum turn radius
- 2WD without brakes m - -
ft - -
- without brakes at 61.0 in. m 6.59 6.59
front track setting ft 21.6 21.6
- without brakes at 72.0 in. m 6.10 6.10
front track setting ft 20.0 20.0
NOTE: All turn radius figures are measured without front fenders and steering stops adjusted to provide
20 mm (0.78 in) wheel to chassis clearance on full lock with 0 °front axle oscillation.
NOTE: If your tractor has tyres of a different size then the above dimensions will vary due to the difference in
the rolling radius and section width of the tyres fitted.
7-4
VEHICLE WEIGHTS
TYPICAL OPERATING WEIGHTS PUMA165 PUMA180 PUMA195 PUMA210
**4WD - with cab, standard axle

On front axle 4199 kg (9257 lbs)
On rear axle 4297 kg (9473 lbs)
Total weight 8496 kg (18730 lbs)
**4WD - with cab, Suspended axle

4WD Maximum Permissible Weight

NOTE: The above weights are approximate and are based on standard production tractors with full fuel tank,
but without driver, or additional equipment.
** Includes front weight pack “C” (818 kg; 1803 lbs).
7-5
CAPACITIES
PUMA165 PUMA180 PUMA195 PUMA210
Fuel tank
(Total, both tanks) 440 Liter (116.2 U.S. gal)
Cooling system 26 Liter (6.9 U.S. gal)
Engine (including filter) 15 Liter (3.96 U.S. gal)
Transmission/rear axle/hydraulics 100 Liter (26.4 US gal)
Front PTO 400 ml (0.42 U.S. qts)
4WD Front hubs (w/o brakes) 2.15 Liter (2.3 U.S. qts)
(quantity for one hub only)
4WD Front hubs (with brakes) x.x Liter (x.x U.S. qts)
(quantity for one hub only)
4WD Front axle differential 14. Liter (14.8 U.S. qts)

(All axles)
Rear Axle/Hydraulics Oil Level when using Remote Hydraulic Equipment

When checking the rear axle oil level, it is good practice to ensure that the oil is up to the full mark on the
dipstick with the tractor parked on level ground. However, when connecting auxiliary equipment to the remote
control valves it should be remembered that the equipment utilises oil from the rear axle and could seriously
lower the oil level. Operating the tractor with a low oil level may result in damage to the rear axle and
transmission components.
With the rear axle oil level up to the full mark on the dipstick, the following maximum oil volumes may be
taken from the rear axle to power auxiliary equipment without the need to further top up the system:
Operating stationary equipment on level ground: 21 litres (22.8 U.S. qts)
Operating while driving in normal conditions

(flat fields) for short periods only: 15 litres (15.8 U.S. qts)
Operating in. other conditions, including longer periods of use 9 litres (9.5 U.S. qts)
Conversely, the maximum amount of oil that may be added to the rear axle above the normal FULL level is
7 litres (7.3 U.S. qts). With this quantity added to the rear axle, the quantities stated above may be increased
by the same amount, 7 litres (7.3 U.S. qts), but no more.
7-6
ENGINE
ENGINE PUMA165 PUMA180 PUMA195 PUMA210
Engine power (unboosted) at Kw 123 134 145 157

rated speed, (ECE R120) Hp (cv) 167 182 197 213
Engine power (boosted) at rated Kv 150 160 172 175

speed, (ECE R129) Hp (cv) 204 218 234 238
Number of cylinders 6 cylinders
Valves per cylinder 4 valves per cylinder
Aspiration Turbocharged and air to air intercooled
Bore 104 mm (4.0 in)

Stroke 132 mm (5.19 in
Displacement 6728 cm3 (410 in3)
Compression ratio All Models, 16.5:1

Firing order 1.5.3.6.2.4
Rated engine speed rev/min All Models, 2200 e.r.p.m.
Idle speed rev/min All Models, 650 +/- 50 e.r.p.m.
Maximum no-load speed rev/min All Models, 2375 e.r.p.m.
Valve tappet clearance (cold)

Intake 0.25 mm (0.009 in)
Exhaust 0.51 mm (0.020 in)
FUEL SYSTEM
Type Electronically controlled, high pressure common rail

Dynamic timing (°BTDC) 3.4 5.5 6.3 6.3
7-7
COOLING SYSTEM
COOLING SYSTEM PUMA165 PUMA180 PUMA195 PUMA210
Type Pressurised, with full flow bypass and recovery tank
Vistronic fan
- Number of blades 7 blades
- Diameter 510 mm (20.0 in)
Thermostat °C 81 degrees
Begins to open at °F 178 degrees
Fully open at °C 96 degrees

°F 205 degrees
Radiator pressure cap bar 1.0 bar (14.5 lbf. in2)
TRANSMISSION
Type Full Powershift with Power Shuttle
Depending on tractor specification,

a number of transmission options
are available
17 x 6 - 2WD and 4WD 30 km/h (18.4 MPH)*
18 x 6 - 4WD only 40 km/h (24.8 MPH)*
19 x 6 Economy - 4WD only 40 km/h (24.8 MPH)*
19 x 6 - 4WD only (with front

brakes & suspension) 50 km/h (31.0 MPH)*
Creeper Gears
34 x 12 - 2WD and 4WD 0.29-30 km/h (0.18-18.4 MPH)*
36 x 12 - 4WD only (with front

brakes & suspension) 0.29-40 km/h (0.18-24.8 MPH)*
Creeper Gear Operation Electronic switch
*Approximate speeds depending

on tyre size
7-8
MAXIMUM OPERATING ANGLE
MAXIMUM OPERATING ANGLE PUMA165 PUMA180 PUMA195 PUMA210

Front end up 30 degrees
Rear end up 30 degrees
Right side up 30 degrees
Left side up 30 degrees
REAR POWER TAKE OFF
Type
- Standard (except North America) 540E/1000 shiftable, independent
- Optional 540/1000 shiftable, independent
- Optional 540/1000 non-shiftable, independent
Engine speed @ PTO speed

- 540 1950 e.r.p.m.
- 540E 1526 e.r.p.m.
- 1000 (shiftable and non-shiftable) 2178 e.r.p.m.
Maximum P.T.O power at Rated
Engine Speed
* With Power Boost
Fender mounted PTO controls Optional
(except North America)
FRONT POWER TAKE OFF
FRONT POWER TAKE OFF

(4WD only)
Type Single speed, fully independent
- Shaft 6 or 21 Spline 39.4 mm (1.375 in.)
- Actuation Elecro-hydraulic
- Direction of rotation Anti-clockwise
Engine speed @ PTO speed
- 1000 rpm only All Models, 2120 e.r.p.m.
Maximum Power Output Kw All Models, 96.6 Kw
Hp All Models, 130 Hp
7-9
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Type Variable displacement hydraulic pump with Electronic
Hitch Control (EHC)
Maximum system pressure at
rated engine speed
@ 2100 e.r.p.m. 200 +/-5 bar (2750+/-72 lbf. in 2)
Flow at rated engine speed

- with standard pump 120.0 l/min (31.7 u.s. gal/min)
- with optional “Hi-Flow” pump 150.0 l/min (39.6 u.s. gal/min)
THREE POINT HITCH
Linkage Category
with EDC, standard Category II/III w/quick attach link ends
with EDC, Optional Category II/III w/flexible link ends
LIFT CAPACITY
Manufacturers’ figures to OECD criteria - maximum lift capacity, 610 mm (24 in) behind link ends
through full lift range at 90% of maximum hydraulic pressure:
With 2 x 80 mm assist rams All Models, 3854 (8496)
- with Quick attach link ends kg (lb)
- with Flexible link ends kg (lb) All Models, 3640 (8024)
Manufacturers’ figures to OECD criteria - maximum lift capacity at link ends at maximum hydraulic
pressure, links horizontal:
With 2 x 80 mm assist rams
with Quick attach link ends kg (lb) All Models
with Flexible link ends kg (lb) All Models, 5180 (11419)
NOTE: All lift capacity values are theoretical
7 - 10
LIFT CAPACITY PUMA165 PUMA180 PUMA195 PUMA210

(Continued)
Manufacturers’ figures to OECD criteria - maximum lift capacity, 610 mm (24 in) behind link ends
with 2 x 90 mm assist rams
- with Quick attach link ends kg (lb) All Models, 4874 (10745)
Manufacturers. figures to OECD criteria - maximum lift capacity at link ends at maximum hydraulic
Manufacturers. figures to OECD criteria - maximum lift capacity, 610 mm (24 in) behind link ends
- with 2 x 100 mm assist rams
Manufacturers. figures to OECD criteria - maximum lift capacity at link ends at maximum hydraulic
7 - 11

(Continued)
Manufacturers’ figures to SAE J283/ASAE - maximum lift capacity, 610 mm (24 in) behind link ends
Manufacturers’ figures to SAE J283/ASAE - maximum lift capacity at link ends at maximum
hydraulic pressure, links horizontal:
Manufacturers. figures to SAE J283/ASAE - maximum lift capacity, 610 mm (24 in) behind link ends
7 - 12

(Continued)
Manufacturers’ figures to SAE J283/ASAE - maximum lift capacity, 610 mm (24 in) behind link ends
7 - 13
REMOTE CONTROL VALVES

With electronic remote valves Opt. 3 or 4 valves
Maximum pressure at rated
engine speed 200 +/-5 bar (2750+/-72 psi)
Maximum flow through one
valve at rated engine speed 95+/-5 l/min (25+/-1.3U .S . gal/min)
ISO Power Beyond couplers Opt. Compatible with configurable and electronic valves
FRONT 3-POINT HITCH
Linkage Category Category II (ISO 8759/2)

Lift capacity through full lift
range: @ ball ends Standard and suspended axles - 3859 kg
@ 610 mm (24 in)
in front of link ends Standard and suspended axles - 3788 kg
FRONT REMOTE VALVE COUPLERS

With electronic rear mount
remote valves Opt. 2, 3 or 4 electronic valves
Maximum flow through one
valve at rated engine speed 95+/-5 l/min (25+/-1.3 U.S. gal/min)
7 - 14
BRAKES
Service brake Self adjusting, oil immersed disc acting on differential
shafts with power assistance
Number of discs per side 2 friction and 2 steel
Front brakes (optional 4WD) Oil immersed disc in each hub
Parking brake Oil immersed discs acting on bevel pinion shaft
Number of discs 6 discs
STEERING
Type Hydrostatic with tilt/telescoping steering wheel
Turns from lock to lock
- 2WD All Models 4.4 turns
- 4WD Std/Suspended axles All Models 4.3 turns
- 4WD with Fast Steer 10° left or right from the straight ahead position
Maximum angle of turn
- 2WD standard axle 55 degrees
- 4WD standard axle 55 degrees
- 4WD suspension axle 55 degrees
Front wheel toe in
- 2 wheel drive 3-6.5 mm (0.11-0.25 in)
Front wheel alignment
- 4 wheel drive 0 +/- 3 mm (0 +/- 0.12 in)
7 - 15
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Alternator 12 volt. 150 amp
Battery Minimum maintenance 12 volt 1300 cca
- Isolator, mechanical Optional
- Isolator, electronic Optional
Starting motor Positive engagement, solenoid operated 4.2 Kw -
geared reduction
Cold starting aid Optional inlet manifold grid heater and fuel heater
Bulb rating and type
- headlights 60/55W - H4
- parking lights (front) 5W - R5W
- parking lights (rear) 5W - P21/5W
- work lights (hi-mount) 55W - H3
- work lights (auxiliary) 50W - GE866
- turn indicators (front) 21W - PY21W
- turn indicators (rear) 21W - R21W
- stop lights 21W - P21/5W
- licence plate lights 5W - R5W
- rotating beacon 55W - H1
- SMV lights (N America only) and
extremity lights 21W - P21W
7 - 16
MINIMUM HARDWARE TIGHTENING TORQUES

IN FOOT-POUNDS (NEWTON METERS) FOR NORMAL ASSEMBLY APPLICATIONS
INCH HARDWARE AND LOCKNUTS
SAE GRADE 2 SAE GRADE 5 SAE GRADE 8 LOCKNUTS
NOMINAL UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED GR.B GR.C
or w/ZnCr or w/ZnCr or w/ZnCr w/GR5 w/GR8
PLATED PLATED PLATED BOLT BOLT
SILVER GOLD SILVER GOLD SILVER GOLD
1/4 55* (6.2) 72* (8.1) 86* (9.7) 112* (13) 121* (14) 157* (18) 61* (6.9) 86* (9.8)
5/16 115* (13) 149* (17) 178* (20) 229* (26) 250* (28) 324* (37) 125* (14) 176* (20)
3/8 17 (23) 22 (30) 26 (35) 34 (46) 37 (50) 48 (65) 19 (26) 26 (35)
7/16 27 (37) 35 (47) 42 (57) 54 (73) 59 (80) 77 (104) 30 (41) 42 (57)
1/2 42 (57) 54 (73) 64 (87) 83 (113) 91 (123) 117 (159) 45 (61) 64 (88)
9/16 60 (81) 77 (104) 92 (125) 120 (163) 130 (176) 169 (229) 65 (88) 92 (125)
5/8 83 (112) 107 (145) 128 (174) 165 (224) 180 (244) 233 (316) 90 (122) 127 (172)
3/4 146 (198) 189 (256) 226 (306) 293 (397) 319 (432) 413 (560) 160 (217) 226 (305)
7/8 142 (193) 183 (248) 365 (495) 473 (641) 515 (698) 667 (904) 258 (350) 364 (494)
1.0 213 (289) 275 (373) 547 (742) 708 (960) 773 (1048) 1000 (1356) 386 (523) 545 (739)
NOTE: Torque values shown with * are inch pounds.
IDENTIFICATION CAP SCREWS AND CARRIAGE BOLTS
SAE SAE SAE

GRADE 2 GRADE 5 GRADE 8
REGULAR SAE GRADE 5 SAE GRADE 8

NUTS HEX NUTS NUTS
LOCKNUTS
GRADE IDENTIFICATION
GRADE A NO NOTCHES
GRADE B ONE CIRCUMFRETIAL NOTCH GRADE A NO MARKS
GRADE C TWO CIRCUMFRENTIAL NOTCHES GRADE B THREE MARKS
GRADE C SIX MARKS
GRADE A NO MARKS MARKS NEED NOT BE LOCATED AT CORNERS
GRADE B LETTER B
GRADE C LETTER C
7 - 17
MINIMUM HARDWARE TIGHTENING TORQUES

ININ FOOT-POUNDS (NEWTON METERS) FOR NORMAL ASSEMBLY APPLICATIONS METRIC
HARDWARE AND LOCKNUTS
CLASS 5.8 CLASS 8.8 CLASS 10.9 LOCKNUT

KL.8
NOMINAL UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED w/CL8.8

SIZE w/ZnCr w/ZnCr w/ZnCr BOLT
M4 15* (1.7) 19* (2.2) 23* (2.6) 30* (3.4) 33* (3.7) 42* (4.8) 16* (1.8)
M6 51* (5.8) 67* (7.6) 79* (8.9) 102* (12) 115* (13) 150* (17) 56* (6.3)
M8 124* (14) 159* (18) 195* (22) 248* (28) 274* (31) 354* (40) 133* (15)
M10 21 (28) 27 (36) 32 (43) 41 (56) 45 (61) 58 (79) 22 (30)
M12 36 (49) 46 (63) 55 (75) 72 (97) 79 (107) 102 (138) 39 (53)
M16 89 (121) 117 (158) 137 (186) 177 (240) 196 (266) 254 (344) 97 (131)
M20 175 (237) 226 (307) 277 (375) 358 (485) 383 (519) 495 (671) 195 (265)
M24 303 (411) 392 (531) 478 (648) 619 (839) 662 (897) 855 (1160) 338 (458)
NOTE: Torque values shown with * are inch pounds.
IDENTIFICATION HEX CAP SCREWS AND CARRIAGE BOLTS

CLASSES 5.6 AND UP
MANUFACTURERS IDENTIFICATION
PROPERTY CLASS
HEX NUTS AND LOCKNUTS

CLASSES 05 AND UP
MANUFACTURERS IDENTIFICATION
PROPERTY CLASS CLOCK MARKING
7 - 18
SECTION 8 – 1ST 50 HOUR SERVICE
SECTION 8
-------- - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
FIRST SERVICE SHEETS

CHECK AND ADJUST, AS REQUIRED
(Dealer’s copy)
INOPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS:: OPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS:
1. Check engine oil level ................................. F All operative checks are to be performed with the
2. Tyre pressures and condition ..................... F tractor at operating temperature.
3. Radiator coolant level and specific gravity 1. Lights and instruments for proper
(1.071 - 1.083 at 16 ° C (60 ° F)) ............... F operation ..................................................... F
4. Inspect engine Poly V-belt ......................... F 2. Windscreen wipe/wash operation ............... F
5. Inspect air compressor Poly V-belt 3. Fluid and oil leaks ....................................... F
(air operated trailer brakes only) ................ F 4. Maximum no-load speed and idle speed
6. Inspect air conditioner Poly V-belt ............. F adjustments and fuel shut-off ...................... F
7. Change hydraulics/transmission filters ...... F 5. P.T.O. operation.......................................... F
8. Check transmission/rear axle oil 6. Hydraulic System: F
lev/hydraulics .............................................. F Draft and Position Control operation ........... F
9. Check front axle differential Flow control operation................................. F
and hub oil levels ........................................ F
Remote control valve operation .................. F
10. Check brake pedal equalization.................. F
Control operation......................................... F
11. Check and adjust parking brake ................. F
7. Transmission clutch pedal disconnect
12. Wheel-to-rim clamp bolts and lock nuts switch adjustment........................................ F
for tightness ................................................ F
8. Calibrate Full Powershift
13. Wheel disc-to-hub nuts for tightness........... F transmission clutches (see page 4-56) ....... F
14. Front end weight clamp bolts PERFORMANCE SERVICE CHECKS:
for tightness ................................................ F
1. Engine operation including throttle and
15. Front wheel track alignment (2wd/4wd) ...... F governor operation ...................................... F
16. Fuel level..................................................... F 2. Transmission, including clutch .................... F
17. Grease front wheel bearings....................... F 3. Steering control ........................................... F
18. Lubricate all grease fittings ......................... F 4. Differential lock engagement
19. Clean air cleaner primary element .............. F and disengagement..................................... F
20. Check air intake and intercooler hose 5. Brake action ................................................ F
connections................................................. F 6. All optional equipment and accessories...... F
21. Check cooling system hose connections .... F
SAFETY ITEMS CHECKS:
22. Check torque of exhaust manifold bolts...... F
1. Safety cab or frame mounting bolt torque ... F
2. Neutral start switches operative .................. F
3. Seat belt and coupling................................. F
SERVICE PERFORMED
TRACTOR MODEL ................................................ TRACTOR SERIAL NUMBER .........................................
OWNER’S SIGNATURE ............................................................................. DATE...............................................
DEALER’S SIGNATURE ............................................................................. DATE...............................................
8-1
8-2
CHECK AND ADJUST, AS REQUIRED

(Owner’s copy)
INOPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS: OPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS:
1. Check engine oil level.................................. F All operative checks are to be performed with the
2. Tyre pressures and condition ..................... F tractor at operating temperature.
3. Radiator coolant level and specific 1. Lights and instruments for proper
gravity (1.071 - 1.083 at 16 ° C (60 ° F)) ..... F operation ..................................................... F
4. Inspect engine Poly V-belt ........................... F 2. Windscreen wipe/wash operation ............... F
5. Inspect air compressor Poly V-belt 3. Fluid and oil leaks ....................................... F
(air operated trailer brakes only).................. F 4. Maximum no-load speed and idle speed
6. Inspect air conditioner Poly V-belt ............... F adjustments and fuel shut-off ...................... F
7. Change hydraulics/transmission filters ........ F 5. P.T.O. operation.......................................... F
8. Check transmission/rear axle oil level ......... F 6. Hydraulic System: F
9. Check front axle differential Draft and Position Control operation ........... F
and hub oil levels ......................................... F Flow control operation................................. F
10. Check brake pedal equalization................... F Remote control valve operation .................. F
11. Check and adjust parking brake .................. F Control operation ........................................ F
12. Wheel-to-rim clamp bolts and lock nuts 7. Transmission clutch pedal disconnect
for tightness ................................................. F switch adjustment ....................................... F
13. Wheel disc-to-hub nuts for tightness ........... F 8. Calibrate Full Powershift transmission
14. Front end weight clamp bolts clutches (see page 4-56) ............................ F
for tightness ................................................. F PERFORMANCE SERVICE CHECKS:
15. Front wheel track alignment (2wd/4wd) ....... F 1. Engine operation including throttle and
16. Fuel level ..................................................... F governor operation ..................................... F
17. Grease front wheel bearings........................ F 2. Transmission, including clutch .................... F
18. Lubricate all grease fittings .......................... F 3. Steering control ........................................... F
19. Clean air cleaner primary element............... F 4. Differential lock engagement and
20. Check air intake and intercooler disengagement .......................................... F
hose connections......................................... F 5. Brake action ................................................ F
21. Check cooling system hose connections..... F 6. All optional equipment and accessories...... F
22. Check torque of exhaust manifold bolts....... F SAFETY ITEMS CHECKS:
1. Safety cab or frame mounting bolt torque ... F
2. Neutral start switches operative .................. F
3. Seat belt and coupling ................................ F
SERVICE PERFORMED
TRACTOR MODEL ................................................. TRACTOR SERIAL NUMBER .........................................
OWNER’S SIGNATURE ............................................................................ DATE..............................................
DEALER’S SIGNATURE............................................................................. DATE..............................................
8-3
8-4
SECTION 9
INDEX
Numerics Draft control ..............................................3-61
4 wheel drive EDC control panel ..................................... 3-57
Safety Precautions .................................. 2-100 External switch .......................................... 3-66
A Hitch Position Display ............................... 3-58
Accessory Indicator light panel ................................... 3-58
40A power socket ....................................... 6-5 Position Control ......................................... 3-64
AFS 200 Monitor ......................................... 6-2 Pre-operation settings ............................... 3-60
Auxiliary Headlights .................................... 6-4 Ride control ............................................... 3-65
Battery Isolator Switch ................................ 6-6 Electronic Remote Valves ............................... 3-68
Dynamic Front Fenders .............................. 6-7 End user licence agreement terms .................... 1-2
Engine Coolant Immersion Heater .............. 6-3 Engine function displays .................................. 2-40
Rotary beacon ............................................ 6-4 Engine number .................................................. 1-4
Transmission Oil Heater ............................. 6-3 Engine oil pressure gauge ............................... 2-36
Acoustic alarms ............................................... 2-67 Error codes and Warnings ............................... 2-68
Air conditioning control .................................... 2-11 External Rear View Mirrors ................................ 2-8
Airborne noise emission .................................. 1-20 F
Alarm functions ............................................... 2-67 Fault Finding
Audible beep ................................................... 2-48 Brakes Features ........................................5-10
Automatic Engine Shutdown .................... 2-50, 3-8 Cab Features ............................................ 5-10
Automatic temperature control ........................ 2-13 Electrical system ....................................... 5-11
B Engine .........................................................5-4
Backlight adjustment ....................................... 2-49 Hydraulic Systems ......................................5-8
Ballasting ....................................................... 3-134 Three-point Hitch ........................................5-9
Before Operating ............................................... 2-1 Transmission Features ...............................5-7
Brake Pedals ................................................... 2-32 First service after 50 hours work ....................... 1-1
Follow You Home Lights .................................. 2-34
C
Foot Brake ....................................................... 2-32
Cab .................................................................... 2-4
Foot Throttle Pedal .......................................... 2-31
Cab Identification .............................................. 1-5
Four wheel drive ..............................................2-99
Cab Pressurisation Monitor ............................. 2-16
Operating 4WD in Manual Mode ............... 2-99
Carrying the tractor on a transporter ................. 3-3
Operating in Automatic Mode ................... 2-99
Cleaning the tractor ........................................... 1-1
Front Axle Suspension .................................. 2-101
Clutch Pedal .................................................... 2-77
Front hitch ........................................................ 3-45
Clutch pedal .................................................... 2-31
Coupling Implement to .............................. 3-54
Cold starting aid ................................................ 3-6
EXTERNAL CONTROLS .......................... 3-51
Connecting Jump Leads ................................... 3-4
Hitch Settings and Adjustments ................ 3-53
Constant Engine Speed (CES) ........................ 3-11
Operating mode ........................................3-50
Controls in the Driver's Cab .............................. 2-2
Operation .................................................. 3-46
Coolant temperature gauge ............................ 2-36
Setting the Height ..................................... 3-46
D Uncoupling Implement from Tractor .......... 3-55
Decals ............................................................. 1-14 Front PTO ........................................................ 3-40
Differential lock ................................................ 2-97 Auto PTO function ..................................... 3-42
Operating in Automatic Mode ................... 2-98 PTO Switch Operation .............................. 3-41
Operating in Manual Mode ....................... 2-97 Fuel Level Gauge ............................................ 2-36
Digital Clock ........................................... 2-40, 2-45
G
Dot matrix display ............................................ 2-41
General information ........................................... 1-1
Driveline Identification ....................................... 1-4
Ground speed .................................................. 2-93
Driver's seat .................................................... 2-23
Ground speed display ...................................... 2-40
Dual rear wheels ........................................... 3-132
H
E
Hand throttle .................................................... 2-32
Ecology and the environment ............................ 1-6
Hazard light switch .......................................... 2-35
Electrical Power Sockets ................................. 2-20
Headland Management Control (HMC) ........... 3-13
Electronic Draft Control ................................... 3-56
Function .................................................... 3-15
Console ..................................................... 3-57
Playing a Programme ............................... 3-20
9-1
SECTION 9 – INDEX
Quick Guide .............................................. 3-13 Cleaning the tractor .................................. 4-71

Recording a programme ........................... 3-18 Drain air brake reservoir ........................... 4-16
Symbols .................................................... 3-17 Draining and Refilling the Cooling System 4-46
Hitch Draining the water separator .................... 4-13
Ball hitch ................................................. 3-109 Drive belt tension ...................................... 4-28
Fixed Tow Pin (Piton) ............................. 3-108 Engine oil change ..................................... 4-33
Swivelling Tow Pin - Auto Engagement .. 3-107 Engine oil level .......................................... 4-15
Swivelling Tow Pin - Manual Four wheel drive lubrication ...................... 4-39
Engagement .............................. 3-107 Fuel specifications ...................................... 4-3
Vertically adjustable, with non-swivelling Fuel system bleeding ................................ 4-55
tow hitch .................................... 3-105 Fuses and relays ...................................... 4-65
Vertically adjustable, with swivelling tow General Information .................................... 4-1
hitch ........................................... 3-106 Hand brake adjustment ............................. 4-32
I Headlight and worklamp adjustment ......... 4-61
ICU .................................................................. 2-36 Inspect poly V-belt .................................... 4-30
Implement Monitor Installation ........................ 2-18 Lubricants and Coolants ............................. 4-8
In cab storage ................................................. 2-19 Lubricate all grease fittings ....................... 4-20
International symbols ...................................... 1-19 Lubrication and maintenance chart ........... 4-10
K Outer element ........................................... 4-11
Key Pad .......................................................... 2-42 Protecting the electrical/electronic components
Key-start switch ........................................ 2-33, 3-6 during charging or welding ........... 4-72
Radiator Coolant Level ............................. 4-14
L
Reservoir .................................................. 4-16
Lift Rods, Lower Links and Top Link ............... 3-88
Safety covers and guards ........................... 4-5
Linkage Stabilisers .......................................... 3-94
Tractor storage ......................................... 4-73
Lubrication and maintenance
Transmission clutch calibration ................. 4-56
50-hour service ........................................... 4-2
Tyre Pressures ......................................... 4-27
Air conditioning system maintenance ....... 4-54
Automatic pick-up hitch ............................ 4-59 M
Battery electrolyte check .......................... 4-44 Mobile telephone ............................................. 2-18
Battery electrolyte level ............................ 4-29 Multi-function switch ........................................ 2-34
Bulb replacement ...................................... 4-62 P
Cab Suspension Adjustment .................... 4-60 Performance monitor ....................................... 2-60
Change 4WD differential oil ...................... 4-42 Power Beyond Couplings ................................ 3-84
Change 4WD planetary hub oil ................. 4-43 Power Beyond Ports ....................................... 3-83
Change air brake drier reservoir ............... 4-53 Power Management (PM) ............................... 3-10
Change cab air filters ................................ 4-40 Powershift Transmission ................................. 2-76
Change engine air cleaner inner element . 4-50 “Go To” mode .................................. 2-83, 2-87
Change engine breather filter ................... 4-52 Changing gear shift threshold ................... 2-86
Change front PTO gearbox oil .................. 4-43 Changing the Auto Shift Point ................... 2-84
Change fuel filters ..................................... 4-38 Changing the Gear Span .......................... 2-85
Change hydraulic and transmission Creeper Gears .......................................... 2-91
oil filters ....................................... 4-35 Error Codes .............................................. 2-92
Change the engine air cleaner Operation .................................................. 2-77
outer element ............................... 4-36 Speed matching ........................................ 2-88
Change transmission/rear axle/hydraulic Transmission calibration ........................... 2-92
oil and filters ................................ 4-41 Product identification ......................................... 1-3
Check brake pedal latching/unlatching ..... 4-58 PTO operation ................................................. 1-10
Check engine air intake connections ........ 4-37 Q
Check Front PTO Gearbox Oil Level ........ 4-32 Quick-fit couplers ............................................ 3-92
Check remote control valve drain bottles . 4-59 R
Check transmission/rear axle Radio ............................................................... 2-17
and hydraulic oil level .................. 4-31 Rear PTO ........................................................ 3-26
Check valve tappet clearance .................. 4-51 Attaching PTO-driven equipment .............. 3-28
Check wheel nuts ..................................... 4-26 Auto PTO Control ..................................... 3-36
Clean the cab air filters ............................. 4-18 Description ................................................ 3-26
Cleaning the radiator, intercooler, oil cooler External switch .......................................... 3-38
and air-conditioner condenser ..... 4-17
9-2
SECTION 9 – INDEX
PTO Switch Operation .............................. 3-27 Single Line System .................................3-116

Two-speed PTO systems ......................... 3-30 Transport Locks ............................................... 3-52
Two-speed PTO with changeable Turn assist ....................................................... 3-24
stub shaft ..................................... 3-31 V
Two-speed shiftable PTO ......................... 3-33 Vehicle identification plate ................................. 1-3
remote valves .................................................. 3-68 Vehicle weight information ................................. 1-5
Einstellung der Durchflussmenge ............. 3-69 W
Operating Continuous Flow Hydraulic Warning lights and telltales .............................. 2-37
Equipment .................................... 3-81 Warranty ............................................................ 1-1
Operating Several Remote Valves Wheel tracks .................................................. 3-119
Simultaneously or Remote Bar axle ...................................................3-126
Valves and Hydraulic Lift ............. 3-82 Front axle oscillation stops ......................3-122
Operation .................................................. 3-71 Front wheel alignment .............................3-123
Replaying a Timed Programme ................ 3-79 Front Wheel Track Adjustment ...............3-119
Zeiteinstellung ........................................... 3-69 Rear wheel track adjustment ..................3-124
Rollover protection .......................................... 1-13 Steering Stops ........................................3-122
S Working with the tractor ..................................... 1-9
Screen wash/wipe control ............................... 2-35
Service Parts ..................................................... 1-1
Servicing the tractor ........................................ 1-11
Specifications
Brake ........................................................ 7-15
Capacities ................................................... 7-6
Cooling System ........................................... 7-8
Electrical Equipment ................................. 7-16
Engine ......................................................... 7-7
Front 3-point hitch ..................................... 7-14
Front PTO ................................................... 7-9
Fuel System ................................................ 7-7
General Dimensions ................................... 7-2
Hydraulic Systems .................................... 7-10
Minimum Hardware Tightening Torques ... 7-17
Operating Angle .......................................... 7-9
Rear PTO .................................................... 7-9
Remote Control Valves ............................. 7-14
Steering .................................................... 7-15
Transmission Features ............................... 7-8
Vehicle Weights .......................................... 7-5
Speed display .................................................. 2-47
Starting the Engine ............................................ 3-7
Steering Column Adjustment ........................... 2-33
Stopping the Engine .......................................... 3-8
Swinging Drawbar ........................................... 3-99
T
NOTE: CNH Österreich GmbH retains the right to modify
Three-point Hitch ............................................. 3-86
the technical data at any time to differ from the present text
Top link and right-hand lift rod ......................... 3-90 and to make constructive improvements to the current
Electronic Operation ................................. 3-90 versions of the pictures and diagrams in this manual without
Top link support bracket .................................. 3-91 thereby entering into a commitment to retrofit machines sold
Towing equipment ......................................... 3-104 prior.
Towing the Tractor ............................................ 3-3 All details in this manual are based on the status of the tech-
Tractor Identification .......................................... 1-3 nical data at the time of printing.
TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM .......................... 3-112 Reprints and translations, including partial reprints and
AIR OPERATED Trailer Braking System translations, are prohibited without the written approval of
(Italy only) .................................. 3-117 CNH Österreich GmbH.
Dual Line System .................................... 3-116
Hydraulic ................................................. 3-113
Pneumatic ............................................... 3-114
9-3

210 Puma

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

210 Puma

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CASE

PUMA 165 Multi-Controller

END USER LICENCE AGREEMENT TERMS

Further information relating to engine adjustments

Identification of the cab

ECOLOGY AND THE ENVIRONMENT

Failure to follow the CAUTION, WARNING and

DRIVING THE TRACTOR

6. On four wheel drive tractors, the drive to the

WORKING WITH THE TRACTOR

4. Avoid accidental contact with the gear shift

12. Always select Position Control when attaching PTO OPERATION

z Stop the engine and relieve the pressure before

1. The cooling system operates under pressure

3. Do not smoke while refuelling the tractor or

WHEN YOU SEE THIS SYMBOL ! , IT MEANS: ATTENTION!

z The Protective Structure MUST be replaced.

z The mounting or suspension for the Protective

z All damaged parts MUST be replaced.

Part number 82030522

Part number 81871702

Part number 87802167

Glow plug in the

Automatic Indicators Standard signal

Engine speed Indicators Slow or

Radiator coolant Rear axle Height limit control

Air Transmission oil

Lights Air Filter 4 wheel drive Hydraulics and

Headlight 4 wheel drive Remotevalve

AIRBORNE NOISE EMISSION

Noise level at driver’s ear Drive by noise level

Closed (1) Open (2)

Model Transmission Annex II* Annex II* Annex IV**

* Test results are in accordance with directive 77/311/EEC Annex II.

Maximum noise level at the operator’s ear with:

** Test results in accordance with EU Directive 74/151/EEC, Annex IV.

Integrated Control Unit 2 - 36

Full Powershift Transmission

Differential Lock and Four Wheel Drive 2 - 97

Front Suspension 2 - 101

CONTROLS IN THE DRIVER’S CAB

General View of Tractor Controls

Key to Figure 1 Description on Page

External Door Handle

Right-Hand Exit Door

Entering and Exiting the Cab

IMPORTANT: Retain control of the window when

High Visibility Roof Panel (where fitted)

The sun visor may be adjusted to reduce glare or

External Rear View Mirrors

Move the mirror arm, as required, to obtain the best

Adjustable air vent

IMPORTANT: The air conditioning system uses

When the windows are clear, turn the air

z Never expose any part of the air conditioner

z If refrigerant should contact the eyes, wash the

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) (where fitted)

Economy and Defrost Switch

Although it is possible to pressurise the cab interior

Cab Pressurisation Monitor (where fitted)

With the blower in the off position the yellow

Radio/Cassette/CD Player (where fitted)

Work Lamp and Beacon Switch Panel